RDR-HXD870/HXD970/

HXD1070
RMT-D248P

SERVICE MANUAL AEP Model

UK Model
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

Ver. 1.1 2007.10

Australian Model
RDR-HXD870/HXD970

Revised-1

Photo: RDR-HXD870
RMT-D248P

SPECIFICATIONS

System Video recording format: MPEG-2, USB:

Laser: Semiconductor laser
Transmission standards (Digital
broadcasting): DVB-T
Channel coverage (Digital
broadcasting):
VHF: E5 to E12, F5 to F10, Italian D to
H2, Australian AS6 to AS12
UHF: E21 to E69, B21 to B68, F21 to
F69, Australian AS27 to AS69
Channel coverage (Analogue
broadcasting):
PAL (B/G, D/K, I)/SECAM (L)
VHF: E2 to E12, R1 to R12, F2 to F10,
Italian A to H, AS0 to AS12, NZ1 to NZ11,
Ireland A to J, South Africa 4 to 11, 13
UHF: E21 to E69, AS28 to AS69, R21 to (S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
R69, B21 to B69, F21 to F69
CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S20, France
B to Q
HYPER: S21 to S41
The above channel coverage merely ensures
the channel reception within these ranges. It
does not guarantee the ability to receive
signals in all circumstances. For details, see
“Receivable channels”.
Video reception: Frequency synthesizer
system
Audio reception: Split carrier system
Aerial out: 75-ohm asymmetrical aerial
socket
Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer G-LINK: mini jack (AEP, UK only)
indication: 24-hour cycle (digital)/ HDMI OUT: HDMI 19-pin-Standard
Power back-up duration: 1 hour Connector
MPEG-1
Audio recording format/applicable
bit rate: Dolby Digital 2 ch
256 kbps/128 kbps (in EP, SLP, and
SEP mode), PCM
Inputs and outputs
LINE 2 OUT
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)
LINE 2 IN
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than
22 kilohms
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)
LINE 3 – TV: 21-pin
CVBS OUT
S-Video/RGB OUT (upstream)
LINE 1/DECODER (AEP, UK only): 21-pin
CVBS IN/OUT
S-Video/RGB IN
Decoder (AEP, UK only)
DV IN: 4-pin/i.LINK S100
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono jack/
0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR):
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
PB/CB: 0.7 Vp-p, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p
USB jack Type A (For connecting
digital still camera, Memory card
reader and USB memory)
USB jack Type B (For connecting
PictBridge-compatible printers)
General
Power requirements: 220-240 V AC,
50/60 Hz
Power consumption: 49 W
Dimensions (approx.):
430 × 76.5 × 286 mm (width/height/
depth) incl. projecting parts
Hard disk drive capacity:
RDR-HXD870: 160 GB
RDR-HXD970: 250 GB
RDR-HXD1070: 500 GB
Mass (approx.): 4.7 kg
Operating temperature: 5ºC to 35ºC
Operating humidity: 25% to 80%
Supplied accessories:
Mains lead (1)
Aerial cable (1)
Remote commander (remote) (1)
Audio/Video cord (1) (Australian)
Set top box controller (1) (AEP, UK model)
R6 (size AA) batteries (2)
EURO AV adapter with selector (1) (Australian model)
EURO AV adapter (1) (Australian model)
Specifications and design are subject to
change without notice.
DVD RECORDER
 WARNING!!
WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER EXIT WITH
THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO
CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION, BE SURE TO OBSERVE
FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE
OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK.
CAUTION:
The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye
hazard.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS
PUBLISHED BY SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following
safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes
and bridges.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
—2—
Unleaded solder
Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead-
free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
(Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
: LEAD FREE MARK
Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.
• Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than
ordinary solder.
Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be
applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.
Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to
about 350°C.
Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the
heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!
• Strong viscosity
Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than
ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such
as on IC pins, etc.
• Usable with ordinary solder
It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may
also be added to ordinary solder.
Special Component Notice
The components identified by mark 9 contain confidential
information.
Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired
and/or replaced.
4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
recommend their replacement.
5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C
during repairing.
• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the
circuit board (within 3 times).
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering
or unsoldering.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
SERVICE NOTE
1. DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY
CANNOT BE EJECTED (FORCED EJECTION) ············ 5
2. BOARD CONNECTION, SERVICE REMOTE
CONTROLLER ·································································· 5
3. MODEL NAME SETTING METHOD WHEN ENGINE
IS REPLACED ··································································· 6
4. HOW TO DIAGNOSE HDD FAILURE ···························· 7
4-1. Defective HDD ··································································· 7
4-2. HDD Recognition status ····················································· 7
4-3. Display [E01] on FLD with unrecognized HDD ················ 8
4-4. Display [E02] on FLD ························································ 9
4-5. When playing a video, MP3, or JPG, the contents freeze ·· 9
4-6. Factory Check ··································································· 10
4-7. Self Test ············································································ 10
4-8. Performance Check ·························································· 11
1. GENERAL
WARNING ············································································ 1-1
Precautions ············································································· 1-1
Quick Guide to Disc Types ···················································· 1-2
Hookups and Settings ································································ 1-3
Hooking Up the Recorder ······················································ 1-3
Step 1: Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box Control-
ler ······················································································· 1-3
Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord ················· 1-4
Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord ················· 1-5
Step 4: Connecting the Mains Lead ······································· 1-5
Step 5: Preparing the Remote ················································ 1-5
Step 6: Easy Setup ································································· 1-6
Connecting a VCR or Similar Device ···································· 1-7
Connecting an External Decoder ··········································· 1-7
Eight Basic Operations
— Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder ························ 1-8
1. Inserting a Disc ·································································· 1-8
2. Recording a Programme ···················································· 1-8
3. Playing the Recorded Programme (Title List) ··················· 1-9
4. Displaying the Playing Time and Play Information ·········· 1-9
5. Changing the Name of a Recorded Programme ·············· 1-10
6. Labelling and Protecting a Disc ······································· 1-10
7. Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment (Finalise) ··· 1-10
8. Reformatting a Disc ························································· 1-11
Guide to Digital Services (For Freeview users only) ·············· 1-11
EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) ··································· 1-11
Programme Information ······················································· 1-11
Viewing a Digital Text Service ············································ 1-12
Timer Recording (For Freeview users only) ···························· 1-12
Before Recording ································································· 1-12
Timer Recording (Standard/EPG) ······································· 1-12
Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings
(Timer List) ······································································ 1-14
Recording from Connected Equipment ······························· 1-14
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue broadcasting only) ···················· 1-15
Introduction to the GUIDE Plus+ System ··························· 1-15
Watching TV Using the GUIDE Plus+ System ··················· 1-15
Searching for a Programme Using the GUIDE Plus+
System ·············································································· 1-16
Listing Up Your Favourite Programme Information
(My TV) ··········································································· 1-16
Making Changes to the GUIDE Plus+ System ···················· 1-16
Timer Recording (For analogue broadcasting only) ················ 1-17
Before Recording ································································· 1-17
Timer Recording (GUIDE Plus+/Manual) ·························· 1-17
Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings ·················· 1-18
Recording from Connected Equipment ······························· 1-19
Playback ·················································································· 1-19
Playing the Recorded Programme/DVD ······························ 1-19
Pausing a TV Broadcast (TV Pause/Pause Live TV) ··········· 1-21
—3—
Playing from the Beginning of the Programme You Are
Recording (Chase Play) ··················································· 1-21
Playing a Previous Recording While Making Another
(Simultaneous Rec and Play) ··········································· 1-21
Searching for a Time/Title/Chapter/Track, etc ···················· 1-21
Erasing and Editing ································································· 1-22
Before Editing ······································································ 1-22
Erasing and Editing a Title ·················································· 1-22
Erasing and Editing a Chapter ············································· 1-23
Creating and Editing a Playlist ············································ 1-23
Dubbing (HDD y DVD) ······················································ 1-24
Before Dubbing ··································································· 1-24
HDD/DVD Dubbing ···························································· 1-24
Dubbing Using Dubbing List ·············································· 1-24
Making a Backup Disc (DVD Backup) ······························· 1-25
DV Camcorder Dubbing ·························································· 1-25
Before DV Camcorder Dubbing ·········································· 1-25
Dubbing an Entire DV Format Tape
(DV One Touch Dubbing) ················································ 1-26
Dubbing Selected Scenes (Manual Dubbing) ······················ 1-26
Playing from a DV Camcorder ············································ 1-26
Audio Tracks ··········································································· 1-26
Playing Audio Tracks from CD/DVD ·································· 1-26
Searching for an Audio Track ·············································· 1-27
About Jukebox ····································································· 1-27
Preparing for Using Jukebox ··············································· 1-27
Playing Audio Tracks Using Jukebox/USB Device ············· 1-28
Managing Audio Tracks on the Music Jukebox ·················· 1-28
JPEG Image Files ···································································· 1-29
About the “Photo Album” Function ···································· 1-29
Preparing for Using the “Photo Album” Function ··············· 1-29
Using the “Photo Album” List ············································· 1-30
Managing JPEG Image Files on the HDD ··························· 1-30
Printing JPEG Image Files ·················································· 1-31
Settings and Adjustments ························································ 1-31
Disc Settings (Disc Setup) ··················································· 1-31
Recorder Settings (Basic) ···················································· 1-31
Aerial Reception Settings (Digital Tuner) ··························· 1-32
Aerial Reception Settings (Analog Tuner) ·························· 1-32
Video Settings (Video In/Out) ············································· 1-33
Audio Input Settings (Audio In) ·········································· 1-33
Audio Output Settings (Audio Out) ····································· 1-34
Language Settings (Language) ············································ 1-34
Recording Settings (Recording) ·········································· 1-34
Playback Settings (Playback) ·············································· 1-35
Limitation Settings (Parental Lock) ····································· 1-35
HDMI Settings (HDMI Output) ·········································· 1-36
Other Settings (Options) ······················································ 1-36
Additional Information ···························································· 1-37
Troubleshooting ··································································· 1-37
Resetting the Recorder ························································· 1-39
Notes About This Recorder ················································· 1-39
Specifications ······································································· 1-39
Notes on MP3 Audio Tracks, JPEG Image Files,
and DivX Video Files ······················································· 1-39
About i.LINK ······································································· 1-40
Guide to Parts and Controls ················································· 1-40
Language Code List ····························································· 1-41
Country/Area Code ······························································ 1-41
2. DISASSEMBLY
2-1. UPPER CASE ································································· 2-2
2-2. TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY ·········································· 2-2
2-3. FRONT PANEL SECTION ············································· 2-3
2-4 FR-274 BOARD, FL-178 BOARD ································· 2-3
2-5. DVD DRIVE ··································································· 2-4
2-6. DC FAN ··········································································· 2-4
2-7. HARD DISK ··································································· 2-5
2-8. AV-114 BOARD ······························································ 2-5
2-9. DT-120 BOARD ······························································ 2-6
2-10. POWER SUPPLY BLOCK ············································· 2-6
2-11. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ··································· 2-7
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM ···································· 3-1
3-2. AV-114 BLOCK DIAGRAM ·········································· 3-3
3-3. DT-120 BLOCK DIAGRAM ·········································· 3-5
3-4. RD-065 BLOCK DIAGRAM ·········································· 3-7
3-5. FR-274, FL-178 BLOCK DIAGRAM ···························· 3-9
3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM ······································· 3-11
4. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ································ 4-1
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································ 4-3
WAVEFORMS ································································ 4-4
• AV-114 (1/5) (IT CONTROLLER, IR)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-5
• AV-114 (2/5) (POWER/FAN CONT.)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-7
• AV-114 (3/5) (VIDEO/AUDIO)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-9
• AV-114 (4/5) (EURO)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-11
• AV-114 (5/5) (TUNER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13
• DT-120 (1/5) (EMMA2LL)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15
• DT-120 (2/5) (CI CONTROL)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-17
• DT-120 (3/5) (DIGITAL TUNER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-19
• DT-120 (4/5) (POWER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-21
• DT-120 (5/5) (VIDEO DECODER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-23
• FR-274 (FL DRIVER, LINE 2 IN, FUNCTION SW)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-25
• FL-178 (DV, USB, REMOCON RECEIVER,
POWER SW)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-27
• RD-065 (1/7) (POWER BLOCK)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-29
• RD-065 (2/7) (EMMA BLOCK)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-31
• RD-065 (3/7) (VIDEO/AUDIO BLOCK)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-33
• RD-065 (4/7) (MEMORY BLOCK)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-35
• RD-065 (5/7) (SATA/IDE IF)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-37
• RD-065 (6/7) (HDMI/DV/USB BLOCK)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-39
• RD-065 (7/7) (DVD DRIVE)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-41
• SWITCHING REGULATOR (SRV-2057EK)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-43
4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS ····································· 4-45
• FR-274 (FL DRIVER, LINE 2 IN, FUNCTION SW)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-45
• AV-114 (IT CONTROLLER, IR, POWER/FAN CONT.,
VIDEO/AUDIO, EURO, TUNER)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-47
• DT-120 (EMMA2LL, CI CONTROL,
DIGITAL TUNER, POWER, VIDEO ENCODER)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-51
—4—
• RD-065 (POWER BLOCK, EMMA BLOCK, VIDEO/
AUDIO BLOCK, MEMORY BLOCK, SATA/IDE IF,
HDMI/DV/USB BLOCK, DVD DRIVE)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-55
• FL-178 (DV, USB, REMOCON RECEIVER,
POWER SW)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-59
5. IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
5-1. IT CONTROL IC
(IC101:LC87F06J2A-F58W3-E (AV-114 BOARD)) ······ 5-1
5-2. AV ENCODER/DECODER IC
(IC1001:MC10050F1-105-LU1-A (RD-65 BOARD)) ··· 5-3
6. SERVICE MODE
6-1. SERVICE MODE MAP ·················································· 6-2
6-2. Diagnostic Mode ····························································· 6-3
6-2-1. Model Setting ·································································· 6-3
6-2-2. Service Mode ··································································· 6-4
6-2-3. Version Information and Other Information
(First screen) ···································································· 6-4
6-2-4. RF Level Simplified Diagnosis (Subscreen1) ················· 6-5
6-2-5. HDD Information for the HDD return sheet
(Simplified measurement mode) ····································· 6-6
6-2-6. Cautions for handling the HDD ······································· 6-7
6-2-7. HDD Error Logging ························································ 6-9
6-2-8. ATA/ATAPI History - ERR ·········································· 6-10
6-2-9. How to confirm HDD Access Flow ······························· 6-10
6-2-10. ATA/ATAPI Debugging Screen (Second Screen) and
LD Deterioration Judgment (for writer) ······················ 6-11
6-2-11. History of VR Recording-related Errors ····················· 6-13
6-2-12. DV Service Mode ······················································· 6-17
6-2-13. EPG Service Mode ······················································ 6-19
6-2-14. Aging Mode ································································ 6-21
6-2-15. HDD Check Mode ······················································ 6-22
6-3. Setup Related Menu ······················································ 6-23
6-3-1. Firmware Downloading ················································· 6-23
6-3-2. Area-Specific Channel Setting ······································ 6-23
6-3-3. OSD Filter Setting (Subscreen 4) ·································· 6-24
7. ADJUSTMENTS
7-1. Video System Adjustment ··············································· 7-1
8. REPAIR PARTS LIST
8-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 8-1
8-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 8-1
8-1-2. CHASSIS SECTION ······················································· 8-2
8-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ·········································· 8-3
 SERVICE NOTE

1. DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY CANNOT BE EJECTED (FORCED EJECTION)

1. Remove the upper case.
2. Insert the stiff wire in the hole and eject the tray.

Hole

1 The stiff wire

Open the tray

NOTES DURING THE FORCED EJECTION

1. If the forced ejection is executed while a blank disc media (DVD±RW, ±R) exists on the tray
• Insert a DVD-ROM (DVD test disc, DVD software available on the market, or the like) in the tray and then close the tray.
Note1: If you close the tray while it is empty, ejection of the tray becomes impossible.
Note2: If you close the tray with a CD disc inserted in it, the CD can be ejected. However, if you close the tray while it is empty, there can be a case that
ejection of the tray becomes impossible.
Note3: Even if you replace the DVD drive unit while the tray remains under the state as described above, the situation cannot be improved.

2. If the tray cannot be ejected while the disc is not inserted

• Execute the forced ejection.
• Insert a DVD-ROM (DVD test disc, DVD software available on the market, or the like) on the tray and try to close the tray.
(There are cases that it recovers the trouble.)

3. Contents of forcedly ejected blank disc media (DVD±RW, ±R) can be damaged. (There can be a case that initialization is also impossible.)

2. BOARD CONNECTION, SERVICE REMOTE CONTROLLER

Extension cable
(J-6090-201-A)

RD-065 board : CN2301(40core)

AV-114 board : CN101(40core)

SERVICE REMOTE CONTROLLER

(J-6090-203-A)

—5—
3. MODEL NAME SETTING METHOD WHEN ENGINE IS REPLACED
Required equipment:
• Remote controller (RMT-D248P)
• Service remote controller (J-6090-203-A)
• Monitor

Model name delete method

1. Turn the main POWER ON.
2. Press the following buttons on the service remote controller in this order.:
“ESC” k “CHAP” k “1”
* Confirm that the above operation is performed in the state that the screen has exited all settings such as “Home Menu” or “Simple
Setting”.
3. Turn the main POWER OFF.
4. Turn the main POWER ON. (The screen as shown in Fig. 1 appears.)
5. Select “2” on the screen by using the service remote controller.
* If “1” is selected on the screen, the machine will not work at all. Be sure to select “2”.
6. Find out the tentative model name from the Correspondence Table (Table 1) for the client machine. Then, enter the 4-digit “Input No.”
on the screen using the service remote controller.
7. The model name setting method is complete. (Screen disappears.)
* Upon completion of the model name setting, be sure to press both “ENTER” and “3” simultaneously on the service remote controller
without fail. It sets the remote control code “3”.

Fig.1 S-company/P-company selection

[Recorder's Model Setting]

Input the number using the remote for Service

> ?

Input No. Manufacturer

[ 1 : P ]
[ 2 : S ]

Table1 Correspondence table between tentative model name and final product name
Tentative model name
Model name
AEP1 AEP2 AEP3 UK Australian
RDR-HXD870 MRX-1660/EC1 MRX-1665/EC2 MRX-1660/EC3 MRX-1660/CEK MRX-1660/AU2
RDR-HXD970 MRX-1670/EC1 MRX-1675/EC2 MRX-1670/EC3 MRX-1670/CEK MRX-1670/AU2
RDR-HXD1070 MRX-1680/EC1 MRX-1685/EC2 — MRX-1680/CEK —

—6—
4. HOW TO DIAGNOSE HDD FAILURE

4-1. Defective HDD

There are four symptoms of defects in the HDD.
1. “E01” is displayed on the FLD.
(The HDD is not recognized or is not authorized.)
2. “E02” is displayed on the FLD.
3. When playing a video, MP3, or JPG, contents freeze.
4. Irregular noises from the HDD

4-2. HDD Recognition status

How to enter Recognition status and sub screen mode.
• While the GUI screen is not displayed, use the service remote controller and press “ESC” key followed by “DISP” key.
• While the first screen is displayed, press “DIG/ANA” key repeatedly until the desired subscreen is displayed.
The subscreens change.
Service remote controller
(Part code: J-6090-203-A)

MRX-1635/EC1 VERSION : 1.01

SYSCON : RELEASE 104
Rev. 1. 5895
TUNERCON : 1.178 OK
DRIVE : DVD-RW DVR-L12X OK
1.00 OK
• Details on HDD data are described below:
PIC SERIAL : 000800004940
HDD INT : WDC WD2500AAJS 9 250 HDD : WDC1023456 # 160

Capacity of the HDD (unit: Gbytes)

DEVICE : E2R-FEx1.0 FLASH : 64M HDD identification error indication
REGION : 2 C : 0000400259 HDD model name
HDCP : 0000400259

HDD identification Details on HDD data

FL Display OS Display Remarks
conditions are described below.
“Repaining the HDD”.
r
REPAIR
“HDD repair is
complete”.
Check the connection to the
SATA cable and power cable.
An error occurred. Failure to physically
Replace the SATA cable or
Please consult your identify the HDD (no
Blank space power cable.
nearest Sony dealer. connection, defective
Replace the HDD.
E01 Note that contents on HDD, interface error).
Replace the FE or part in the
the HDD may be
SATA/ATA communication.
erased when servicing
this unit. Physical identification of
“#” indicates that the HDD is
HDD possible, but not WDC 10234564 # 160
not recognized.
identified
The Hard Disk Drive Physical identification of
“!” indicates an HDD
info is incorrect. HDD possible, HDD
E02 WDC 10234564 ! 160 authorization error. Initialize
Use the Disk Setup identified, but failure in
the HDD.
menu to reformat. logical formatting.
Physical identification of
HDD possible, HDD
Normal identified, and correct WDC 10234564 160
logical formatting (HDD
correctly identified).

—7—
4-3. Display [E01] on FLD with unrecognized HDD

E01

NO
Is the HDD free from
abnormal noises?

YES

NO
Is not “#” displayed? Unauthorized HDD Replace the HDD * Refer to “Note”.

Note: Write down the HDD information on the HDD

YES return sheet before replacing the HDD.
Note the information on pages 6-6, 6-7, 6-9,
and 6-10 of Chapter 6, “SERVICE MODE”.
Reconnect the SATA NO
cable. Does the problem Replace the SATA Cable For information about replacing the HDD, see
still occur? page 2-5 of Chapter 2, “DISASSEMBLY”.
After replacing the HDD, perform
“Factory Check” on “SERVICE NOTE”, page 10.
YES
When performing “Factory Check”, the data
saved to the HDD by the customer is erased.
Replace the SATA cable. NO Obtain customer consent before performing
Does the problem “Factory Check”.
still occur?

YES

Replace the HDD with a new

one and perform Factory Check. * Refer to “Note”.

Does the problem

NO
END
still occur?

YES
Note: Write down the HDD information on the HDD
There may be a problem with the Engine.
Therefore, put the original HDD back in the unit.
Then, follow the procedure to replace the Engine.
After replacing the Engine, perform “Setting the Model Name”
on “Service Note”, page 6.
return sheet before replacing the Engine.
For information about replacing the Engine,
see page 2-4 of Chapter 2, “DISASSEMBLY”.
When performing “Factory Check”, the data
saved to the HDD by the customer is erased.
Obtain customer consent before performing
“Factory Check”.

Does the problem NO

Final check
still occur?

Note: Performing “Final Check” will not erase the HDD data.
YES

Another defect
has occurred.

—8—
4-4. Display [E02] on FLD

Note: When E02 is displayed, the user data has

E02 already broken due to system DATA Error.

Is the HDD free from NO

Replace the HDD * Refer to “Note”.
abnormal noises?

YES

Factory check

Final check Note: Performing “Final Check” will not erase the HDD data.

Has the Final check ended

NO
Replace the HDD * Refer to “Note”.
with success?

YES

END

4-5. When playing a VIDEO, MP3, or JPG, the contents freeze

When playing a VIDEO, MP3, or JPG,

the contents freeze.
(Any error is not displayed on the FLD.)

Is the HDD free from

NO
abnormal noises?

YES

Display the ATA/ATAPI history by using

“HDD Access Flow” on page 6-10.

NO
Does the history show
no errors?

YES

Has the Final check ended

NO
Final check Replace the HDD
with success?
* Refer to “Note”.
YES
Note: Performing “Final Check”
will not erase the HDD data.
END

—9—
4-6. Factory Check
1. Pull out and then reconnect the AC cable.
2. Press “ESC” key followed by “P.RUN” key to start Formatting.
3. When “B COMPLETE” appears, the Factory Check is complete.
4. Press “Power” button. The unit starts normally.

When “Factory Check” has finished completely without error, reset “Recording Error History” and “ATA/ATAPI History Error” with the
Clear key.
Note: Write down the HDD information on the HDD return sheet before
Recording Error History Display
replacing the HDD.
Note the information on pages 6-6, 6-7, 6-9, and 6-10 of Chapter 6,
07-03-19 12:36:06 ESFSYS INIT
“SERVICE MODE”.
07-03-19 12:36:06 HDD Zero MR
07-03-19 12:36:06 HDD Initialze
When performing “Factory Check”, the data saved to the HDD by the
07-03-19 12:36:06 HDD Zero MR
customer is erased.
07-03-19 12:27:27 Status NG
Obtain customer consent before performing “Factory Check”.

“Recording Error History” and “ATA/ATAPI History Error”, see pages

6-9, 6-10 of Chapter 6, “SERVICE MODE”.

4-7. Final Check

4-7-1. SELF TEST (SMART TEST)

This is a simplified diagnosis for the HDD.
A serious failure in the HDD can be detected with this test.
Time required for testing: Approx. 60 sec.

How to start/terminate the diagnostic program

Use the remote control unit for servicing.
• How to start: Press “ESC”, “CX”, “0”, and “1” keys simultaneously.
• How to terminate: Press “ESC” key.

Execute Self-Test.
• Press “3” key on the remote control unit for servicing while the menu screen is displayed.
• When the following screen is displayed, press “1” key to start the Self-Test.

Note: “2. Exe Ext Self Test” is not used. Note: Performing “Self Test” will not erase the HDD data.

Diagnosis results
• Without an error: “. . . Completed” is displayed.
Then, proceed to the Extended Self-Test.
• With an error: “. . . Error” is displayed. Look at the number in Test Result.
If the place value for tens is 1 or 2, execute the Self-Test again.
If it is from 3 to 7, the HDD must be replaced.

Note: If the result of the second test is the same, replacement of the HDD is required.

Example: No error Example: With an error

— 10 —
4-7-2. Performance Check

Press “ESC” key, then “A.MON” key.

This is a reading test across all sectors of the HDD.

Data recorded on the HDD will not be erased, because no writing operation is performed.
Time required for testing: Approx. 45 min/160 G
75 min/250 G
130 to 150 min/500 G

When “Performance Check” finishes completely without error, reset “ATA/ATAPI History Error” with the Clear key.

FL display specification
HDD factory Check HDD performance Check
aNormal display aError display aNormal display aError display

0:Factory Check start 0 0 000000 80:Performance Check start 80 0 00000

Power On Power On

1:Power ON Test 1 0 000000 81:Power ON Test 81 0 00000

HDD ERR 01 HDD ERR 81

2:Random Write/Read/Compare Test 2 0 000000 82:all Sequential Read Verify Test 8 2 * * *H * *M* *S
HDD ERR 02 HDD ERR 82

3:ID Sequential Read Verify Test 3 * * *H * *M* *S 83:Power OFF Test 83 0 00000
HDD ERR 03 Power off H M S

4:OD Sequential Read Verify Test 4 * * *H * *M* *S 15s

HDD ERR 04
84:Complete 8 4 COMPLETE
5:Format 5 FM *H * *M* *S HDD ERR 05

6:Power OFF Test 6 0 000000

Power off

15s Power On
7 0 000000
20s HDD ERR 07 7:Power ON Test
Power off 8 0 000000 8:Power OFF Test
9:Power ON Test
15s Power On a:Power OFF Test
9 0 000000 b:Complete
20s HDD ERR 09
Power off A 0 000000

15s
B COMPLETE

Fig 1. FL Display Flow

* The logo for “Factory Check” and “Performance Check” is recorded in “ATA/ATAPI History Error”.

— 11 —
MEMO

— 12 —

This section is extracted from instruction manual.
(RDR-HXD770/HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070:
3-113-760-11 (1))
WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire or electric
shock, do not expose this apparatus
to rain or moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not
open the cabinet. Refer servicing to
qualified personnel only.
The mains lead must be changed
only at a qualified service shop.
Do not expose the battery to
excessive heat such as direct
sunlight, fire or the like.
This appliance is classified as a
CLASS 1 LASER product. The
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
MARKING is located on the rear
of the unit.
CAUTION
The use of optical instruments with
this product will increase eye
hazard. As the laser beam used in
this DVD recorder is harmful to
eyes, do not attempt to disassemble
the cabinet.
Refer servicing to qualified
personnel only.
This label is located on the laser
protective housing inside the
enclosure.
2
• This Product includes
FontAvenue® fonts licenced
by NEC corporation.
FontAvenue is a registered
trademark of NEC
corporation.
Copy guard function
Since the recorder has a copy
guard function, programmes
received through an external
tuner (not supplied) may contain
copy protection signals (copy
guard function) and as such may
not be recordable, depending on
the type of signal.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Caution: This recorder is
capable of holding a still
video image or on-screen
display image on your
television screen
indefinitely. If you leave the
still video image or on-
screen display image
displayed on your TV for an
extended period of time you
risk permanent damage to
your television screen.
Plasma display panels and
projection televisions are
especially susceptible to this.
If you have any questions or
problems concerning your
recorder, please consult your
nearest Sony dealer.
Notice for customers in the
United Kingdom and
Republic of Ireland
A molded plug complying with
BS1363 is fitted to this equipment
for your safety and convenience.
Should the fuse in the plug
supplied need to be replaced, a 5
AMP fuse approved by ASTA or
BSI to BS1362, (i.e., marked with
or mark) must be used.
If the plug supplied with this
equipment has a detachable fuse
cover, be sure to attach the fuse
cover after you change the fuse.
Never use the plug without the fuse
cover. If you should lose the fuse
cover, please contact your nearest
Sony service station.
Precautions
• This unit operates on 220 –
240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Check that
the unit’s operating voltage is
identical with your local power
supply.
• To prevent fire or shock hazard,
do not place objects filled with
liquids, such as vases, on the
apparatus.
• Install this system so that the
mains lead can be unplugged
from the wall socket
immediately in the event of
trouble.
GUIDE Plus+ and G-LINK are (1)
registered trademarks or
trademarks of, (2) manufactured
under license from and (3) subject
of various international patents and
patent applications owned by, or
licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide
International, Inc. and/or its related
affiliates.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE
INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/
OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES
ARE NOT IN ANY WAY
LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY
OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE
INFORMATION PROVIDED BY
THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN
NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-
TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL,
INC. AND /OR ITS RELATED
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR
ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF
PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
IN CONNECTION WITH THE
PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT,
OR SERVICES RELATING TO
THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
About this manual
Check your model name
The instructions in this
manual are for 4 models:
RDR-HXD770, RDR-
HXD870, RDR-HXD970
and RDR-HXD1070. Check
your model name by looking
at the front panel of the
recorder.
• In this manual, the internal
hard disk drive is written as
“HDD,” and “disc” is used as a
general reference for the HDD,
DVDs, or CDs unless
otherwise specified by the text
or illustrations.
• Icons, such as DVD , listed
at the top of each explanation
indicate what kind of media
can be used with the function
being explained.
• Instructions in this manual
describe the controls on the
remote. You can also use the
controls on the recorder if they
have the same or similar
names as those on the remote.
• The on-screen display
illustrations used in this
manual may not match the
graphics displayed on your TV
screen.
• The explanations regarding
DVDs in this manual refer to
DVDs created on this recorder.
The explanations do not apply
to DVDs that are created on
other recorders and played
back on this recorder.
SECTION 1
GENERAL
Disposal of Old Electrical
& Electronic Equipment
(Applicable in the
European Union and
other European countries
with separate collection
systems)
This symbol on the product or on
its packaging indicates that this
product shall not be treated as
household waste. Instead it shall be
handed over to the applicable
collection point for the recycling of
electrical and electronic
equipment. By ensuring this
product is disposed of correctly,
you will help prevent potential
negative consequences for the
environment and human health,
which could otherwise be caused
by inappropriate waste handling of
this product. The recycling of
materials will help to conserve
natural resources. For more
detailed information about
recycling of this product, please
contact your local Civic Office,
your household waste disposal
service or the shop where you
purchased the product.
The manufacturer of this
product is Sony Corporation,
1-7-1 Konan Minato-ku
Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan. The
Authorized Representative
for EMC and product safety
is Sony Deutschland GmbH,
Hedelfinger Strasse 61,
70327 Stuttgart, Germany.
For any service or guarantee
matters please refer to the
addresses given in separate
service or guarantee
documents.
1-1
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070
Precautions
This equipment has been tested
and found to comply with the
limits set out in the EMC
Directive using a connection
cable shorter than 3 metres.
On safety
Should any solid object or liquid
fall into the cabinet, unplug the
recorder and have it checked by
qualified personnel before
operating it any further.
About the hard disk drive
The hard disk has a high storage
density, which enables long
recording durations and quick
access to the written data.
However, it can easily be
damaged by shock, vibration or
dust, and should be kept away
from magnets. To avoid losing
important data, observe the
following precautions.
• Do not apply a strong shock to
the recorder.
• Do not place the recorder in a
location subject to mechanical
vibrations or in an unstable
location.
• Do not place the recorder on
top of a hot surface, such as a
VCR or amplifier (receiver).
• Do not use the recorder in a
place subject to extreme
changes in temperature
(temperature gradient less than
10 °C/hour).
• Do not move the recorder with
its mains lead connected.
• Do not disconnect the mains
lead while the power is on.
• When disconnecting the mains
lead, turn off the power and
make sure that the hard disk
drive is not operating (the
clock is displayed in the front
panel display for at least 30
seconds and all recording or
dubbing has stopped).
• Do not move the recorder for
one minute after you have
unplugged the mains lead.
• Do not attempt to replace or
upgrade the hard disk by
yourself, as this may result in
malfunction.
If the hard disk drive should
malfunction, you cannot recover
lost data. The hard disk drive is
only a temporary storage space.
About repairing the hard
disk drive
• The contents of the hard disk
drive may be checked in case
of repair or inspection during a
malfunction or modification.
However, the contents will not
be backed up or saved by
Sony.
• If the hard disk needs to be
formatted or replaced, it will
be done at the discretion of
Sony. All contents of the hard
disk drive will be erased,
including contents that violate
copyright laws.
On power sources
• The recorder is not
disconnected from the AC
power source (mains) as long
as it is connected to the wall
outlet, even if the recorder
itself has been turned off.
• If you are not going to use the
recorder for a long time, be
sure to disconnect the recorder
from the wall outlet. To
disconnect the AC power cord
(mains lead), grasp the plug
itself; never pull the cord.
On placement
• Place the recorder in a location
with adequate ventilation to
prevent heat build-up in the
recorder.
• Do not place the recorder on a
soft surface such as a rug that
might block the ventilation
holes.
• Do not place the recorder in a
confined space such as a
bookshelf or similar unit.
• Do not place the recorder in a
location near heat sources, or
in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust, or
mechanical shock.
• Do not place the recorder in an
inclined position. It is
designed to be operated in a
horizontal position only.
• Keep the recorder and discs
away from equipment with
strong magnets, such as
microwave ovens, or large
loudspeakers.
• Do not place heavy objects on
the recorder.
On recording
Make trial recordings before
making the actual recording.
On compensation for lost
recordings
Sony is not liable and will not
compensate for any lost
recordings or relevant losses,
including when recordings are
not made due to reasons
including recorder failure, or
when the contents of a recording
are lost or damaged as a result of
recorder failure or repair
undertaken to the recorder. Sony
will not restore, recover, or
replicate the recorded contents
under any circumstances.
Copyrights
• Television programmes, films,
video tapes, discs, and other
materials may be copyrighted.
Unauthorized recording of
such material may be contrary
to the provisions of the
copyright laws. Also, use of
this recorder with cable
television transmission may
require authorization from the
cable television transmitter
and/or programme owner.
• This product incorporates
copyright protection
technology that is protected by
U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright
protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision,
and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses
only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
,continued 3
 Usable disc versions (as of April 2007)
Quick Guide to Disc Types • 8x-speed or slower DVD+RWs
• 6x-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.1,
Ver.1.2 with CPRM*2)
Recordable and playable discs • 16x-speed or slower DVD+Rs
• 16x-speed or slower DVD-Rs (Ver.2.0,
Ver.2.1 with CPRM*2)
Icon used • 8x-speed or slower DVD+R DL (Double
Formatting Compatibility with other
Type Disc Logo in this Layer) discs
(new discs) DVD players (finalising)
manual
• 8x-speed or slower DVD-R DL (Dual
Layer) discs (Ver.3.0 with CPRM*2)
Select “Video Mode
Dub HDD contents to a
VR Off” in “HDD “DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” “DVD+R
DVD (VR mode) to play
mode Recording Format” DL,” “DVD-R,” and “DVD-R DL” are trademarks.
on other DVD players
Hard disk (page 144)
drive HDD *1 When an unformatted DVD-R is inserted into
(internal) Select “Video Mode this recorder, it is automatically formatted in
Dub HDD contents to a
Video On” (default) in Video mode. To format a new DVD-R in VR
DVD (Video mode) to play
mode “HDD Recording mode, format in the “Format” setup (page 47).
on other DVD players
Format” (page 144) *2
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable
Media) is a coding technology that protects
copyrights for images.

Automatically Discs that cannot be recorded on

Playable on DVD+RW
formatted in +VR
DVD+RW +RW compatible players • DVD-RAMs
mode (DVD+RW
(automatically finalised)
VIDEO)

Playable only on VR mode

VR Format in VR mode
-RWVR compatible players
mode (page 36)
(finalisation unnecessary)
DVD-RW
Playable on most DVD
Video Format in Video
-RWVideo players (finalisation
mode mode (page 36)
necessary) (page 45)

DVD+R
Automatically
Playable on most DVD
formatted in +VR
+R players (finalisation
mode (DVD+R
necessary) (page 45)
VIDEO)
DVD+R DL

Format in VR mode
(page 36)*1 Playable only on DVD-R
VR Formatting is in VR mode compatible
DVD-R -RVR
mode performed in the players (finalisation
“Format” setup necessary) (page 45)
(page 47).

Automatically Playable on most DVD

DVD-R Video
-RVideo formatted in Video players (finalisation
DL mode
mode necessary) (page 45)

10 ,continued 11

Note on playback operations of DVD b Notes

Playable discs VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs • Some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-
Rs, DVD-RAMs, or CD-RWs/CD-Rs cannot be
Some playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/
played on this recorder due to the recording
Icon used in
VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by quality or physical condition of the disc, or the
Type Disc Logo Characteristics software producers. Since this recorder plays characteristics of the recording device and
this manual
DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs according to the authoring software. The disc will not play if it has
disc contents the software producers not been correctly finalised. For more
Discs such as movies that can be information, see the operating instructions for the
designed, some playback features may not be
purchased or rented recording device.
DVD VIDEO This recorder also recognises DVD- available. See the instructions supplied with
DVD • You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the
RAMs* as DVD Video compatible the DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs.
same DVD-RW. To change the disc’s format,
discs. reformat the disc (page 47). Note that the disc’s
Region code (DVD VIDEO only)
contents will be erased after reformatting.
Your recorder has a region code printed on • You cannot shorten the time required for
VIDEO CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in the rear of the unit and will only play DVD
VIDEO CD VCD recording even with high-speed discs.
VIDEO CD/Super VIDEO CD format VIDEOs (playback only) labelled with • It is recommended that you use discs with “For
identical region codes. This system is used to Video” printed on their packaging.
protect copyrights. • You cannot add new recordings to DVD+Rs,
Music CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in DVD-Rs, or DVD-RWs (Video mode) that
CD CD DVD VIDEOs labelled ALL will also play
music CD format contain recordings made on other DVD
on this recorder.
If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, the equipment.
• In some cases, you may not be able to add new
DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-RAMs* message “Playback prohibited by region
recordings to DVD+RWs that contain recordings
containing MP3 audio tracks or DivX code.” will appear on the TV screen. made on other DVD equipment. If you do add a
video files Depending on the DVD VIDEO, no region new recording, note that this recorder will rewrite
DATA DVD — DATA DVD DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-ROMs code indication may be labelled even though the DVD menu.
containing MP3 audio tracks, JPEG playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by • You cannot edit recordings on DVD+RWs,
image files or DivX video files
area restrictions. DVD-RWs (Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs
that are made on other DVD equipment.
Region code • If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by
CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs
DATA CD — DATA CD containing either MP3 audio tracks, this recorder, the data may be erased.
JPEG image files or DivX video files • You may not be able to record, edit, or dub on
some recordable discs, depending on the disc.
• Do not insert any discs that cannot be recorded or
“DVD VIDEO” and “CD” are trademarks. • DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/ Music discs encoded with copyright played on this recorder. This may cause the
DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs that do not contain protection technologies recorder to malfunction.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are DVD Video, DivX video, JPEG image This product is designed to play back discs
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under that conform to the Compact Disc (CD)
files, or MP3 audio tracks.
license. standard.
• DVD Audio discs
DivX® is a video file compression technology,
• Cartridge-only type DVD-RAMs. Recently, various music discs encoded with
developed by DivX, Inc.
• HD layer on Super Audio CDs copyright protection technologies are being
* If the DVD-RAM has a removable cartridge, • DVD VIDEOs with a different region code marketed by some record companies. Please
remove the cartridge before playback. be aware that among those discs, there are
(page 13).
• DVDs that were recorded on a different some that do not conform to the CD standard
Discs that cannot be played and may not be playable by this product.
recorder and not correctly finalised.
• PHOTO CDs
• CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs that are Maximum recordable number of titles Note on DualDiscs
recorded in a format different from the A DualDisc is a two sided disc product which
formats mentioned in the table above. Disc Number of titles
mates DVD recorded material on one side
• Data part of CD-Extras HDD* 999 with digital audio material on the other side.
• BDs However, since the audio material side does
DVD-RW/DVD-R 99
• HD DVDs not conform to the Compact Disc (CD)
• Discs recorded with an AVCHD- DVD+RW/DVD+R 49 standard, playback on this product is not
compatible DVD video camera DVD+R DL 49 guaranteed.
DVD-R DL 99

* The maximum length for one title is 12 hours.

12 13

1-2
 Hookups and Settings
Step 1: Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box
Controller
Hooking Up the Recorder
If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals

Hookups and Settings

Follow steps 1 through 6 to hook up and adjust the settings of the recorder. Do not connect the
mains lead until you reach “Step 4: Connecting the Mains Lead” on page 23.
b Notes
• See “Specifications” (page 160) for a list of supplied accessories.
• Plug in cords securely to prevent unwanted noise.
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected.
• You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not have a SCART or video input jack.
• Be sure to disconnect the mains lead of each component before connecting.
Checking hookup and setting methods
The recorder incorporates both analogue and digital tuners. The programme guide and timer
recording method differ depending on which one you select. Depending on the broadcasts you
are receiving and your equipment, select one of the following aerial hookups. Do NOT set
“LINE 1 In” to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 137) when making connection B.
This recorder accepts RGB signals. If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals, connect
the TV SCART connector on the set top box receiver to the LINE 1/DECODER jack, and set
“LINE 1 In” to “RGB” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 137). See the instructions supplied
with the set top box receiver.
Using the set top box receiver control function
The set top box receiver control function can be used with hookup B. It allows the recorder to
control a set top box receiver via the supplied set top box controller. The recorder controls
programme positions on the set top box receiver for timer recording. You can also use the
recorder’s remote control to change programme positions on the set top box receiver whenever
the set top box receiver and recorder are turned on.
To use the set top box receiver control function, you need to connect the set top box controller
(page 17). After setting up the set top box receiver control, check that the recorder can correctly
control the set top box receiver (page 28).

When you receive Hookup Programme guide Timer recording using b Notes
programme guide • If your aerial is a flat cable (300-ohm twin lead cable), use an external aerial connector (not supplied) to
connect the aerial to the recorder.
Freeview A (page 16) Digital Service See page 52. • If you have separate cables for AERIAL antennas, use an AERIAL UHF/VHF band mixer (not supplied)
(page 48) to connect the aerial to the recorder.
Satellite, Cable B (page 17) GUIDE Plus+ (page 63) See page 71. • If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected
set top box receiver.
Terrestrial C (page 18) GUIDE Plus+ (page 63) See page 71.

b Note
Beginning in 2008, analogue broadcasts in the UK will end area by area, with all analogue broadcasts
scheduled to end by 2012. After analogue broadcasts end in your area, you will not be able to use hookup C
to view TV broadcasts. At that time, change to hookup A to view digital broadcasts.

14 ,continued 15

A: Receiving Freeview (For digital broadcasting) B: Receiving cable or satellite (For analogue broadcasting)
Use this hookup if you can receive Freeview. With this hookup, you can record any programme position on the set top box receiver.
With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position To watch cable programmes, you need to match the programme position on the recorder to the
on the recorder. aerial output programme position on the set top box receiver.
Wall

Hookups and Settings

TV Place the set top box controller
near the remote sensor on the
to aerial input set top box receiver.

Wall
Aerial cable (supplied)
Set top box
controller
(page 15)
Set top box
to DIGITAL AERIAL OUT to DIGITAL AERIAL IN receiver

ANT IN
TO TV
SCART cord*2
DVD recorder (not supplied)

Aerial cable*1
(not supplied)

to ANALOG
: Signal flow AERIAL IN

If you want to view both analogue and digital broadcasts

to G-LINK
This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for terrestrial digital and terrestrial analogue TV
broadcasts.
TV Wall
to aerial input

DVD recorder
to ANALOG
Aerial cable (supplied) AERIAL OUT
TV
to ANALOG AERIAL IN Aerial cable
to DIGITAL AERIAL IN
to DIGITAL (supplied)
AERIAL OUT

to aerial input

Aerial cable (not supplied) : Signal flow

*1
If your set top box receiver does not have an aerial output jack, connect the aerial to the recorder’s
to ANALOG ANALOG AERIAL IN jack.
AERIAL OUT *2 Connect only if your set top box receiver has a SCART connector.
: Signal flow DVD recorder

16 ,continued 17

1-3
 C: Receiving terrestrial (For analogue broadcasting)
Use this hookup if you watch cable programme positions without a set top box receiver. Also
use this hookup if you are only connecting an aerial antenna.
With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position
on the recorder.
Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord
Select one of the following patterns, A through E, according to the input jack on your TV
monitor, projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable
you to view pictures.

Hookups and Settings

Wall B A

TV
Audio/video
cord (not
supplied)
TV, projector, or
to ANALOG AERIAL IN audio component

to LINE 2 OUT
(VIDEO)
SCART cord (not supplied)

(yellow)
DVD recorder
to T LINE 3 – TV
to ANALOG AERIAL OUT
TV

to aerial input

Aerial cable (supplied) DVD recorder

: Signal flow (green) (blue) (red) to LINE 2 OUT to HDMI OUT

(S VIDEO)

to COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT S-video cord HDMI cord
Component video
cord (not supplied) (not supplied) (not supplied)

(green) (blue) (red)

D C E

TV, projector, or audio

component
TV, projector, or audio TV, projector, or audio
component component

: Signal flow

18 ,continued 19

A SCART input jack 2 Insert the HDMI connector straight into

When setting “LINE 3 Out” to “S-Video” or the HDMI jack. About the SMARTLINK About the HDMI Control
“RGB” in the “Video In/Out” setup Do not bend or apply pressure to the features (for SCART functions for ‘BRAVIA’ Theatre
(page 136), use a SCART cord that conforms HDMI connector.
to the selected signal. connections only) Sync (for HDMI connections
If the connected TV (or other connected
only)
B Video input jack

Hookups and Settings

You will enjoy standard quality images.
C S VIDEO input jack
You will enjoy high quality images.
D Component video input jacks (Y, PB/CB,
PR/CR)
You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction
and high quality images.
If your TV accepts progressive 525p/625p
format signals, use this connection and set
“Progressive” to “Compatible” in the “Easy
Setup” setup (page 26). Then set
“Component Video Out” to “Progressive” in
the “Video In/Out” setup to send progressive
video signals. For details, see “Component
Video Out” on page 136.
E HDMI input jack
Use a certified HDMI cord (not supplied) to
enjoy high quality digital picture and sound
through the HDMI OUT jack.
When connecting a Sony TV that is
compatible with the HDMI control function,
see page 21.
To see the signals from the connected set top
box receiver when the set top box receiver is
connected to the recorder using a SCART
cord only, turn the recorder on.
When connecting to the HDMI jack
Follow the steps below. Improper handling
may damage the HDMI jack and the
connector.
1 Carefully align the HDMI jack on the
rear of the recorder and the HDMI
connector by checking their shapes.
Make sure the connector is not upside
down or tilted.
b Notes
• Be sure to disconnect the HDMI cord when
moving the recorder.
• Do not apply too much pressure to the cabinet
wall, if you place the recorder on the cabinet with
the HDMI cord connected. It may damage the
HDMI jack or the HDMI cord.
• Do not twist the HDMI connector while
connecting to or disconnecting from the HDMI
jack to avoid damaging the HDMI jack and
connector.
When playing “wide screen” images
Some recorded images may not fit your TV
screen. To change the picture size, see
page 144.
If you are connecting to a VCR
Connect your VCR to the LINE 1/
DECODER jack on the recorder (page 31).
b Notes
• Do not connect more than one type of video cord
between the recorder and your TV at the same
time.
• Do not make connections A and E at the same
time.
• When you connect the recorder to your TV via the
SCART jacks, the TV’s input source is set to the
recorder automatically when you start playback.
If necessary, press the TV t button on the
remote to return the input to the TV.
• If you connect the recorder to a TV with
SMARTLINK, set “LINE 3 Out” to “Video” in
the “Video In/Out” setup.
• You cannot connect the HDMI OUT jack
(connection E) to DVI jacks that are not HDCP
compliant (e.g., DVI jacks on PC displays).
• Component video and RGB signals are not output
when using the HDMI connection.
equipment such as a set top box) complies By connecting Sony components that are
with SMARTLINK, NexTView Link*3, compatible with the HDMI Control function
MEGALOGIC*1, EASYLINK*2, with an HDMI cord (not supplied), operation
CINEMALINK*2, Q-Link*3, EURO VIEW is simplified as below:
LINK*4, or T-V LINK*5, you can enjoy the • One-Touch Play (page 81)
following SMARTLINK features.
• System Power-Off
• TV Direct Rec. (page 37) When you turn the TV off by using the
• One-Touch Play (page 81)
power button on the TV’s remote, the
• Preset Download components compatible with the HDMI
You can download the tuner preset data Control function turn off automatically.
from your TV to this recorder, and tune the
recorder according to that data in “Easy To prepare for the ‘BRAVIA’ Theatre Sync
Setup.” features
• NexTView Download
Set “HDMI Control” to “On” in the “HDMI
You can easily set the timer by using the
Output” setup (page 148). For details on TV
NexTView Download function on your TV.
settings, refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the TV.
To prepare for the SMARTLINK features
Set “LINE 3 Out” to “Video” in the “Video
b Notes
In/Out” setup (page 136) and • Depending on the connected component, the
“SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder Only” in HDMI Control function may not work. Refer to
the “Options” setup (page 150). the operating instructions supplied with the
component.
b Notes • The recorder supports only the playback option of
• For correct SMARTLINK connection, you will HDMI Control. “Player” appears on the TV
need a SCART cord that has the full 21 pins. screen when using the HDMI Control functions.
Refer to your TV’s instruction manual as well for
this connection.
• Not all TVs respond to the functions above.
*1
“MEGALOGIC” is a registered trademark of
Grundig Corporation.
*2 “EASYLINK” and “CINEMALINK” are
trademarks of Philips Corporation.
*3 “Q-Link” and “NexTView Link” are trademarks
of Panasonic Corporation.
*4
“EURO VIEW LINK” is a trademark of Toshiba
Corporation.
*5 “T-V LINK” is a trademark of JVC Corporation.

* This DVD recorder incorporates High-Definition

Multimedia Interface (HDMI™) technology.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
Connector is upside down Not straight trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
20 21

1-4
 B Audio L/R (left/right) input jacks
Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord This connection will use your TV’s or audio
component’s two speakers for sound.
Step 4: Connecting the
Select one of the following patterns, A or B, according to the input jack on your TV monitor,
Mains Lead
z Hint
projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable you to listen For correct speaker location, see the operating
to sound. instructions supplied with the connected Connect the supplied mains lead to the AC IN

Hookups and Settings

components. terminal of the recorder. Then plug the
[Speakers] [Speakers]
recorder and TV mains leads (AC power
Rear (L) Rear (R) A b Notes cords) into the mains. After you connect the
Audio component with • Do not connect your TV’s audio output jacks to mains lead, you must wait for a short
a decoder
Front (L) Front (R) the LINE IN (R-AUDIO-L) jacks at the same while before operating the recorder.
time. This will cause unwanted noise to come You can operate the recorder once the front
from your TV’s speakers. panel display lights up and the recorder enters
Centre Subwoofer • With connection B, do not connect the LINE IN
standby mode.
(R-AUDIO-L) and LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L)
jacks to your TV’s audio output jacks at the same If you connect additional equipment to this
or to coaxial/HDMI digital input
time. This will cause unwanted noise to come recorder (page 31), be sure to connect the
HDMI cord Coaxial digital cord from your TV’s speakers. mains lead after all connections are complete.
(not supplied) (not supplied) • With connection A, after you have completed the
connection, make the appropriate settings in the
“Audio Out” setup (page 138). Otherwise, no
to DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) sound or a loud noise will come from your
to HDMI OUT speakers.
• When you connect the recorder to an audio
component using an HDMI cord, you will need to
do one of the following: 1 to AC IN
– Connect the audio component to the TV with
the HDMI cord, or 2
– Connect the recorder to the TV with a video
cord other than HDMI cord (component video
cord, S-video cord, or audio/video cord). to mains

*1 Manufactured under license from Dolby

to LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) Laboratories.
DVD recorder
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
*2 “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered
INPUT

VIDEO
B trademarks of DTS, Inc.

(white) (yellow)

L
(red) (white) AUDIO
Audio/video cord
(not supplied) R
(yellow)* (red)
TV, projector, or
audio component
: Signal flow
* The yellow plug is used for video signals (page 19).

A Digital audio input jack
If your audio component has a Dolby*1
Digital, DTS*2, or MPEG audio decoder and
a digital input jack, use this connection. You
can enjoy Dolby Digital (5.1ch), DTS
(5.1ch), and MPEG audio (5.1ch) surround
effects.
22
If you connect a Sony audio component that
is compatible with the HDMI control
function, refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the audio component.
23

Code numbers of controllable TVs To operate the TV/DVD button

Step 5: Preparing the Controlling TVs with the If more than one code number is listed, (for SCART connections only)
remote try entering them one at a time until you The TV/DVD button switches between TV
Remote find the one that works with your TV. mode and DVD mode. Press the TV/DVD
You can adjust the remote’s signal to control button when in stop mode or no menu appears
Manufacturer Code number
You can control the recorder using the your TV. on the TV screen. Point your remote at the
Sony 01 (default) recorder when using this button.

Hookups and Settings

supplied remote. Insert two R6 (size AA)
batteries by matching the 3 and # ends on b Notes Grundig 11 TV mode: switch to this when you use the
• Depending on the connected unit, you may not be TV’s tuner mainly. When you start playback,
the batteries to the markings inside the
able to control your TV with some or all of the Hitachi 24 the input source for the TV is set to the
battery compartment. When using the buttons below.
remote, point it at the remote sensor on the ITT/Nokia 15, 16 recorder automatically.
• If you enter a new code number, the code number
recorder. previously entered will be erased. DVD mode: switch to this when you use the
JVC 33
recorder’s tuner mainly.
Loewe 45 To check the current mode, press DISPLAY
Nokia 69, 73 (page 40).
Number Panasonic 17, 49
buttons
Philips 06, 07, 08, 72 If you have a Sony DVD player
TV/DVD
Saba 12, 13, 74 or more than one Sony DVD
Samsung 22, 23, 71 recorder
Sanyo 25 If the supplied remote interferes with your
b Notes Sharp 29 other Sony DVD recorder or player, set the
• If the supplied remote interferes with your other command mode number for this recorder and
DISPLAY Telefunken 36
Sony DVD recorder or player, change the the supplied remote to one that differs from
command mode number for this recorder Thomson 43, 75 the other Sony DVD recorder or player after
(page 25). you have completed “Step 6: Easy Setup.”
Toshiba 38
• Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible x The default command mode setting for this
leakage and corrosion. Should leakage occur, do
The remote performs the following: recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3.
not touch the liquid with bare hands. Observe the
following: TV [/1 You can check the current Command Mode
TV t Buttons Operations in the front panel display. For details, see
– Do not use a new battery with an old battery, or
batteries of different manufacturers. TV 2 +/– TV PROG TV [/1 Turns your TV on or page 149.
– Do not attempt to recharge the batteries. +/– off.
The default command mode setting for this
– If you do not intend to use the remote for an
TV 2 (volume) Adjusts the volume recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3.
extended period of time, remove the batteries.
– If battery leakage occurs, wipe out any liquid 1 Hold down TV [/1 located at the +/– of your TV. The remote does not function if different
inside the battery compartment, and insert new bottom of the remote. TV PROG +/– Selects the command modes are set for the recorder and
batteries. Do not press the [/1 button at the top of programme position remote. Set the same command mode.
• Do not expose the remote sensor (marked on the remote. on your TV.
the front panel) to strong light, such as direct
TV t (input
sunlight or a lighting apparatus. The recorder may 2 With TV [/1 pressed down, enter the select)
Switches your TV’s
input source.
not respond to the remote. TV’s manufacturer code using the
• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the
code number and Command Mode may be reset
number buttons.
to the default setting. Set the appropriate code For instance, to enter “09,” press “0” then
number and Command Mode again. “9.” After you enter the last number,
release the TV [/1 button.

24 ,continued 25

1-5

Changing programme positions
of the recorder using the
remote
You can change programme positions of the
recorder using the number buttons.
Number
buttons
INPUT
ENTER
Example: for channel 50
Press “5,” “0,” then press ENTER.
z Hint
If the aerial cables are connected to both DIGITAL
AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL IN jacks, you
can switch between digital mode and analogue
mode using the INPUT button.
26
Select “Guide (Digital)” to use the digital
electronic programme guide (see “Guide
to Digital Services (For Freeview users
only)” on page 48).
Select “Guide (Digital)” if you receive
only digital broadcasts.
Select “GUIDE Plus+” to use the
Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ electronic
programme guide (see “GUIDE Plus+
(For analogue broadcasting only)” on
page 63).
TV Screen Size (page 144)
If you have a wide-screen TV, select
“Wide (16:9).” If you have a standard
TV, select “Standard (4:3).” This will
determine how “wide-screen” images are
displayed on your TV.
Progressive
When you connect a progressive format
TV to this recorder using the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks,
select “Compatible.”
HDD caution messages
Read the HDD caution messages, and
press ENTER.
4 Select “Finish Setup” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
“Easy Setup” is completed.
To return to the previous step
Press O RETURN.
z Hint
If you want to run “Easy Setup” again, select “Easy
Setup” in the “Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in
the System Menu (page 130).
28
Step 6: Easy Setup
Make the basic adjustments by following the
on-screen instructions in “Easy Setup.”
Be careful not to disconnect the cables or exit
the “Easy Setup” function during this
procedure.
[/1
GUIDE
</M/m/,,
ENTER
EXIT/
O RETURN
TV [/1
1 Turn on the recorder and your TV.
Then switch the input selector on your
TV so that the signal from the recorder
appears on your TV screen.
The “Language” display appears.
• If the “Language” display does not
appear, select “Easy Setup” in the
“Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in
the System Menu (page 130).
2 Select a language for the on-screen
displays using </M/m/,, and press
ENTER.
The initial settings message appears.
3 Select “Start” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
Follow the on-screen instructions to
make the following settings.
Setting up your set top box
receiver for the GUIDE Plus+®
system (For analogue
broadcasting)
Follow the steps below to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and set top box controller. The
GUIDE Plus+ system is available in the UK
only.
1 Press GUIDE.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Basic Setup”
appears.
For users other than in the UK, go to
step 4.
2 Select “Postal Code,” and press
ENTER.
3 Enter your postal code using </M/m/
,, and press ENTER.
If “Country” is set to “Others,” you
cannot enter a postal code and the
GUIDE Plus+ system will not search for
a host channel.
4 Select “External Receiver 1,” and
press ENTER.
You can also select “External Receiver
2” or “External Receiver 3” if you have
connected additional set top box
receivers.
5 Press ENTER to select “Continue.”
6 Select the set top box receiver type
using M/m, and press ENTER.
7 Select the provider using M/m, and
press ENTER.
1-6
D.TV Auto Channel Setting
If the aerial cable is connected to the
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack (hookup A),
select “Auto Scan.” Then, select your
country/region using </,, and press
ENTER. The recorder will automatically
capture and store the available TV and
Radio channels.
If the aerial cable is connected to the
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (hookup B
or C), select “Do not set.”
For details, see page 15.
A.TV Auto Channel Setting
If the aerial cable is connected to the
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (hookup B
or C) and the TV is connected to this
recorder not using SMARTLINK, select
“Auto Scan.” Then, select your country/
region using </,, and press ENTER.
The programme position order will be set
according to the country/region you set.
If the aerial cable is connected to the
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (hookup B
or C) and the TV is connected to this
recorder with SMARTLINK, select
“Download from TV” (For details, refer
to the operating instructions supplied
with your TV). Then, select your
country/region using </,, and press
ENTER. The tuner preset data will be
downloaded from your TV to this
recorder.
For details, see page 15.
If the aerial cable is connected to the
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack (hookup A)
only, or to skip this setting, select “Do
not set.” Then, select your country/region
using </,, and press ENTER.
To set the programme positions
manually, see page 131.
8 Select the receiver brand using M/m,
and press ENTER.
If you select “Other providers,” you can
select a receiver brand from a list of all
available brands.
If your receiver brand is not on the list,
select “???.”
The receiver brand list is automatically
updated, so your receiver may be
available at a later date. Select your brand
when it becomes available. Until then,
use “???.”
9 Select the connection you used for
your set top box receiver using M/m,
and press ENTER.
When the set top box receiver is
connected to the recorder using hookup
B with both an aerial cable and a SCART
cord, select either “Line1” or “Antenna.”
The display asks for confirmation.
10 Press ENTER to select “Continue.”
The Video Window switches to the
specified programme position.
11 Select “YES” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
If the Video Window does not switch to
the specified programme position, select
“NO” and press ENTER until the Video
Window switches to the specified
programme position.
To receive GUIDE Plus+ system data
your recorder must be turned off
when not in use. If your recorder is
connected to a set top box receiver, be
sure to leave the set top box receiver
turned on. After initial setup, it may
take up to 24 hours to begin receiving
TV programme listings.
b Note
You cannot set tuner system or “OSD
Language” to a country/region or language
that is not supported by the GUIDE Plus+
system.
Clock Setting
The recorder will automatically set the
clock when any digital channels have
been scanned and stored. Go to the “EPG
Type Select” setting.
Select “Auto” when a programme
Hookups and Settings
position in your local area broadcasts a
time signal. The “Auto Clock Setting”
display appears.
1 Select the programme position of the
station that carries a time signal
using </,.
2 Select “Start” using m, and press
ENTER.
If a clock signal cannot be found,
press O RETURN, and set the
clock manually.
Select “Manual” to set the clock
manually. The “Manual Clock Setting”
display appears.
1 Select the time zone for your area
using </,, and press m.
2 Select “On” if you are now on
summer time, and press ENTER.
3 Set the day, month, year, hour, and
minutes using </M/m/,, and
press ENTER to start the clock.
EPG Type Select
Select the EPG (Electronic Programme
Guide) type to use.
If no programme positions for digital
broadcasts are found after scanning, the
“EPG Type Select” display does not
appear. The EPG type is automatically
set to the country/area you select when
setting the program positions.
,continued 27
If you cannot get the recorder to control
your set top box receiver
Check the connection and position of the set
top box controller (page 17).
If your set top box receiver still does not
operate with this recorder, refer to the
instructions supplied with your set top box
Hookups and Settings
receiver and contact your cable or satellite
company to see if they can provide you with
a compatible set top box receiver.
b Notes
• The list of external receivers controllable by the
GUIDE Plus+ system is updated constantly and is
distributed through GUIDE Plus+ system data
signals. Since the time your recorder has been
produced and the time you installed your recorder
for the first time, new external receiver codes
might have been added.
• If the external receiver is still not on the list or is
not controlled properly by the recorder, please
call Customer Support to report the brand and
model of your external receiver.
To fix the set top box controller to your set
top box receiver
Once you have confirmed that the set top box
controller controls your set top box receiver,
fix it in place.
1 Remove the backing on the double-sided
tape.
2 Attach it so that the set top box controller
is directly above the remote control
sensor on your set top box receiver.
,continued 29
 To change the basic GUIDE Plus+ settings
1 Press GUIDE. Connecting a VCR or Similar Device
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home
Screen” appears. After disconnecting the recorder’s mains lead from the mains, connect a VCR or similar
recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder.
2 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar using M/ Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack)
,, and press ENTER. (page 104).

Hookups and Settings

The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears. For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment.
3 Select “Basic Setup” using M/m, and To record on this recorder, see “Recording from Connected Equipment” on page 79.
press ENTER.
4 Repeat from step 2 of “Setting up your Connecting to the LINE 1/DECODER jack
set top box receiver for the GUIDE
Plus+® system (For analogue Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 1/DECODER jack of this recorder.
broadcasting)” on page 28.
VCR TV

SCART cord (not supplied)

to SCART input

to i LINE 1/DECODER to T LINE 3 – TV

DVD recorder

b Notes
• Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded.
• If you pass the recorder signals through a VCR, you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen.

DVD recorder VCR TV

Be sure to connect your VCR to the DVD recorder and to your TV in the order shown below. To watch
video tapes, watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV.
Line input 1

VCR DVD recorder TV

Line input 2

• The SMARTLINK features are not available for devices connected via the DVD recorder’s LINE 1/
DECODER jack.
• To watch the connected VCR or similar device’s pictures through the recorder while the recorder is in
standby mode, set “Power Save” to “Off” (default) in the “Basic” setup (page 130).
• When you record to a VCR from this DVD recorder, do not switch the input source to TV by pressing the
TV/DVD button on the remote.
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected
VCR.

30 ,continued 31

Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel Connecting an External Decoder
Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder. If the
equipment has an S-video jack, you can use an S-video cord instead of an audio/video cord. You can watch or record external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder)
programmes if you connect a decoder (not supplied) to the recorder. Disconnect the recorder’s
OUTPUT VCR, etc. mains lead from the mains when connecting the decoder. Note that when you set “LINE 1 In”

Hookups and Settings

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO to “Decoder” in step 7 of “Setting external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder)
L R programme positions” (page 34), you will not be able to select “L1” because Line 1 will
become a dedicated line for the decoder.

Connecting a decoder

External decoder (PAY-TV/

TV Canal Plus analogue decoder)
S-video cord Audio/video cord
(not supplied) (not supplied)
to AERIAL IN

Aerial cable
to LINE 2 IN (supplied) to SCART input

SCART cord
SCART cord (not supplied)

to T LINE 3 – TV (not supplied)

to AERIAL OUT to i LINE 1/DECODER

DVD recorder
: Signal flow

z Hint
When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound, connect to only the L(MONO) and VIDEO
input jacks on the front of the recorder. Do not connect the R input jack. DVD recorder

b Notes
• Do not connect the yellow LINE IN (VIDEO) jack when using an S-video cord.
• Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment’s input jack with the other
equipment’s output jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. This may cause noise (feedback).
• Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.

32 ,continued 33

1-7
 3 Select “Video In/Out,” and press 11 Select “Next Screen,” and press b Notes
Setting external decoder (PAY- ENTER. ENTER. • If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you
will not be able to view the signals from the
TV/Canal Plus analogue 12 Select your country/region, and press connected decoder.
decoder) programme positions ENTER. • To watch the connected external decoder (PAY-
Programme position
TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programmes
To watch or record PAY-TV/Canal Plus during recording, press the PROGRAM + button

Hookups and Settings

analogue programmes, set your recorder to
receive the programme positions using the
on-screen display.
In order to set the programme positions
correctly, be sure to follow all of the steps
below.
Number
buttons
4 Select “LINE 3 Out,” and press
ENTER.
13 Select the desired programme
position using ./> or number
buttons.
on the recorder (“SCART THRU” appears on the
front panel display). To return to the previous
display, press the PROGRAM – button on the
recorder (“SCART NORM” appears on the front
panel display). The recorder automatically
switches to the programme tuned by the
recorder’s tuner after the recording has finished.
To watch the connected external decoder (PAY-
TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programmes
while the recorder is in standby mode, set “Power
Save” to “Off” (default) in the “Basic” setup
(page 130).

SYSTEM 14 Select “Channel” using M/m.

MENU
15 Select the external decoder
</M/m/,, 5 Press M/m to select “Video” or programme position using </,.
EXIT/ ENTER “RGB,” and press ENTER.
O RETURN 16 Select “Sound System” using M/m.
6 Select “LINE 1 In,” and press ENTER.
. > 17 Press </, to select an available TV
system, B/G, D/K, I, or L.
To receive broadcasts in France, select
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
“L.”
The System Menu appears. 18 Select “Decoder” using M/m.
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press 19 Select “On” using </,, and press
ENTER. ENTER.

7 Press M/m to select “Decoder,” and

press ENTER. To return to the previous step
Press O RETURN.
8 Press O RETURN to return the cursor
to the left column.
9 Select “Analog Tuner,” and press
ENTER.

10 Select “Manual CH Setting,” and

press ENTER.
34 35

3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select b Notes

Eight Basic Operations
— Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
2. Recording a the recording mode. • To turn off the TV Direct Rec. function, set
“SMARTLINK” to “Pass Through” in the
Each time you press the button, the
Programme display on the TV screen changes as
“Options” setup (page 150).
• Some buttons, such as the TITLE LIST button or
1. Inserting a Disc +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
follows: H button, do not work when “TV” appears in
HDD the front panel display.
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR -RVR -RVideo • If you press the [/1 button while recording, the
-RVideo
recorder stops recording and turns off.
DVD VCD CD DATA DVD
This section introduces the basic operation to * Available when “Manual Rec. Mode” is set • After pressing the z REC button, it may take a
DATA CD short while to start recording.
record a current TV programme to the hard to “On (go to setup)” in the “Recording”
Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
disk (HDD) or to a disc (DVD). For an setup (page 141). • You cannot change the recording mode while
explanation of how to make timer recordings, For more details about the recording recording.
Z (open/ • If there is a power failure, the programme you are
close) DVD see page 52 (Digital Mode) or page 71 mode, see page 71.
recording may be erased.
(Analogue Mode).
4 Press z REC. • You cannot watch a PAY-TV/Canal Plus
Recording starts. programme while recording another PAY-TV/
Canal Plus programme.
When recording to the HDD, recording
HDD DVD • To use the TV Direct Rec. function, you must first
stops after 12 hours of continuous
correctly set the recorder’s clock.
PROG +/– recording or when the HDD is full.
INPUT
When recording to a DVD, recording
stops when the DVD is full. Checking the disc status while
1 Press DVD. TV/DVD
recording
2 Press Z (open/close), and place a
To stop recording
disc on the disc tray. You can check the recording information
Press x REC STOP.
such as recording time or disc type.
Note that it may take a few seconds for
recorder to stop recording.
DISPLAY Press DISPLAY during recording.
To watch another TV programme while The recording information appears.

Recording/playing side facing down
3 Press Z (open/close) to close the disc
tray.
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the
front panel display.
Unused DVDs are formatted
automatically.
• For DVD-RW discs
DVD-RWs are formatted in the
recording format (VR mode or Video
mode) set by “Format DVD-RW” of
“Basic” in the “Disc Setup” setup
(page 128).
• For DVD-R discs
DVD-Rs are automatically formatted in
Video mode. To format an unused
DVD-R in VR mode, format the disc in
the “Format” setup (page 47) before
you make a recording.
If the disc is recordable on this recorder,
you can manually re-format the disc to
make a blank disc (page 47).
36
TV PAUSE
recording
If your TV is connected to the T LINE 3 –
z REC REC MODE TV jack, set your TV to the TV input using
x REC
STOP the TV/DVD button and select the
TV t programme you want to watch. If your TV is
connected to the LINE 2 OUT or
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, set the
1 Press HDD or DVD. TV to TV input using the TV t button
If you want to record to a DVD, insert a (page 24).
recordable DVD.
TV Direct Rec. (for SMARTLINK
2 Press PROG +/– to select the connections only) A Recording mode
programme position or input source When the TV is turned on and the recorder is
you want to record. B Recording time
turned off, press TV PAUSE. The recorder
automatically turns on and starts recording C Disc type/format
what you are watching on the TV to the HDD.
D Recording status
Set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 150).
Press DISPLAY to turn off the display.
z Hint
If the aerial cables are connected to both DIGITAL
AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL IN jacks, you
can switch between digital mode and analogue
mode using the INPUT button.
37

1-8
 4-Title List (Example: HDD) E Title information: 3 Select “Original” or “Play List” using M/
3. Playing the Recorded Displays the title number, title thumbnail m, and press ENTER.
picture (playback picture for the selected
Programme (Title List) title, still images for the other titles), To change the title order for HDD (Sort
recording date, recorded station name (or Titles)
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R programme position number), recording 1 Press < while the Title List is
-RVR -RVideo mode, title name, and title size. displayed.
To play a recorded title, select the title from “Recording”: Indicates that the title is 2 Select “Sort Titles” using M/m, and press
the Title List. ENTER.

Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder

currently being recorded.
: Indicates protected title. 3 Select the item using M/m, and press
“NEW”: Indicates that the title is newly ENTER.
HDD DVD m recorded (not played back) (HDD only).
Order Sorted
: Press DISPLAY to display
8-Title List “ .” “ ” indicates titles By Date In order of when the titles
containing “Copy-Once” copy protection were recorded. The title
signals (HDD only) (page 99). that is recorded most
: Indicates that the title is recorded recently is listed at the
using the Update function. top.
TITLE LIST Genre icons: Indicates the title’s genre Unseen Title In order of when the titles
</M/m/,, (HDD only). were recorded. The title
ENTER that is recorded most
EXIT/ F Remaining time of the current disc in recently and has not been
O RETURN DISPLAY
the current recording mode (example: played is listed at the top.
. >
SP mode) Playlist titles are not
H displayed.
X
x
A Disc type: G Detailed information for the selected
By Title In alphabetical order.
Displays the media type, HDD or DVD. title
The resume point time is shown in the 8- By Number In order of recorded title
PLAY B Total number of titles Title List. number.
MODE
C Sub-menu: 3 Select a title using M/m, and press
Press , to display the sub-menu. To search for a title by genre (HDD only)
1 Press HDD or DVD.
The sub-menu displays options
ENTER.
1 Press < while the Title List is
If you select DVD, insert a DVD (see “1. Playback starts from the selected title.
applicable only to the selected item. The displayed.
Inserting a Disc” on page 36).
displayed options differ depending upon
Playback starts automatically depending
the model, situation, and disc type.
2 Select “Genre” using M/m, and press
on the disc. To stop playback ENTER.
Press x (stop).
2 Press TITLE LIST. 3 Select a genre using M/m, and press
To show the 8-Title List, press < to ENTER.
To scroll the list display by page (Page
select “Title View,” and press ENTER, mode)
then select “8 Titles” using M/m, and To change a title thumbnail picture
Press ./> while the Title List is (Thumbnail)
press ENTER. displayed. Each time you press ./>,
After recording, the first scene of the
the entire Title List changes to the next/
recording (the title) is automatically set as the
previous page of titles.
thumbnail picture.
Sub-menu
You can select a favourite scene for the
About the Title List for DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs
D Scroll bar: (VR mode)
thumbnail picture shown in the Title List.
Appears when all of the titles do not fit You can switch the Title List to show 1 Press TITLE LIST.
on the list. To view the hidden titles, Original or Playlist titles. For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode),
press M/m. switch the Title Lists, if necessary.
1 Press < while the Title List is
displayed. 2 Select a title, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
2 Select “Play List” using M/m, and press
ENTER.

38 ,continued 39

3 Select “Edit” using M/m, and press During playback z Hints

ENTER. 4. Displaying the Playing Example: DVD-R in Video mode • When “On Screen Display” is set to “On”
(default) in the “Options” setup (page 149),
4 Select “Set Thumbnail” using M/m, and
press ENTER. Time and Play information automatically appears on the screen
when the recorder is operated.
The display for setting the thumbnail
point appears and the title starts to play.
Information • To increase disc space, see “To open up disc
space” (page 92).
5 While watching the playback picture, HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R b Note
press H, X or c m/M C -RVR -RVideo DVD VCD CD Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be
to select the scene you want to set for a displayed correctly.

Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder

DATA DVD DATA CD
thumbnail picture, and press X.
Playback pauses. You can check the playing time of the current
You can also select a scene using the title, chapter, track, or disc. Also, you can
PLAY MODE button (page 89). check the disc name recorded on the DVD/ A Playing status
6 Select “OK” using M/m, and press CD. B Shows that the Resume Play is
ENTER. available (page 81).
The scene is set for the title’s thumbnail
picture. C Current selected recording mode
To return to the Title List, press (remaining DVD recording time/disc
O RETURN. type) (page 71)
D Remaining time
To change the thumbnail preview mode
(Set Preview) (HDD only) E Station name and programme position
You can select “Quick Preview” or “Normal” number
for the thumbnail preview mode in the Title
F Audio setting for the current
List. Set “Set Preview” in the “Options” setup
(page 150). programme
DISPLAY
G Recording restrictions for the current
To turn off the Title List programme
Press TITLE LIST.
H TV mode or DVD mode (page 25)
z Hint I Disc information
You can select “Title List” from the System Menu. Press DISPLAY repeatedly.
J Title type (Original or Playlist) for
b Notes The displays differ depending on the disc
type or playing status. DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode
• The title names may not appear for DVDs created
on other DVD recorders. K Disc type/format (page 10)
• It may take a few seconds for the thumbnail In stop mode Displays the finalised disc in Video
pictures to be displayed. Example: DVD-RW in VR mode mode as “DVD-Video.”
• After editing, the title thumbnail picture may
change to the first scene of the recording (title). L Title number-Chapter number
• After dubbing, the title thumbnail picture set on (page 89)
the source recording is cancelled.
M Playing time
N Multi-angles indicator (page 80)
O Copy-protected indicator (page 99)
P Data transfer bar and rate

40 41

1-9
 4 Select “Title Name,” and press 9 Press x (or select “OK,” and press
5. Changing the Name of ENTER. ENTER). 6. Labelling and
The display for entering characters To cancel the setting, press
a Recorded Programme appears. O RETURN. Protecting a Disc
The current name is displayed at the
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R input row. You can execute options effective for the
-RVR -RVideo Input row To use the number buttons entire disc in the “Disc Setup” setup.
You can also use the number buttons to enter
You can label a DVD, title, or programme by characters. Refer to the number next to each
entering characters. You can enter up to 64

Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder

row of letters on your TV screen.
characters for a title recorded in the HDD/
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), 40 characters
1 In step 7 above, press a number button
repeatedly to select a character.
for a title recorded in the DVD+RW/DVD-
RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video Example:
Press the number 3 button once to enter
mode), but the actual number of characters
“D.”
displayed in the menus such as the Title List SYSTEM
will vary. The steps below explain how to Press the number 3 button three times to MENU
enter “F.”
change the name of the recorded programme. 5 Move the cursor to the point where you </M/m/,,
want to insert the character using 2 Press ENTER and select the next ENTER
character.
m/M.
To erase all of the characters, press and 3 Press x (or select “OK,” and press
Number hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more. ENTER).
buttons
6 Select “Upper case” or “Lower case”
CLEAR using ./>.
The characters for the selected type are
displayed. Labelling a disc
TITLE LIST
The type of characters will change
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR
</M/m/,, according to the language you select in
EXIT/ ENTER -RVideo
“Easy Setup.”
O RETURN
. >
7 Press </M/m/, to select the 1 Insert a disc.
m M character you want to enter, and press See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 36.
ENTER.
X
x
The selected character appears at the
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
input row.
To insert a space, press X (or select 3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press
“Space,” and press ENTER). ENTER.

1 Press TITLE LIST.

8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the
2 Select a title, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
remaining characters.
To erase a character, move the cursor to
the character at the input row, and press
CLEAR (or select “Clear,” and press
ENTER).
To insert a character, move the cursor to
the right of the point where you want to
insert the character. Then select the
character, and press ENTER.
To erase all of the characters, press and
hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more.

42 ,continued 43

4 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.
5 Select “Input Disc Name,” and press
ENTER.
6 Select “Next Screen,” and press
ENTER.
Enter the disc name (page 42).
b Note
You can enter up to 64 characters for a DVD-RW/
DVD-R (VR mode) disc name, and 40 characters
for a DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/DVD+R/
DVD-R (Video mode) disc name. The disc name
may not appear when the disc is played on other
DVD equipment.
Protecting a disc
-RWVR -RVR
1 Insert a disc.
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 36.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press
ENTER.
4 Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.
+R
Finalising is necessary when
7. Playing the Disc on -RVideo
playing on any equipment other
than this recorder.
Other DVD Equipment After finalising, you cannot edit or
record on the disc.
(Finalise)
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -RVR
-RVideo
Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
5 Select “Protect Disc,” and press
Finalising is necessary when you play discs
recorded with this recorder on other DVD
ENTER. equipment.
When you finalise a DVD+RW, DVD-RW
SYSTEM
(Video mode), DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video
mode), a DVD menu will be automatically MENU
created, which can be displayed on other
</M/m/,,
DVD equipment. ENTER
Before finalising, check the differences DISPLAY
between the disc types in the table below.
Differences between disc types
6 Select “On,” and press ENTER. Discs are automatically finalised
7 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
+RW
when removed from the recorder. 1 Insert a disc.
However, you may need to finalise See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 36.
the disc for certain DVD
equipment, or if the recording time 2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
To cancel the protection is short. You can edit or record on The System Menu appears.
Select “Off” in step 6. the disc even after finalising.
Finalising is unnecessary when
3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press
z Hint -RWVR ENTER.
playing a disc on VR format
You can set protection for individual titles compatible equipment.
(page 92). Even if your other DVD equipment
is VR format compatible, you may
need to finalise the disc, especially
if the recording time is short. You
can edit or record on the disc even
after finalising.
-RWVideo
Finalising is necessary when
playing on any equipment other
than this recorder.
After finalising, you cannot edit or
4 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.
record on the disc. If you want to
record on it again, unfinalise
(page 46) or reformat the disc
(page 47). However, if you
reformat the disc, all recorded
contents will be erased.

-RVR
Finalising is necessary. The disc
can be played only on equipment
that supports DVD-R in VR mode.
After finalising you cannot edit or
record on the disc using this
5 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.
recorder.

44 ,continued 45

1-10
 6 Select “Next Screen,” and press b Note 4 Select “Format,” and press ENTER.
ENTER. The recorder is not able to unfinalise DVD-RWs
(Video mode) that have been finalised on another 8. Reformatting a Disc
For DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), the
recorder.
recorder starts finalising the disc. Go to +RW -RWVR -RWVideo -RVR -RVideo
step 9.
1 Insert a disc.
7 (DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/ See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 36. New discs are automatically formatted when
inserted. If necessary, you can manually re-
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only)
Select a title menu style, and press
2 Press SYSTEM MENU. format a DVD+RW, DVD-RW, or DVD-R
The System Menu appears. disc to make a blank disc. For DVD-RWs or
ENTER.

Eight Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder

The menu appears in the selected title 3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press DVD-Rs, you can select a recording format
5 Select an item, and press ENTER.
ENTER. (VR mode or Video mode) according to your
menu style when the “top menu” (or “VR Mode”: Formats DVD-RWs/DVD-
needs.
“menu” for a DVD+RW/DVD+R) is Rs (VR mode or unrecorded discs) in VR
selected on the DVD equipment. mode.
8 (DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/ “Video Mode”: Formats DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs in Video mode.
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only)
“Format DVD+RW”: Formats
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
DVD+RWs.
The recorder starts finalising the disc.
9 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
All contents on the disc are erased.
4 Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.
SYSTEM
MENU
z Hint
z Hint
You can check whether the disc has been finalised </M/m/,,
By reformatting, you can change the recording
or not. Press DISPLAY after step 1 (page 40). ENTER
format on DVD-RWs, or record again on DVD-
RWs that have been finalised.
b Notes
• Depending on the condition of the disc,
recording, or the DVD equipment, discs may not
play even if the discs are finalised.
• The recorder may not be able to finalise the disc
if it was recorded on another recorder.
1 Insert a disc.
• Inserting an unfinalised disc into other DVD 5 Select “Unfinalise,” and press
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 36.
equipment may damage the recorded contents.
• When using a DVD+RW, you can edit or record
ENTER. 2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
on the disc even after finalising. However, the
title menu will not be displayed. Finalise the disc 3 Select “Disc Setup,” and press
again to display the title menu. ENTER.

Unfinalising a disc
-RWVR -RWVideo

For DVD-RWs (Video mode)

DVD-RWs (Video mode) that have been
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The recorder starts unfinalising the disc.
finalised to prohibit additional recording or
Unfinalising may take several minutes.
editing can be unfinalised to allow further
recording or editing.

For DVD-RWs (VR mode)

If you cannot record or edit on a DVD-RW
(VR mode) that has been finalised with other
DVD equipment, unfinalise the disc.

46 47

1 Press GUIDE. z Hint

Guide to Digital Services This display consists of an information

box and an 8-channel programme list
You can display the channel list by pressing the
ENTER button while watching a programme. To Programme Information
(For Freeview users only) watch another channel, select a channel using </
covering a 30-minute period.
M/m/,, and press ENTER. The programme information display provides
EPG (Electronic Example of EPG Display: Available buttons in the programme list
a quick and easy way to:
• View descriptions of the programmes being
Programme Guide) Buttons Operations broadcast now and next on the current
channel.
PAGE +/– Display the previous/next
The Electronic Programme Guide is a guide • View descriptions of the programmes being

Guide to Digital Services (For Freeview users only)

eight channels.
showing the television programme schedule broadcast now and next on the other
INFO Display the detailed channels.
for a day or more at a time on your television information of the
(via the Digital Terrestrial Television tuner programme (page 49).
included in this recorder).
O RETURN Close the display.
The EPG provides a quick and easy way to:
• View a complete list of all available To search for programmes by date
A Indicates the currently selected
channels. 1 Press the green button while the
• View a channel list related to a chosen date channel number and station name
with the programme title and programme list is displayed.
or genre.
• Set a programme to be recorded (page 55). genre. 2 Select a date in the “Date” row.
B Indicates the currently selected 3 Select a time in the “Time” row. INFO
b Note </M/m/,,
Digital Services availability and content depend on programme and allows you to 4 Select “Jump,” and press ENTER. ENTER
the broadcaster. move around the list. The programme list for the specified date
Digital Services are not instantly available when the and time is displayed.
recorder is first turned on.
C Channel name
D Indicates if a timer recording is To search programmes by genre
associated with the programme 1 Press the yellow button while the
Viewing a list of available (page 55). programme list is displayed.
channels E Colour buttons Displaying the programme
2 Select a date in the “Date” row.
F Indicates that short programmes
information
3 Select a time in the “Time” row.
that are not displayed on the list are
scheduled.
4 Select the “Genre” row, and press 1 Select a channel.
ENTER.
G Truncated programme title in case The genre list is displayed. 2 Press INFO.
The Information display appears
the name is too long to be 5 Select a genre using </M/m/,, and showing a description of the current
displayed in the cell. press ENTER. programme on view.
Colour
buttons H Time slot 6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
GUIDE 7
I Indicates the current time and date. Select “Search,” and press ENTER.
INFO The programme list for the specified
</M/m/,, 2 Select a programme using </M/m/ genre is displayed.
EXIT/ ENTER ,, and press ENTER.
O RETURN
You can also select a programme using
PAGE – PAGE +
the red button.
If you press , after selecting the last
programme on the right, the schedule for
the next 30 minutes is displayed
(depending on availability from the
broadcaster).

48 ,continued 49

1-11
 Available buttons in the Information 2 Once the text page is displayed (this
display Viewing a Digital Text may take some time), follow the on-
Buttons Operations screen instructions to obtain your
Service required selection.
M/m Toggle the display between
On some pages the TV programme may
description of the current/
next programme Many digital TV channels broadcast also be displayed on the text screen. On-
information via their text service. This digital screen instructions will inform you how
</, Display programme service includes high-quality digital text and to change the displayed programme.
information for other graphics along with advanced navigation If you are instructed to press “OK” or
channels

Guide to Digital Services (For Freeview users only)

ENTER View the selected channel
INFO Display the detailed
programme information
options. Additionally, this recorder has “Select” when viewing the text pages,
access to dedicated text channels transmitted press ENTER.
by the broadcasters.
b Note To exit the text service
The appearance, content and navigation methods of Follow the on-screen instructions, or press
all digital text services are decided by the
PROG +/–.
broadcaster.

Selecting digital text from

Number PROG +/– other channels
buttons
Digital text services may also be available on
other digital channels. This is sometimes
indicated by a small symbol on your TV
screen, superimposed on the programme you
are watching.
</M/m/,,
ENTER 1 Select a channel.
EXIT/
O RETURN 2 Press (text) or the button indicated
on screen by the broadcaster.
The text information appears.
3 Access required information using
</M/m/,, the colour buttons and/
Selecting digital text from or the number buttons.
dedicated digital teletext If you are instructed to press “OK” or
“Select” when viewing the text pages,
channels press ENTER.
1 Select a dedicated channel that is
broadcasting digital text. To exit the text service
You can search for a dedicated digital Follow the on-screen instructions, or press
text channel using the “Electronic (text) or EXIT/O RETURN.
Programme Guide” (page 48).
The text page is displayed.

50 51

b Notes
Approx. recording time
Timer Recording (hours)
• The maximum continuous recording time to the
HDD is 12 hours for a single title. A title longer Timer Recording
(For Freeview users only)
Recording HDD DVD*1
than 12 hours is divided.
• Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies
(Standard/EPG)
mode
RDR- RDR- RDR- RDR- with the recording time.
Before Recording HXD HXD HXD HXD – Recording a programme with poor reception, or HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
770 870 970 1070 a programme or video source of low picture -RVR -RVideo
Before you start recording… quality.
HQ (High 25 34 53 105 1 hr. – Recording on a disc that has already been You can set the timer for a total of 32
• Check that the disc has enough available quality) 1 min. edited. programmes, up to 30 days in advance.
space for the recording (page 40). For the HSP R 37 50 79 155 1 hr. – Recording only a still picture or just sound. There are three methods to set the timer: the
HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you 30 min. • Programmes are recorded in the following aspect standard method, EPG method and Series
can free up disc space by erasing titles ratio.
Timer Recording (For Freeview users only)

SP 51 68 105 210 2 Recording method.

(page 92). – In the original aspect ratio, when recording to
(Standard the HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is
• Standard: Set the date, time, and
• Adjust the recording picture quality if
mode) set to “Video Mode Off” in the “Recording” programme position of the programme
necessary (page 59).
LSP r 63 84 130 265 2 hr. setup (page 144))/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR manually.
b Notes 30 min. mode). • EPG: Set a programme to be recorded based
• To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment, – In 4:3 when recording to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs. on the information provided by the EPG
finalise the disc (page 45). ESP r 75 100 155 315 3 • When recording to DVD-R DLs (Video mode), (Electronic Programme Guide) (page 55).
• If digital teletext is operated while recording, its LP r 100 135 210 420 4 the title is divided when the layer switches. • Series Recording: Automatically sets the
contents will be recorded on the disc. recorder to record programmes in a series
• If the subtitles are displayed while recording, they EP r 150 200 315 635 6
(page 57).
will be recorded on the disc.
SLP r 200 270 425 850 8 Unrecordable pictures
SEP*2 255 340 530 1060 10
Recording mode (Long
Pictures with copy protection cannot be Setting the timer manually
recorded on this recorder.
Like the standard ×3 recording modes of
duration) (Standard)
video tapes, you can select the desired *1
The approximate recording time is for 12 cm Copy control Recordable discs
recording mode using the REC MODE DVD discs. signals
button. The approximate recording times for DVD+R Copy-Free
DL (Double Layer)/DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) HDD +RW -RWVR
Recording modes with higher quality provide
discs are as follows: -RWVideo +R -RVR
a more beautiful recording, but the large data
HQ: 1 hour 51 minutes
volume also results in a shorter recording HSP: 2 hours 41 minutes
-RVideo
time. SP: 3 hours 35 minutes Copy-Once
Conversely, a longer duration provides a HDD
LSP: 4 hours 29 minutes
longer recording time, but the lower data ESP: 5 hours 23 minutes -RWVR (CPRM*)
volume results in a coarser picture quality. LP: 7 hours 11 minutes -RVR (CPRM*)
EP: 10 hours 46 minutes TIMER
Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the SLP: 14 hours 21 minutes Copy-Never None
</M/m/,,
recording modes. SEP: 17 hours 57 minutes ENTER
*2 When recording to DVD+RW or DVD+R, SLP * The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM
To select further options for recording mode
is the longest recording time available. If you compatible equipment (page 10).
(manual recording mode), set “Manual Rec.
select SEP, the recording mode will
Mode” to “On (go to setup)” in the
automatically revert to SLP.
“Recording” setup (page 141). To record
pictures in higher quality than HQ mode on z Hint x REC
the HDD, set “Manual Rec. Mode” to “On To easily select a manual recording mode, press STOP
(go to setup),” and then select “HQ+.” For REC MODE repeatedly to display “MN,” and
details about manual recording mode, see select a manual recording mode using </,.
page 141.
For timer recording, you can also select
“AUTO” as recording mode, which
maximizes the recording quality for the space
available on the disc (if recording to DVD),
or to fit onto a blank disc (if recording to
HDD).
52 ,continued 53

1-12
 1 Press TIMER.
The “Timer List” display appears.
2
Select the “New Input” row, and press
ENTER.
3 Select an item using </, and
adjust using M/m. Then press ENTER.
The adjustable items are listed below.
“Pr/CH”: Sets the programme position
and the source.
“Date”: Sets the date (up to 30 days
later). Select a recording pattern by
pressing M repeatedly to set the timer for
the same daily or weekly programmes.
“Start”: Sets the start time.
“Stop”: Sets the stop time.
“Extend”: Sets duration when a timer
recording is in progress. If the
programme set to be recorded daily or
weekly is extended, the manually
extended time set here will be added to
the subsequent timer recording times.
Note that when “VPS/PDC” is set to
“On,” you cannot make the “Extend”
setting.
• If you want to make the detailed
settings, select “Set Details” and press
ENTER. Select an item using M/m and
set using </,.
54
3 Press the red button.
The date, start and stop times,
programme position, recording mode,
etc., settings appear.
• If you want to change the setting, press
</, to select the item and press M/m
to change the setting (page 54).
“EPG Link” (page 58)
“Series Recording” (page 57)
4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
• In case of a current TV/radio/data
broadcast timer setting, your recorder
will immediately start recording.
Your recorder will automatically begin
recording when the programme starts.
To modify the timer setting, see page 60.
Some examples of timer event icon
types are:
(red): Indicates that the whole
programme is set to be recorded.
(grey): Indicates that the programme
is set to be recorded using Series
Recording (page 57).
To scroll the EPG display by page (Page
mode)
Press PAGE +/– while the EPG display is
turned on to display the previous/next eight
channels.
56
“Record to”: Sets the recording
destination. If there is not enough
available DVD disc space for the
recording, the recorder automatically
records the programme to the HDD
even if you select “DVD” (Recovery
Recording).
“Recording Mode”: Sets the recording
mode (page 52).
“VPS/PDC”: Sets the VPS/PDC
function. See “About the VPS/PDC
function (For analogue broadcasting
only)” below.
“Update”: Sets the recorder
automatically replacing the previous
timer recording with the new one.
“EPG Link” (page 58)
“Series Recording” (page 57)
• To enter a title name, select “Set Title
Name” and press ENTER (page 42).
• If you make a mistake, select the item
and change the setting.
4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
The “Timer List” display (page 60)
appears.
The timer recording indicator lights up
on the front panel display and the
recorder is ready to start recording.
Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn off
the recorder before the timer recording
starts.
To stop recording during timer recording
Press x REC STOP.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
the on-screen instructions.
About the VPS/PDC function (For analogue
broadcasting only)
VPS/PDC signals are transmitted with TV
programmes in some broadcast systems.
These signals ensure that timer recordings are
made regardless of any broadcast delays,
early starts, or broadcast interruptions.
To use the VPS/PDC function
Set “VPS/PDC” to “On” in step 3 above.
When you turn on this function, the recorder
starts scanning the channels before the timer
recording starts.
To stop recording during timer recording
Press x REC STOP.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
the on-screen instructions.
If the timer settings overlap
See page 55.
To extend the recording duration time
while recording (only when “EPG Link” is
set to “Off”)
See page 54.
To confirm, change, or cancel timer
recording (only when “EPG Link” is set to
“Off”)
See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer
Settings (Timer List)” (page 60).
z Hint
The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function also works with
this timer method (page 55).
b Note
The EPG programme start and end time are
determined by the broadcaster.
1-13
Rec. Mode Adjust
If there is not enough available disc space for Recording TV programmes
the recording, the recorder automatically using the EPG
adjusts the recording mode to enable the
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec. The EPG function is a feature that simplifies
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording” setting the timer. Just select the programme
setup (page 143). you want to record in the EPG display. The
date, time, and channel of that programme are
If the timer settings overlap set automatically.
The confirmation screen appears.
To store the setting, select “Yes.”
To cancel the overlapped setting, select “No.”
Timer Recording (For Freeview users only)
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer
recording
See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer
Settings (Timer List)” on page 60. Red button
GUIDE
z Hints
• You can also display the Timer display by
</M/m/,,
selecting “Timer Recording” from the System ENTER
Menu.
• You can play the title as it is being recorded by
selecting the programme title on the Title List PAGE – PAGE +
(page 88).
b Notes x REC
• If a message indicating that the HDD is full STOP
appears on the screen, change the recording
destination to “DVD,” or make available space
for the recording (page 92).
• Check that the clock is correctly set before setting
the timer recording. If not, the timer recording 1 Press GUIDE.
cannot be made.
• To record a satellite programme, turn on the
satellite tuner and select the satellite programme
you want to record. Leave the satellite tuner
turned on until the recorder finishes recording.
• Even if the timer is set for the same daily or
weekly programme, the timer recording cannot be
made if it overlaps with a programme that has
priority. “Overlap” will appear next to the
overlapped setting in the Timer List. Check the
priority order of the settings (page 60).
• Even if the timer is set, timer recordings cannot be
made while recording a programme that has 2 Select a programme using </M/m/
priority. ,.
• The beginning of some recordings may not be To know more about the navigation
made when using the VPS/PDC function. options in the EPG application, see
• You cannot extend the recording duration time
page 48.
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”
• The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function only works
with a timer recording and the VPS/PDC function
set to off. It does not function with Quick Timer.
• The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO”
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”
,continued 55
Series Recording
Recording programmes using Automatically record programmes in a series.
Series Recording 1 Press GUIDE.
Series Recording is a feature which uses
information from the Electronic Programme
Guide.
b Notes
• This function cannot be used when the
broadcaster does not include series information
with the programme data.
• Whether or not a programme is in a series is
Timer Recording (For Freeview users only)
determined by the broadcaster.
2 Select a programme using </M/m/,.
3 Press the red button.
The date, start and stop times,
programme position, recording mode,
etc., settings appear.
Red button
GUIDE
TIMER
</M/m/,,
ENTER
EXIT/
O RETURN
z REC
4 Select “Set Details,” and press ENTER.
x REC
STOP 5 Set “Series Recording” to “On,” and
press O RETURN.
6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
The selected programme is set for
recording and appears in the Timer List
(page 60). The other programmes in the
series will be set for recording (appear in
the Timer List) as each previous
recording is completed.
For example, if there are three
programmes in a series, the second
programme will be set for recording only
after the first recording is finished. The
third programme will be set for recording
only after the second recording is
finished.
You can search for link programmes
using “Series Search” (page 58).
,continued 57
 EPG Link
Automatically update the date, start and stop
times settings when changing the Electronic
Programme Guide.
Set “EPG Link” to “On” in step 5 of “Series
Recording” on page 57.
Recording Split Programmes
Movies and other programmes that are split
into 2 or more parts are called Split
Programmes. If you set the timer for one part
of a Split Programme, the other parts are
automatically recorded. For example, if the
first half is set to be recorded, the last half
will be recorded automatically.
To search for link programmes
1 Press TIMER.
2 Select the timer setting, and press ,.
3 When the following options appear in the
sub-menu, select an option, and press
ENTER.
“Alternate Search”: Searches for repeat
programmes. The repeat programmes are
displayed in the EPG.
“Series Search”: Searches for
programmes in a series. The programmes
in the series are displayed in the EPG.
“Recommendation Search”: Searches for
programmes recommended by
broadcaster as a link for current series.
The recommended programmes are
displayed in the EPG.
To set the programme for recording,
follow the instructions for “Recording
TV programmes using the EPG”
(page 55) from step 2.
b Notes
• Only the earliest part of the Split Programme is
displayed on the Timer List.
• Any next Split Programme part that starts 3 or
more hours later cannot be recorded
automatically.
• This recorder is featured with an EPG timer auto
extend functionality that allows EPG timer
recordings to be made in case of an early start
(before the scheduled start time) or late finish
(after the scheduled end time).
• When “EPG Link” is set to “On,” you cannot
change the date, start and stop time settings.
58
Checking/Changing/
Cancelling Timer
Settings (Timer List)
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
-RVR -RVideo
You can check, change, or cancel the timer
settings using the Timer List.
b Note
You cannot change the timer settings with “EPG
Link” set to “On.”
TIMER
</M/m/,,
ENTER
. >
1 Press TIMER.
The “Timer List” display appears.
Timer information displays the recording
date, time, recording mode, etc.
When all of the timer settings do not fit
on the list, the scroll bar appears.
To view the hidden timer settings, press
M/m.
60
Using the Quick Timer function
You can set the recorder to record in 30-
minute increments.
Press z REC repeatedly to set the
duration.
Each press advances the time in 30-minute
increments. The maximum duration is six
hours.
(normal recording)
The time counter decreases minute by minute
to 0:00, then the recorder stops recording (the
power turns off).
To cancel the Quick Timer
Press z REC repeatedly until the counter
appears in the front panel display. The
recorder returns to normal recording mode.
To stop recording, press x REC STOP.
b Note
If you turn off the recorder during recording,
recording is stopped.
2 Select the timer setting you want to
check/change/cancel, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select an option, and press ENTER.
“Modify”:
Changes the timer setting.
Select an item using </, and adjust
using M/m. Select “OK” and press
ENTER.
“Erase”:
Erases the timer setting.
Select “Yes” and press ENTER.
“Skip Once”:
Cancels the daily or weekly recordings
only once. After cancelling the timer
setting, “Skip Once” appears next to the
timer setting in the Timer List.
“Alternate Search” (page 58)
“Series Search” (page 58)
“Recommendation Search” (page 58)
To change or cancel the setting, repeat
steps 2 and 3 above.
When the timer settings overlap
• The programme that starts first has priority
and the entire programme is recorded.
• After finishing the previous recording, the
other recording starts with several tens-of-
second’s delay (when the end-time of one
recording and the start-time of another are
the same).
• When the recordings start at the same time,
only one of them will be recorded. Cancel
the timer setting for the programme that you
are not going to record.
1-14
Adjusting the recording picture
quality
You can adjust the picture quality of digitally
broadcasts programmes by selecting a preset
setting. You can also adjust the picture
quality by changing detailed settings, and
store up to three settings in the memory.
b Note
Only progressive video signals for recording can be
adjusted.
SYSTEM
MENU
</M/m/,,
ENTER
DISPLAY
1 Press SYSTEM MENU in stop mode.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Picture Adjustment,” and
press ENTER.
3 Select a preset setting, and press
ENTER.
“Tuner”: TV broadcasts
“VCR”: Video cassettes
“DTV”: Digital broadcasts
“Memory1”/“Memory2”/“Memory3”:
Your own settings. To create your own
settings, see “To create your own setting”
on page 59.
To check the detailed settings for the
selected preset, press DISPLAY.
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
z Hints
• For manual timer settings, you cannot modify the
timer setting for the current recording, but you
can extend the duration of the recording time
while recording (page 56).
For timer settings using the EPG, you can modify
the timer setting for the current recording while
recording, and extend the duration of the
recording (only when “EPG Link” is set to
“Off”).
• You can move to the first row/bottom row of the
Timer List using ./> while the list is
displayed.
b Notes
• When “VPS/PDC” is set to “On” for one or more
timer recordings, the start times may change in
the event of a broadcast delay or early start.
• Even if the timer is set, timer recordings cannot be
made while recording a programme that has
priority.
• Even if the timer is set for the same daily or
weekly programme, the timer recording cannot be
made if it overlaps with a programme that has
priority. “Overlap” will appear next to the
overlapped setting in the Timer List. Check the
priority order of the settings.
To create your own setting
1 Select “Memory1,” “Memory2,” or
“Memory3” in step 3.
2 Select “Detailed Settings,” and press
ENTER.
The display for adjusting detailed
settings appears.
3 Select an item using M/m, and adjust
settings using </,.
For details about each setting, see the
explanation of the display.
Timer Recording (For Freeview users only)
“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive
video signal when “Component Video
Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 136).
Select “Motion” for a picture, including
subjects that move dynamically.
Select “Still” for a picture with little
movement.
“Cinema”: Converts the progressive
video signal to match the type of DVD
software that you are watching when
“Component Video Out” is set to
“Progressive” (page 136).
Select “Auto” to detect the software type
(Film-based or Video-based)
automatically and select the appropriate
conversion mode. Normally select this
position.
Select “Off” to fix the conversion mode
to the mode for Video-based software.
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
The setting is automatically stored as the
setting you selected in step 1.
Creating chapters in a title
The recorder can automatically divide a
recording (a title) into chapters by inserting
chapter marks. To select chapter mark
intervals or disable this function, see “Auto
Chapter (HDD/VR),” “Auto Chapter
(Video),” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)”
in the “Recording” setup (page 143).
When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR
mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can
edit chapter marks (page 95).
59
Recording from
Connected Equipment
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
-RVR -RVideo
You can record from a connected VCR or
similar device. To connect a VCR or similar
device, see “Connecting a VCR or Similar
Device” on page 31. Use the DV IN jack on
Timer Recording (For Freeview users only)
the front panel if the equipment has a DV
output jack (i.LINK jack).
HDD DVD
INPUT
z REC REC MODE
x REC
STOP
1 Press HDD or DVD.
If you select DVD, insert a recordable
DVD (see “1. Inserting a Disc” on
page 36).
2 Press INPUT to select an input source
according to the connection you
made.
The front panel display changes as
follows:
programme position
,continued 61
 3 Select the desired audio signal when
recording a bilingual programme to
the HDD or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video
mode).
Set “External Audio” to “Bilingual” and
“Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” or “B/R”
in the “Audio In” setup (page 138).
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select
the recording mode.
For details about the recording mode, see
page 52.
5 Insert the source tape into the
connected equipment and set to
playback pause.
6 Press z REC.
This recorder starts recording.
7 Press the pause (or play) button on the
connected equipment to cancel the
playback pause status.
The connected equipment starts playback
and the playback image is recorded by
this recorder.
To stop recording, press x REC STOP
on this recorder.
If you connect a digital video camera with
a DV IN jack
See “DV Camcorder Dubbing” on page 104
for an explanation of how to record from the
DV IN jack.
z Hint
You can adjust the settings for the recording picture
before recording. See “Adjusting the recording
picture quality” on page 59.
b Notes
• When recording a video game image, the screen
may not be clear.
• Any programme that contains a Copy-Never copy
guard signal cannot be recorded.
• When “Bilingual Recording” is set to “A/L” or
“B/R” in step 3, you cannot select the sound when
playing in the following cases.
– When recording in PCM mode.
– When recording to the HDD (“HDD Recording
Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in the
“Recording” setup (page 144))/DVD+RW/
DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
• You cannot select “L1” in step 2 if “LINE 1 In” is
set to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup
(page 137).
62
“Info”: Shows information when
available.
“Editor”: Allows you to edit the
channel lineup and channel display
(page 69).
“Setup”: Allows you to change the
language, country/region, postal code,
input source, or host channel.
E “Home” position: When you press the
blue button (“Home”), the cursor
returns to the last programme position
on the “Grid.”
F Tiles: Shows the programme titles and
category; green (sports), purple
(movies), blue (children’s), teal
(others).
G Broadcast station Logo: Shows the
broadcast station logo.
H Time Slot: Indicates the currently
selected time slot. Use </, to select
a different time slot.
z Hint
You can also move the cursor to the Menu Bar by
pressing MENU.
Troubleshooting guide
If you are having trouble displaying the
television programme list, please check the
following:
• The clock must be set correctly. If the clock
is not set, set it manually (page 129).
• This recorder downloads the GUIDE Plus+
data several times a day when the recorder
is turned off (standby mode). Turn off the
recorder when you are not using it (for
example, at night). After initial setup
(page 26), it may take up to 24 hours for
your recorder to start receiving programme
listings. It may take up to one day to receive
all seven days of TV programme listings.
64
• Check the following if the programme
guide data has not been received after
waiting for a day:
– “Easy Setup” (page 26) is completed.
– The host channel is not disabled (see
“Disabling programme positions” on
page 70).
– The timer is not set.
If the programme guide data still cannot be
received after checking the above, search
for the host channel at the following
website and set the host channel manually
(page 69):
www.europe.guideplus.com
• If the host channel has changed or moved,
the programme guide data cannot be
received. In this case, follow the steps in
“Searching for the GUIDE Plus+ host
channel” (page 68) to update the host
channel setting.
• If the set top box receiver is connected to
the recorder using a SCART cord only, do
the following:
– Turn on your set top box receiver.
– Connect the set top box controller.
– Follow the steps in “Changing the GUIDE
Plus+ host channel manually” (page 69)
to set the host channel manually. Be sure
to set your set top box receiver (tuner) as
the source.
b Notes
• Your set top box receiver’s programme position
may suddenly change even if the recorder is
turned off. This is because the set top box
controller has changed the programme position to
receive the GUIDE Plus+ data.
• When you reset the recorder (page 158) the
following GUIDE Plus+ system settings are reset:
– Country/region setting in “Easy Setup”
– “Country” of “Setup” - “Basic Setup” in the
Menu Bar
– “Postal Code” of “Setup” - “Basic Setup” in the
Menu Bar
Note that the GUIDE Plus+ system is also reset
when you make changes to the host channel
settings.
• The GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be used when
“Input Line System” is set to “NTSC” in the
“Basic” setup (page 130).
1-15
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue
broadcasting only)
Introduction to the
GUIDE Plus+ System
The GUIDE Plus+® system is a free
interactive programme guide. It displays up
to seven days of programme listings,
including programme titles, promotions, and
broadcast information. GUIDE Plus+ data for
the television programme listings are carried
by your local broadcast host channel and are
received through your aerial, set top box
receiver, or direct cable connection from the
wall.
Visit www.europe.guideplus.com for a list of
all European host channels.
These are just a few of the ways to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
– Search for programmes by listing them
according to category (such as Movies or
Sport) or by using the Keyword Search
function (page 66).
– Once you have found the programme you
are looking for, use the GUIDE Plus+
system to set the timer for recording
(page 73).
– You can set the system to display your
favourite programmes according to
conditions that you set, such as category
and keyword (page 67).
For more information, see “Watching TV
Using the GUIDE Plus+ System” (page 65).
Watching TV Using the
GUIDE Plus+ System
Colour
buttons
GUIDE
</M/m/,,
ENTER
PAGE – PAGE +
DAY – DAY +
1 Press GUIDE.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home
Screen” appears.
2 Select a programme using </M/m/
,, and press ENTER.
The GUIDE Plus+ system disappears and
the programme position changes to the
selected programme.
Learning the common elements
Press GUIDE.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home Screen”
appears.
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue broadcasting only)
A Video Window: This shows the
programme you were watching when
you pressed GUIDE.
B Action Bar: When the same colour
button on the remote is pressed, the
Action Bar functions. The Action Bar
function differs according to the
screen.
C Information Box: Shows information
about the selected programme when
the “Home Screen” is displayed.
Contents will differ according to the
displayed screen.
D Menu Bar: Press the blue button
(“Home”), and press M to move the
cursor to the Menu Bar. Then select
one of the following features using </
,, and press ENTER.
“Grid”: Shows the programmes for the
current time slot and next 7 days.
“Search”: Allows you to search for
titles by category or by keyword
(page 66). The displayed category
depends upon the programme data
received by this recorder. Movies,
Sport, and Children are examples of
possible categories.
“My TV”: Sets the profile for your
favourite programmes (page 67).
“Schedule”: Displays the list of timer
settings (page 77).
,continued 63
To select a programme position quickly
using the TV broadcast station logo
1
Press GUIDE.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home
Screen” appears.
2 Press the yellow button (“Channels”).
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue broadcasting only)
3 Select the TV broadcast station logo
using </M/m/,, and press ENTER.
The display returns to “Grid” and the
programme currently being broadcast by
the selected TV station is selected.
4 Select a programme using </,, and
press ENTER.
To return to the “Home” position
Press the blue button (“Home”).
The cursor returns to the home position on the
“Grid.”
To set a programme for timer recording
See “One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+
(in the UK only))” (page 73).
To close the GUIDE Plus+ system
Press GUIDE.
z Hints
• Press the PAGE +/– buttons to change the
programme list by page.
• Press the DAY +/– buttons to change the
programme list by day.
,continued 65
 To unlock the Video Window
The Video Window is locked so that it does
not change programme positions when you
move the cursor across other titles.
From “Grid,” select the logo of the
programme position that is locked, and press
the red button (“Unlock”). “ ” changes to
“ ” and the Video Window is unlocked. To
lock the Video Window, select the logo of the
programme position you want to lock and
press the red button (“Lock”).
b Notes
• The Video Window is locked during recording
and the lock indicator appears in the Video
Window. You cannot unlock the Video Window
while recording.
• If you are watching programmes through a set top
box receiver, the Video Window may not change
as fast as you move the cursor. In this case, lock
the Video Window (page 66).
66
2 Select “Channels,” “Categories,” or
“Keywords,” and press the yellow
button (“Add”).
“Channels”: Select the programme
position using </M/m/,, and press
ENTER. To add more programme
positions, press the yellow button
(“Add”). You can register up to 16
programme positions.
To cancel the registration, select a
programme position, and press the red
button (“Delete”).
“Categories”: Select the category using
</M/m/,, and press ENTER. To add
more categories, press the yellow button
(“Add”). You can register up to 4
categories.
To cancel the registration, select a
category, and press the red button
(“Delete”).
“Keywords”: Enter a keyword. See “To
enter a new keyword” on page 67. To add
more keywords, press the yellow button
(“Add”). You can register up to 16
keywords.
To cancel the registration, select a
keyword, and press the red button
(“Delete”).
3 Press ENTER.
To change the profile settings
Repeat from step 1 above.
Selecting and watching a
programme from My TV
1 Select “My TV” in the Menu Bar, and
press ENTER.
The programmes that match the profile
conditions are displayed.
2 Select a programme using </M/m/
,, and press ENTER.
To set a programme for timer recording
See “One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+
(in the UK only))” (page 73).
68
Searching for a
Programme Using the
GUIDE Plus+ System
Colour
buttons
</M/m/,,
ENTER
1 Select “Search” in the Menu Bar, and
press ENTER.
2 Select a category using </,.
To search for a programme by keyword,
select “My Choice.” You can search for
all programmes that contain the keyword
in the programme’s title and in the
programme’s Information Box. If no
keywords are displayed, enter the
keyword. See “To enter a new keyword”
below.
3 Select a sub-category using M/m, and
press ENTER.
Programmes that meet the conditions are
listed.
The sub-categories differ according to
country/region.
Making Changes to the
GUIDE Plus+ System
[/1
Number
buttons
Colour
buttons
</M/m/,,
ENTER
Searching for the GUIDE Plus+
host channel
The default host channel setting is set to
“Automatic,” so you should not have to
change the host channel setting. However, if
the host channel has changed or moved,
update the host channel setting.
If the set top box receiver is connected to the
recorder using a SCART cord only (page 17),
see “Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host
channel manually” on page 69.
1 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar.
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.
2 Select “Host Channel Setup” using M/
m, and press ENTER.
3 Press the yellow button (“Reset”).
4 Press [/1 to turn off the recorder.
1-16
4 Select a programme using M/m, and
press ENTER. Listing Up Your Favourite
Programme Information
To enter a new keyword
(My TV)
1 Select “Search” in the Menu Bar, and
press ENTER.
You can set a profile and list up only your
2 Select “My Choice” using </,. favourite programme information.
3 Press the yellow button (“Add”).
The display for entering characters
appears.
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue broadcasting only)
Colour
buttons
</M/m/,,
ENTER
4 Select a character on the keyboard using
</M/m/,, and press ENTER.
To switch between upper-case, lower-
case, or characters with accents, press the
yellow button (“Keyboard”) repeatedly.
Setting a profile
To cancel entering a new keyword, press
the red button (“Back”). 1 Select “My TV” in the Menu Bar, and
press the yellow button (“Profile”).
5 Repeat step 4 to enter the keyword.
6 Press the green button (“Save”).
The entered keyword is registered.
To delete the keyword, select the
keyword you want to delete, and press
the red button (“Delete”).
To change the keyword, select the
keyword you want to change, and press
the green button (“Edit”).
To set a programme for timer recording
See “One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+
(in the UK only))” (page 73).
z Hint
When two or more keywords are set for “My
Choice,” you can select “All” for sub-category.
,continued 67
5 Wait for one day until the programme 9 Select “Confirm” using </,, and
guide data can be received. press ENTER.
If the programme guide data has not been The display returns to the GUIDE Plus+
received after waiting for a day, search setup menu.
for the host channel at the following
website and set the host channel
10 Wait one day until the programme
manually (“Changing the GUIDE Plus+ guide data can be received.
host channel manually” (page 69)).
www.europe.guideplus.com
To cancel the settings
Press the red button (“Back”).
Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host
To return to the “Home” position
channel manually Press the blue button (“Home”).
The cursor returns to the home position on the
If the set top box receiver is connected to the
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue broadcasting only)
“Grid.”
recorder using a SCART cord only and you
want to receive the programme guide data
To check the GUIDE Plus+ system
from your set top box receiver, search for the
host channel on the following website and set
information
it for your area, following the steps below: 1 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar, and
www.europe.guideplus.com press ENTER.
2 Select “GUIDE Plus+ system
1 Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar. Information” using M/m, and press
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears. ENTER.
2 Select “Host Channel Setup” using M/
m, and press ENTER.
Checking programme positions
3 Press the yellow button (“Change”)
twice. Check whether programme position numbers
“Manual” appears. are the same as the programme position
numbers set in the “Analog Tuner” setup.
If you want to make adjustments to the
channel settings or change the channel name,
see “Aerial Reception Settings (Analog
Tuner)” (page 133).
1 Select “Editor” in the Menu Bar.
4 Select “Source” using ,.
5 Press the yellow button (“Source”)
repeatedly to select the input source.
6 Select “Prog. No.” using ,.
7 Enter the programme position number
using the number buttons. 2 Press ENTER.
8 Press the green button (“Save”). 3 Press , to move the cursor to the
The display asks for confirmation. right column.
,continued 69
 4 Select the programme position you Approx. recording time
want to check using M/m. Timer Recording (For analogue (hours)
To change the input source, press the red broadcasting only) Recording HDD DVD*1
button (“Source”).
mode
To change the programme position, press RDR- RDR- RDR- RDR-
the green button (“Prog. No.”), then enter Before Recording HXD HXD HXD HXD
770 870 970 1070
a programme position number using the
number buttons, and press ENTER. Before you start recording… HQ (High 25 34 53 105 1 hr.
• Check that the disc has enough available quality) 1 min.
space for the recording (page 40). For the HSP R 37 50 79 155 1 hr.
b Note
To receive from the recorder a programme position
HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you 30 min.
that can be received by either the set top box can free up disc space by erasing titles SP 51 68 105 210 2
receiver or the recorder, change the input source in (page 92). (Standard
step 4. • Adjust the recording picture quality if mode)
necessary (page 76).
LSP r 63 84 130 265 2 hr.
b Note 30 min.
Disabling programme positions
To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment, ESP r 75 100 155 315 3

Timer Recording (For analogue broadcasting only)

If any programme positions are unused or finalise the disc (page 45).
LP r 100 135 210 420 4
contain unwanted channels, you can hide
them. EP r 150 200 315 635 6
Recording mode SLP r 200 270 425 850 8
1 Select “Editor” in the Menu Bar, and
Like the standard ×3 recording modes of SEP*2 255 340 530 1060 10
press ENTER. video tapes, you can select the desired (Long
2 In the left column, select the recording mode using the REC MODE duration)
programme position you want to hide button. *1
The approximate recording time is for 12 cm
or display using M/m. Recording modes with higher quality provide DVD discs.
a more beautiful recording, but the large data The approximate recording times for DVD+R
3 Press the red button (“On/Off”). volume also results in a shorter recording DL (Double Layer)/DVD-R DL (Dual Layer)
The disabled positions will turn grey. time. discs are as follows:
To show the disabled positions, press the Conversely, a longer duration provides a HQ: 1 hour 51 minutes
red button (“On/Off”) again. longer recording time, but the lower data HSP: 2 hours 41 minutes
SP: 3 hours 35 minutes
volume results in a coarser picture quality.
LSP: 4 hours 29 minutes
ESP: 5 hours 23 minutes
b Notes Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the LP: 7 hours 11 minutes
• You cannot record a programme position if it is recording modes. EP: 10 hours 46 minutes
not set in “Aerial Reception Settings (Analog
To select further options for recording mode SLP: 14 hours 21 minutes
Tuner)” (page 133) even if it is set to “On” in the
(manual recording mode), set “Manual Rec. SEP: 17 hours 57 minutes
“Editor” in the Menu Bar. *2
Mode” to “On (go to setup)” in the When recording to DVD+RW or DVD+R, SLP
• If you are using your set top box receiver to
is the longest recording time available. If you
receive programmes (when the set top box “Recording” setup (page 141). To record
select SEP, the recording mode will
receiver is connected to the recorder using a pictures in higher quality than HQ mode on
automatically revert to SLP.
SCART cord only, page 17) and are able to the HDD, set “Manual Rec. Mode” to “On
receive the same programme with both the set top (go to setup),” and then select “HQ+.” For z Hint
box receiver and the recorder, change the details about manual recording mode, see To easily select a manual recording mode, press
“Source” to receive the programme with the page 141. REC MODE repeatedly to display “MN,” and
recorder’s tuner.
For timer recording, you can also select select a manual recording mode using </,.
“AUTO” as recording mode, which
maximizes the recording quality for the space
available on the disc (if recording to DVD),
or to fit onto a blank disc (if recording to
HDD).

70 ,continued 71

b Notes ZWEITON (German stereo) system 1 Press GUIDE.

• The maximum continuous recording time to the
HDD is 12 hours for a single title. A title longer
than 12 hours is divided.
• Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies
with the recording time.
– Recording a programme with poor reception, or
a programme or video source of low picture
quality.
– Recording on a disc that has already been
edited.
– Recording only a still picture or just sound.
• Programmes are recorded in the following aspect
ratio.
– In the original aspect ratio, when recording to
the HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is
set to “Video Mode Off” in the “Recording”
setup (page 144))/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR
mode).
– In 4:3 when recording to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs.
When a stereo-based programme is received,
“Stereo” appears.
When a bilingual ZWEITON-based
programme is received, “L,” “R,” or “L+R”
appears.
NICAM system
To record a NICAM programme, be sure to
set “NICAM Select” to “NICAM” (default)
in the “Audio In” setup. If the sound is not
clear when listening to NICAM broadcasts,
set “NICAM Select” to “Standard”
(page 137).
z Hint
You can select the audio (main or sub) while
recording bilingual programmes using the AUDIO
Timer Recording (GUIDE
Plus+/Manual)
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
-RVR -RVideo
There are two methods to set the timer within
the GUIDE Plus+ system: One Button
Recording and setting the timer manually.
You can set the timer for a total of 32
programmes (8 programmes when using the
VPS/PDC function), up to 30 days in
2 Select a programme using </M/m/
advance.
,.
To search for a programme by category
b Notes or by keyword, select “Search” in the
• When the recorder is connected to a set top box Menu Bar. See “Searching for a
Timer Recording (For analogue broadcasting only)

• When recording to DVD-R DLs (Video mode), button. This does not affect the recorded sound. receiver and you want to record using the GUIDE Programme Using the GUIDE Plus+
the title is divided when the layer switches. Plus+ system, turn on the set top box receiver and System” on page 66 for more
connect the set top box controller. information about searching for a
Unrecordable pictures • Do not operate your set top box receiver just programme.
before or during a timer recording. This may
Recording stereo and bilingual prevent the accurate recording of a programme.
You can select a programme from “My
Pictures with copy protection cannot be TV” (page 67).
programmes recorded on this recorder.
3 Press the red button (“Record”) or
The recorder automatically receives and Copy control Recordable discs One Button Recording (GUIDE z REC.
records stereo and bilingual programmes signals Plus+ (in the UK only)) The set programme and Time Slot
based on the ZWEITON system or the Copy-Free change colour and the recorder is ready
HDD +RW -RWVR
NICAM system. You can use the GUIDE Plus+ system to set to start recording. When recording from a
The HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” -RWVideo +R -RVR the timer to record a programme up to seven set top box receiver, be sure to turn it on.
is set to “Video Mode Off” in the -RVideo days in advance. Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn off
“Recording” setup (page 144)) and a DVD- the recorder before the timer recording
Copy-Once HDD
RW (VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode) can starts.
record both main and sub sounds. You can -RWVR (CPRM*) • To record on a DVD
switch between main and sub when playing -RVR See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling
(CPRM*)
the disc. Timer Settings” on page 77.
The HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” Copy-Never None • To make more detailed timer settings
is set to “Video Mode On” in the “Recording” Colour See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling
* The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM
setup (page 144)) and a DVD+RW, DVD+R, buttons Timer Settings” on page 77.
compatible equipment (page 10).
DVD-RW (Video mode), or DVD-R (Video GUIDE
mode) can record only one sound track (main
or sub) at a time. Select the sound track in the To confirm, change, or cancel a timer
</M/m/,
“Audio In” setup before recording starts. Set recording
“Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” (default) or See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer
“B/R” in the “Audio In” setup (page 138). Settings” on page 77.
About HDD Recording format, see page 144.
To stop recording during timer recording
z REC Press x REC STOP.
x REC
STOP
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
the on-screen instructions.

72 ,continued 73

1-17
 Rec. Mode Adjust
If there is not enough available disc space for
the recording, the recorder automatically
adjusts the recording mode to enable the
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording”
setup (page 143).
If the timer settings overlap
If one or more timer settings overlap, a
message appears. To change the timer
settings, see “Checking/Changing/
Cancelling Timer Settings” on page 77.
z Hint
If you are recording to the HDD, you can play the
title as it is being recorded by selecting the
programme title on the Title List (page 88).
b Notes
• If a message indicating that the HDD is full
appears on the screen, change the recording
destination to “DVD,” or make available space
for the recording (page 92).
• If there is not enough available DVD disc space
for the recording, the recorder automatically
records the programme to the HDD even if you
select “DVD” (Recovery Recording).
• The last recording mode you selected manually
becomes the default recording mode for timer
recordings made from the GUIDE Plus+ system.
• You cannot adjust the recording quality (HDD or
DVD) once the recording starts.
• The beginning of some recordings may not be
made when using the VPS/PDC function.
• You cannot extend the recording duration time
when “VPS/PDC” is selected (page 78).
• The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function only works
with a timer recording to DVD, and the VPS/PDC
function set to off.
• The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO”
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”
74
Adjusting the recording picture
quality
You can adjust the picture quality by
selecting a preset setting. You can also adjust
the picture quality by changing detailed
settings, and store up to three settings in the
memory.
SYSTEM
MENU
</M/m/,,
ENTER
DISPLAY
1 Press SYSTEM MENU in stop mode.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Picture Adjustment,” and
press ENTER.
3 Select a preset setting, and press
ENTER.
“Tuner”: TV broadcasts
“VCR”: Video cassettes
“DTV”: Digital broadcasts
“Memory1”/“Memory2”/“Memory3”:
Your own settings. To create your own
settings, see “To create your own setting”
on page 76.
To check the detailed settings for the
selected preset, press DISPLAY.
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
76
Setting the timer manually
Number
buttons
Colour
buttons
GUIDE
</M/m/,,
ENTER
z REC
x REC
STOP
1 Press GUIDE.
2 Select “Schedule” in the Menu bar.
The SCHEDULE list appears.
3 Press the green button (“Manual”).
4 Set the date using the number buttons
and </M/m/,. Then press the
green button (“Next”).
5 Set the start time using the number
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press
the green button (“Next”).
6 Set the stop time using the number
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press
the green button (“Next”).
To create your own setting
1 Select “Memory1,” “Memory2,” or
“Memory3” in step 3.
2 Select “Detailed Settings,” and press
ENTER.
The display for adjusting detailed
settings appears.
3 Select an item using M/m, and adjust
settings using </,.
For details about each setting, see the
explanation of the display.
“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive
video signal when “Component Video
Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 136).
Select “Motion” for a picture, including
subjects that move dynamically.
Select “Still” for a picture with little
movement.
“Cinema”: Converts the progressive
video signal to match the type of DVD
software that you are watching when
“Component Video Out” is set to
“Progressive” (page 136).
Select “Auto” to detect the software type
(Film-based or Video-based)
automatically and select the appropriate
conversion mode. Normally select this
position.
Select “Off” to fix the conversion mode
to the mode for Video-based software.
“3-D Y/C”: Adjusts the brightness/
colour separation for the video signals.
Select “Motion” for a picture, including
subjects that move dynamically.
Select “Still” for a picture with little
movement.
“YNR” (luminance noise reduction):
Reduces noise contained in the
luminance element of the video signal.
“CNR” (chroma noise reduction):
Reduces noise contained in the chroma
element of the video signal.
“Detail”: Adjusts the sharpness of
images outlines.
“White AGC”: Turn on for automatic
white level adjustment.
“White Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity
of white.
“Black Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity
of black.
1-18
7 Select the input source using M/m,
and select the programme position Using the Quick Timer function
using the number buttons or M/m.
You can set the recorder to record in 30-
You can also select the programme
minute increments.
position using the yellow button
(“Channels”).
Press z REC repeatedly to set the
8 Press the green button (“Next”). duration.
The display for entering characters Each press advances the time in 30-minute
appears. increments. The maximum duration is six
To change the title name, select a hours.
character on the keyboard using </M/
m/,, and press ENTER.
To switch between upper-case, lower-
case, or characters with accents, press the (normal recording)
yellow button (“Keyboard”).
The time counter decreases minute by minute
9 Press the green button (“Save”). to 0:00, then the recorder stops recording (the
The date, start and stop times, power turns off).
Timer Recording (For analogue broadcasting only)
programme position, etc. settings appear.
The recorder is ready to start recording. To cancel the Quick Timer
Press z REC repeatedly until the counter
appears in the front panel display. The
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer recorder returns to normal recording mode.
recording To stop recording, press x REC STOP.
See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer
b Note
Settings” on page 77.
If you turn off the recorder during recording,
recording is stopped.
To stop recording during timer recording
Press x REC STOP.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
the on-screen instructions.
Rec. Mode Adjust
If there is not enough available disc space for
the recording, the recorder automatically
adjusts the recording mode to enable the
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording”
setup (page 143).
,continued 75
“Black Level”: Selects the black level
(setup level) for the NTSC video signals. Checking/Changing/
Select “ON” to raise the standard black
level. Select this when the picture Cancelling Timer
appears too dark.
Select “OFF” to set the black level of the Settings
input signals to the standard level.
Normally, select this position. HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
“Hue”: Adjusts the colour balance. -RVR -RVideo
“Chroma Level”: Makes the colours
deeper or lighter. You can change or cancel timer settings using
the SCHEDULE list.
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
The setting is automatically stored as the
setting you selected in step 1.
Number
buttons
Creating chapters in a title
Timer Recording (For analogue broadcasting only)
The recorder can automatically divide a Colour
recording (a title) into chapters by inserting buttons
GUIDE
chapter marks. To select chapter mark
intervals or disable this function, see “Auto
Chapter (HDD/VR),” “Auto Chapter </M/m/,
(Video),” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)”
in the “Recording” setup (page 143).
When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR
mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can
edit chapter marks (page 95).
Changing timer settings
1 Press GUIDE.
2 Select “Schedule” in the Menu bar.
The SCHEDULE list appears.
,continued 77
 3 Select the timer setting you want to b Notes
change using M/m, and press the • The new settings become effective when you exit
the GUIDE Plus+ system.
green button (“Edit”).
• When you set the recording destination to
“HDDr,” the previous timer recording will be
replaced with the new one even if you have not
watched it.
About the VPS/PDC function
VPS/PDC signals are transmitted with TV
programmes in some broadcast systems.
These signals ensure that timer recordings are
made regardless of any broadcast delays,
early starts, or broadcast interruptions.
To use the VPS/PDC function
4 In the left column, select an item Select “VPS / PDC” in step 7 above.
using the red button (“Back”) or the When you turn on this function, the recorder
green button (“Next”), and adjust starts scanning the channels before the timer
using the number buttons or </M/m/ recording starts.
,.
You can change the date, start time, stop
Cancelling timer settings
time, programme position, or input
source.
The cursor moves to the right column.
1 Press GUIDE.
5 Press the corresponding colour button 2 Select “Schedule” in the Menu bar.
The SCHEDULE list appears.
repeatedly to change settings.
• Yellow button (“Destination”): Sets the 3 Select the timer setting you want to
recording destination. If there is not cancel using M/m, and press the red
enough available DVD disc space for button (“Delete”).
the recording, the recorder
automatically records the programme
to the HDD even if you select “DVD” To close the SCHEDULE list
(Recovery Recording). When you set a Press GUIDE.
daily or weekly timer, “HDDr” allows
you to replace the previous timer
recording with the new one
When the timer settings overlap
• The programme that starts first has priority
automatically (HDD only). and the entire programme is recorded.
• Green button (“Frequency”): Selects • After finishing the previous recording, the
the recording pattern. other recording starts with several tens-of-
• Red button (“Quality”): Selects the second’s delay (when the end-time of one
recording mode (page 71).
recording and the start-time of another are
6 Press , to display “Timing.” the same).
• When the recordings start at the same time,
7 Press the green button (“Timing”) only one of them will be recorded. Cancel
repeatedly to select the duration time the timer setting for the programme that you
or to set the VPS/PDC function. are not going to record.
See “About the VPS/PDC function”
below. b Note
When “VPS / PDC” is set for one or more timer
• If you want to record to a particular
recordings, the start times may change in the event
HDD genre, press the yellow button
of a broadcast delay or early start.
(“Genre”) repeatedly.
78
3 Select a title using M/m, and press
ENTER.
Playback Playback starts from the selected title.
Playing the Recorded
To use the DVD’s Menu
Programme/DVD When you play a DVD VIDEO, or a finalised
DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode),
DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video mode), you can
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
-RVR -RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD *
display the disc’s menu by pressing TOP
MENU or MENU.
DATA CD *
* DivX video file only b Note
The H button is not available in the disc’s menu.
HDD DVD To play VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs with
PBC functions
Number
buttons PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play
VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
CLEAR interactively using the menu on your TV
MENU
ANGLE screen.
SYSTEM When you start playing a VIDEO CD/Super
MENU TITLE LIST/
TOP MENU
VIDEO CD with PBC functions, the menu
appears.
</M/m/,,
ENTER Select an item using the number buttons, and
press ENTER. Then, follow the instructions
/ DISPLAY
. > in the menu (press H when “Press
SELECT” appears).
H/X/x
b Note
Some playback options such as search, repeat play
PLAY or programme play cannot be played with PBC
MODE function. To play with playback options, start
playback without PBC functions using the Title
List.
1 Press HDD or DVD.
• If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1. To change the angles
Inserting a Disc” on page 36). If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene
• If you insert a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO are recorded on the disc, “ ” appears on
CD, DATA DVD or DATA CD, press the screen. Press ANGLE during playback.
H. Playback starts. To switch the angle mark indicator to off, set
“Angle Indicator” to “Off” in the “Playback”
2 Press TITLE LIST. setup (page 145).
For details about the Title List, see “3.
Playing the Recorded Programme (Title
To stop playback
List)” on page 38. Press x.
Example: HDD
To playback quickly with sound (Scan
Audio)
When you press M during playback, you
can play quickly with dialogue or sound
(except for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO
CDs).
No sound is output when you press M two
or more times to change search speed.
80
1-19
Recording from
Connected Equipment
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
-RVR -RVideo
You can record from a connected VCR or
similar device. To connect a VCR or similar
device, see “Connecting a VCR or Similar
Device” on page 31. Use the DV IN jack on
the front panel if the equipment has a DV
output jack (i.LINK jack).
HDD DVD
INPUT
z REC REC MODE
x REC
STOP
1 Press HDD or DVD.
If you select DVD, insert a recordable
DVD (see “1. Inserting a Disc” on
page 36).
2 Press INPUT to select an input source
according to the connection you
made.
The front panel display changes as
follows:
programme position
To display the registration code for this
recorder
Select “Registration Code” of “DivX” in the
“Options” setup (page 150).
To resume playback from the point where
you stopped (Resume Play)
When you press H again after you stop
playback, the recorder resumes playback
from the point where you pressed x.
To start from the beginning, press x again,
and press H. Playback starts from the
beginning of the title/track/scene.
The point where you stopped playing is
cleared when:
– you open the disc tray (except HDD).
– you play another title (except HDD).
– you switch the Title List to Original or
Playlist (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode
only).
– you edit the title after stopping playback.
– you change the settings on the recorder.
– you make a recording (except HDD/DVD-
RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode).
– you disconnect the mains lead.
b Notes
• You cannot resume playback during TV Pause.
• Resume Play is not available for Super VIDEO
CDs.
To play restricted DVDs (Parental Lock)
If you play a restricted DVD, the display for
entering your password appears on your TV
screen.
Enter your four-digit password using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
The recorder starts playback.
To register or change the password, see
“Limitation Settings (Parental Lock)” on
page 145.
3 Select the desired audio signal when
recording a bilingual programme to
the HDD or DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video
mode).
Set “External Audio” to “Bilingual” and
“Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” or “B/R”
in the “Audio In” setup (page 138).
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select
the recording mode.
For details about the recording mode, see
page 71.
5 Insert the source tape into the
connected equipment and set to
playback pause.
6 Press z REC.
This recorder starts recording.
Timer Recording (For analogue broadcasting only)
7 Press the pause (or play) button on the
connected equipment to cancel the
playback pause status.
The connected equipment starts playback
and the playback image is recorded by
this recorder.
To stop recording, press x REC STOP
on this recorder.
If you connect a digital video camera with
a DV IN jack
See “DV Camcorder Dubbing” on page 104
for an explanation of how to record from the
DV IN jack.
z Hint
You can adjust the settings for the recording picture
before recording. See “Adjusting the recording
picture quality” on page 76.
b Notes
• When recording a video game image, the screen
may not be clear.
• Any programme that contains a Copy-Never copy
guard signal cannot be recorded.
• When “Bilingual Recording” is set to “A/L” or
“B/R” in step 3, you cannot select the sound when
playing in the following cases.
– When recording in PCM mode.
– When recording to the HDD (“HDD Recording
Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in the
“Recording” setup (page 144))/DVD+RW/
DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
• You cannot select “L1” in step 2 if “LINE 1 In” is
set to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup
(page 137).
79
To lock the recorder (Child Lock)
You can lock all of the buttons on the
recorder so that the settings are not cancelled
by mistake.
When the recorder is turned off, hold down x
on the recorder until “LOCKED” appears in
the front panel display. The recorder does not
work except for timer recordings while the
Child Lock is set.
To unlock the recorder, hold down x on the
recorder until “UNLOCKED” appears in the
front panel display.
One-Touch Play (for SCART/HDMI
connections only)
Press H. With one touch of the H button,
the recorder and your TV automatically turn
on and the TV’s input is switched to the
recorder. Playback starts automatically.
Playback
z Hint
You can also use the H button in step 3 (page 80)
to start playback.
b Note
When using the HDMI connection, there may be a
delay, before the playback picture appears on the
TV screen, and the beginning portion of the
playback picture may not be displayed.
,continued 81
 Buttons Operations
Playback options
Plays in slow motion when pressed for more than one second in
To check the position of the buttons below, see the illustration on page 80. (slow, freeze frame) pause mode.
Plays one frame at a time when pressed briefly in pause mode.
HDD +RW -RWVR
Buttons Operations To resume normal playback, press H.
-RWVideo +R -RVR
AUDIO Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed *1
-RVideo DVD VCD
repeatedly in normal playback mode.
HDD -RWVR -RVR *1*2 *1*2
DVD VCD DATA DVD * DVD DATA DVD * DATA CD * : Selects the language. DATA DVD DATA CD
*1
-RVR : Selects the main or sub sound. Playback direction only
DATA CD * HDD -RWVR *2
DivX video file only
* DivX video file only VCD : Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks.
X (pause) Pauses playback.
SUBTITLE Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly. To resume normal playback, press H.
DVD DATA DVD * DATA CD *
b Notes
* DivX video file only • Angles and subtitles cannot be changed with titles
/ (instant replay/ Each time you press , replays the scene for the following recorded on this recorder.
instant advance) duration. • JPEG image files made with a DVD camcorder
5 seconds t 15 seconds t 30 seconds t 1 minute t can only be played as a slideshow. For video files
2 minutes t 3 minutes t 5 minutes t 10 minutes t containing JPEG image files and movies, the
20 minutes t advances the time in 10-minute increments t recorder can play movie parts only.

Playback
2 hours
Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound
Each time you press , briefly fast forwards the current scene track
for the following duration. DTS audio signals are output only through the
30 seconds t 1 minute t 1 minute 30 seconds t 2 minutes t DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack.
3 minutes t 5 minutes t 10 minutes t 20 minutes t When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set
advances the time in 10-minute increments t 2 hours “DTS Output” to “On” in the “Audio Out” setup
. (previous)/ Goes to the beginning of the previous/next title/chapter/scene/track (page 139).
> (next) when pressed during playback.
Goes to the beginning of the first title/track when pressed in stop
mode.
Fast reverses/fast forwards the disc when pressed during playback.
(fast reverse/fast forward) Search speed changes as follows:
fast reverse fast forward
mFR1*1 T t MFF1*2
mFR2 T T t t MFF2
mFR3 T T T t t t MFF3*3
*3

mFR4*3 T T T T t t t t MFF4*3
When you press and hold the button, fast forward/fast reverse
continues at the selected speed until you release the button.
*1
When you press m once during playback, you can play Reverse
play (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs/DivX video
files).
*2
When you press M once during playback, you can play quickly
with sound (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs).
*3 Not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs.

To resume normal playback, press H.

82 ,continued 83

To cancel Programme play

Playing a specific portion
repeatedly (A-B Repeat)
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2 Select “A-B Repeat,” and press
ENTER.
“Set point A” is selected.
3 While monitoring the sound, press
ENTER at the starting point (point A) of
Playing repeatedly (Repeat)
You can play repeatedly all the titles/tracks/
files or a single title/chapter/track on the
HDD or a disc.
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2 Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.
3 Select an item to be repeated using M/
m.
“Repeat Title” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA
DVDs*1/DATA CDs*1): repeats the
current title.
“Repeat Chapter” (for HDD/DVDs):
repeats the current chapter.
“Repeat Track” (for VIDEO CDs*2):
repeats the current track.
“Repeat Programme”: repeats the current
Creating your own programme
(Programme)
HDD -RWVideo * -RVideo * VCD
* finalised disc only
You can play the contents of the HDD or a
disc in the order you want by arranging the
order of the titles/chapters/albums/tracks on
the HDD or disc to create your own
programme. You can make a programme of
up to 24 steps.
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2 Select “Programme,” and press
ENTER.
3 Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and
Press CLEAR during playback. Or, set
“Programme” to “Cancel Programme Play”
in the “Play Mode” menu.
To erase the programme
Press CLEAR in stop mode. Or, set
“Programme” to “Erase Programme List” in
the “Play Mode” menu.
z Hints
• The program you made remains after Programme
play finishes. To play the same program again, set
“Programme” to “Start Programme Play” in the
“Play Mode” menu. However, the programme is
cleared after you remove the disc or press [/1.
• You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to
“Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu
(page 84).
• You can select “Programme” from “Play Mode”
in the System Menu.
Playback

programme (page 85). press ENTER. Adjusting the picture quality

the portion to be played repeatedly.
“Repeat Disc” (for VIDEO CDs*2/DVD- The “Input/Edit Programme” display
“Set point B” is selected. HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo+R
RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)): repeats all of differs depending upon the disc type.
4 Continue playing to locate the ending the tracks on a disc.
*1
Example: DVD -RVR -RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD *
point (point B), and press ENTER. DivX video file only DATA CD *
*2 Available only when playing without PBC
A-B Repeat starts. * DivX video file only
functions

4 Press ENTER. You can adjust the picture quality from

To cancel A-B Repeat
Press CLEAR. Or, set “A-B Repeat” to “Off”
in the “Play Mode” menu.
z Hint
You can select “A-B Repeat” from “Play Mode” in
the System Menu.
b Note
When playing an HDD/DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW
(Video mode)/DVD-R (Video mode), set the start
and stop points within the same title.
Repeat play starts.
To cancel Repeat play
Press CLEAR. Or, set “Repeat” to “Repeat
Off” in the “Play Mode” menu. 4 Select a title or album (example: Title
001) using M/m, and press ENTER.
z Hint
5 Select a chapter or track (example:
You can select “Repeat” from “Play Mode” in the
System Menu. Chapter 01) using M/m, and press
ENTER.
b Note The chapter or track is programmed.
You cannot select “Repeat Programme” when no
programme remains.
If you make a mistake, select the step
number (example: 01.) using </M/m,
and press CLEAR.
6 To programme other chapters or
tracks, press </M/m/, to select a
step number, and repeat steps 4 and
5.
7 Press H.
Programme play starts.
connected equipment, such as a TV or
projector by selecting a preset setting. You
can also adjust the picture quality by
changing detailed settings, and store up to
three settings in the memory.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU during playback
or in pause mode.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Picture Adjustment,” and
press ENTER.
3 Select a preset setting using </,,
and press ENTER.
Dynamic: produces a bold dynamic
picture by increasing the picture contrast
and the colour intensity.
Standard: displays a standard picture.
Professional: displays an original picture.
Memory1/Memory2/Memory3: Your
own settings. To create your own
settings, see “To create your own setting”
below.

84 ,continued 85

1-20
 To check the detailed settings for the
selected preset, press DISPLAY.
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
To create your own setting
1 Select “Memory1,” “Memory2,” or
“Memory3” in step 3.
2 Select “Detailed Settings,” and press
ENTER.
The display for adjusting detailed
settings appears.
3 Select an item using M/m, and adjust
settings using </,.
For details about each setting, see the
explanation of the display.
“Prog. Motion”: Adjusts the progressive
video signal when “Component Video
Out” is set to “Progressive” (page 136).
Select “Motion” for a picture, including
subjects that move dynamically.
Select “Still” for a picture with little
movement.
“Cinema”: Converts the progressive
video signal to match the type of DVD
software that you are watching when
“Component Video Out” is set to
“Progressive” (page 136).
Select “Auto1” to automatically detect
the software type (Film-based or Video-
based) and select the appropriate
conversion mode. Normally select this
position.
If the picture appears unnatural, select
“Auto2,” “On,” or “Off.”
“YNR” (luminance noise reduction):
Reduces noise contained in the
luminance element of the video signal.
“BNR” (block noise reduction): Reduces
“block noise” or mosaic-like patterns in
the picture.
86
Playing from the
Beginning of the
Programme You Are
Recording (Chase Play)
HDD
“Chase Play” allows you to view the recorded
part of a programme on the HDD while the
recording is being made. You do not need to
wait until the recording finishes.
H
Press H while recording.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
programme you are recording.
When you fast forward to the point that you
are recording, “Chase Play” returns to normal
playback.
88
“MNR” (mosquito noise reduction):
Reduces the faint noise appearing around
the outlines of the images. The noise
reduction effects are automatically
adjusted within each setting range
according to the video bit rate and other
factors.
“Sharpness”: Sharpens the outlines of the
images.
“Detail”: Adjusts the sharpness of
images outlines.
“White Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity
of white.
“Black Enhancer”: Adjusts the intensity
of black.
“Black Level”: Selects the black level
(setup level) for the video signals.
Select “ON” to raise the standard black
level. Select this when the picture
appears too dark.
Select “OFF” to set the black level of the
input signals to the standard level.
Normally, select this position.
“Gamma Correction”: Adjusts how dark
areas look.
“Hue”: Adjusts the colour balance.
“Chroma Level”: Makes the colours
deeper or lighter.
4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
The setting is automatically stored as the
setting you selected in step 1.
b Notes
• If the outlines of the images on your screen
become blurred, set “BNR” and/or “MNR” to
“Off.”
• Depending on the disc or the scene being played,
the above BNR or MNR effects may be hard to
discern. Also, these functions may not work with
some screen sizes.
• The following settings are not available for the
signals output from the HDMI jack.
– “Sharpness”
– “White Enhancer”
– “Black Enhancer”
– “Black Level”
– “Gamma Correction”
– “Hue”
– “Chroma Level”
Playing a Previous
Recording While Making
Another (Simultaneous
Rec and Play)
+RW +R
HDD -RWVR -RWVideo
-RVR -RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD
DATA CD
“Simultaneous Rec and Play” allows you to
view a previously recorded programme while
recording programmes. Playback continues
even if a timer recording starts. Use this
function as follows:
• While recording to the HDD:
Play another title on the HDD.
Play a previously recorded programme on a
DVD by pressing the DVD button.
• While recording to a DVD:
Play a previously recorded programme on
the HDD by pressing the HDD button.
You can also play a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO
CD, Super VIDEO CD, DATA DVD, or
DATA CD while recording on the HDD.
HDD DVD
TITLE LIST
M/m,
ENTER
Example: Play another title on the HDD
while recording to the HDD.
1 While recording, press TITLE LIST to
display the HDD Title List.
2 Select the title you want to play, and
press ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected title.
1-21
Pausing a TV Broadcast
(TV Pause/Pause Live TV)
HDD
You can pause a current TV broadcast, and
record it on the HDD, then continue watching
the programme at a later time. This is useful
when you receive an unexpected phone call
or visitor while watching TV.
When connecting the recorder to your TV
using the SCART jack, do the followings.
– set “SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder
Only” in the “Options” setup (page 150).
– set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 150).
– preset programme positions by
downloading from your TV using
“Download from TV” of “Auto Channel
Setting” in the “Analog Tuner” setup
(page 133).
If you do not make the SCART connection,
set “TV Pause” to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 150).
m M
TV PAUSE H/X/x
x REC
STOP
Example: Play a DVD while recording to
the HDD.
1 While recording, press DVD and insert
the DVD into the recorder.
2 Press TITLE LIST to display the DVD
Title List.
3 Select the title you want to play, and
press ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected title.
b Note
You cannot play a DVD, DivX video or VIDEO
CD recorded in the NTSC colour system while
recording on the HDD in the PAL/SECAM colour
system.
1 While viewing a TV broadcast, press
TV PAUSE.
The picture pauses, and the recorder
starts recording the current TV channel
to the HDD.
It may take up to 10 seconds to start
recording.
2 Press H to resume watching the
programme.
You can fast forward/fast reverse, pause,
or stop the programme using m/M,
X and x without affecting the recording.
3 Press x REC STOP to stop recording.
b Notes
• The picture does not pause and the recorder starts
only recording in the following cases.
– when the programme positions are preset
differently between the recorder and the
Playback
connected TV.
– when watching the programme from the
external equipment connected to your TV.
• The picture tuned by the recorder pauses when
“TV Pause” is set to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 150).
• You may not be able to use the “TV Pause”
function depending on some TVs. For details,
refer to the operating instructions supplied with
your TV.
• The “TV Pause” function will not work correctly
when watching TV via the connected component
such as a VCR or digital tuner. The “TV Pause”
function works only with the channel selected on
the TV.
• You cannot use the “TV Pause” function as a
recording feature from the component (VCR,
etc.) connected to the LINE 1/DECODER jack.
• The “TV Pause” function will not work if the
connected TV does not comply with
SMARTLINK. To check whether your TV
complies with SMARTLINK, refer to the
operating instructions supplied with your TV.
87
Searching for a Time/
Title/Chapter/Track, etc.
+RW +R
HDD -RWVR -RWVideo
-RVR -RVideo DVD VCD DATA DVD *
DATA CD *
* DivX video file only
You can search a disc by title, chapter, scene
or track. As titles and tracks are assigned
individual numbers, select the title or track by
entering its number. You can also search for
a scene using the time code.
Number
buttons
Playback
</M/m/,,
ENTER
PLAY
MODE
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2 Select “Search Mode,” and press
ENTER.
3 Select a search method, and press
ENTER.
“Time Search” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA
DVDs*1/DATA CDs*1/VIDEO CDs*2):
Searches for a starting point by entering
the time code.
“Title Search” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA
DVDs*1/DATA CDs*1)
“Chapter Search” (for HDD/DVDs)
“Track Search” (for VIDEO CDs*3)
*1
DivX video file only
*2
Except Super VIDEO CDs
*3
Available only when playing without PBC
functions
,continued 89
 The display for entering the number
appears.
Example: Chapter Search Erasing and Editing

Before Editing
This recorder offers various edit options for
various disc types.

b Notes
• You may lose the edited contents if you remove
the disc or a timer recording starts while editing.
4 Press the number buttons to select the • DVD discs created by DVD camcorders cannot
number of the title, chapter, time be edited on this recorder.
• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s
code, etc., you want.
control information is full, erase or edit
For example: Time Search unnecessary titles.
To find a scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes, • The remaining disc space displayed on the screen
and 20 seconds, enter “21020.” may differ from the actual remaining disc space.
If you make a mistake, select another • When editing a DVD+R or DVD-R, finish all
number. editing before finalising the disc. You cannot edit
a finalised disc.
5 Press ENTER.
The recorder starts playback from the HDD +RW -RWVR
selected number. -RVR

Erasing and Editing

-RWVideo
Edit features
+R Original Playlist
-RVideo title title
Title edit Erase (page 92) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Title Name (page 92) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Set Thumbnail (page 92) Yes Yes Yes Yes
A-B Erase (page 93) Yes No Yes Yes
Divide (page 94) Yes No No Yes
Set Genre (page 92) Yes No No No
Protect (page 92) Yes Yes Yes No
Move (page 97) No No No Yes
Combine (page 97) No No No Yes
Genre Name (page 92) Yes No No No
Editing multiple titles (Multi-Mode) Yes No No No
(page 93)
Creating a Playlist (page 96) No No No Yes
Undo (page 92) No Yes Yes Yes
Chapter Divide (page 95) Yes No Yes Yes
edit
Erase (page 96) Yes No Yes Yes
Move (page 97) No No No Yes
Combine (page 96) Yes No Yes Yes

90 ,continued 91

To open up disc space • “A-B Erase”: Erases a section of the 4 Select a title, and press ENTER.
To open up disc space on a DVD+RW or
DVD-RW (Video mode), erase the title with
Erasing and Editing a title (page 93).
• “Divide”: Divides a title into two titles
A check mark appears in the check box.
To clear the check mark, press ENTER
the largest number in the title list. Title (page 94). again.
• “Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters in a title
Largest title number
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R (page 95). 5 Repeat step 4 to select all of the titles
• “Set Genre”: Assigns a genre to a title. you want to edit.
-RVR -RVideo

This section explains the basic edit functions.

• “Protect”: Protects the title. “ ”
appears next to the protected title.
6 When you finish selecting titles, press
,.
Note that editing is irreversible. To edit • “Move”: Changes the title’s playing
The sub-menu appears.
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) without order (page 97).
changing the original recordings, create a • “Combine”: Combines two titles into 7 Select an option, and press ENTER.
Playlist title (page 96). one (page 97). “Erase”: Erases the selected titles.
“Genre Name”: Allows you to enter a “Protect”: Protects the titles. “ ”
genre name (up to 12 characters) appears next to the protected title.
To open up disc space on the HDD or a DVD-
(page 42). “Unprotected”: Unprotects the titles.
RW (VR mode), you can erase any title.
“Multi-Mode”: Allows you to select and “Change Genre”: Changes the genre of
See “Erasing and Editing a Title” on page 92.
edit multiple titles at one time (page 93). the titles.
For DVD-Rs and DVD+Rs, the available disc
“Create”: Creates a Playlist (page 96).
space does not increase even if you erase
“Undo”: Undoes the last edit you made.
titles. z Hint
You can exit “Multi-Mode” by pressing , and
To switch between the Playlist and TITLE LIST z Hint selecting “Single-Mode” while selecting titles.
Original Title List (DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR You can label or re-label DVDs (page 43).
</M/m/,,
Erasing and Editing

mode only) ENTER

You can display the Playlist titles in the Title
List (Playlist), or the Original titles in the
Title List (Original).
1 Press < while the Title List is
displayed.
2 Select “Original” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
3 Select “Original” or “Play List” using M/
m, and press ENTER.
About editing accuracy
When editing the titles recorded on the HDD,
you can select the type of editing.
“Video Mode Compatible Editing”:
Recommended if you are going to dub the
titles to DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode)
or DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs afterward by High-
speed dubbing. The editing points and
chapter marks may be slightly different from
those you selected.
“Frame Accurate Editing”:
Recommended when you want to edit titles
precisely. However, the editing points may
be slightly different from the point you
selected when you dub the titles by High-
speed dubbing.
EXIT/
O RETURN Erasing a section of a title
. Editing multiple titles (Multi- (A-B Erase)
m M Mode)
HDD -RWVR -RVR
X
HDD You can select a section (scene) in a title and
You can select and edit up to 24 titles at one erase it. Note that erasing scenes in a title
time. cannot be undone.
1 Press TITLE LIST.
1 Press TITLE LIST. 1 After step 2 of “Erasing and Editing a
Title,” select “Edit,” and press
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode, 2 Press ,.
ENTER.
switch the Title List (Original or The sub-menu appears.
Playlist), if necessary.
3 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press
2 Select “A-B Erase,” and press ENTER.
2 Select a title, and press ,. ENTER.
For the HDD, select a type of editing, and
press ENTER. For details, see page 92.
The sub-menu appears. The display for selecting titles to be The display for setting point A appears.
3 Select an option, and press ENTER. edited appears. The title starts to play.
You can make the following edits to the
title.
“Erase”: Erases the selected title. Select
“Yes” when asked for confirmation.
“Edit”: Allows you to make the
following edits.
• “Title Name”: Allows you to enter or
re-enter a title name (page 42).
• “Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s
thumbnail picture that appears in the
Title List (page 39).

92 ,continued 93

1-22
 3 Select point A using m/M, and
press X.
• To return to the beginning of the title,
press X and then press ..
4 Select “From,” and press ENTER.
The position of point A is displayed, and
the title re-starts playing.
5 Select point B using m/M, and
press X.
6 Select “To,” and press ENTER.
The position of point B is displayed.
7 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The scene is erased.
To cancel “A-B Erase”
Press O RETURN. The Title List appears.
z Hint
A chapter mark is inserted after the scene is erased.
The chapter mark divides the title into separate
chapters on either side of the mark.
b Notes
• Images or sound may be momentarily interrupted
at the point where you erase a section of a title.
• Sections shorter than five seconds may not be
erased.
94
Erasing a chapter (Erase)
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a
Chapter,” select “Erase/Move.”
2 Select a chapter using </,, and
press ENTER.
3 Select “Erase,” and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
4 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The chapter is erased.
Combining multiple chapters
(Combine)
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a
Chapter,” select “Combine.”
2 Move the combining bar using </
,, and press ENTER.
The two adjacent chapters of the
combining bar are combined.
96
Dividing a title (Divide)
HDD -RWVR * -RVR *
If you want to dub a long title to a disc but do
not want to reduce the picture quality, divide
the title into two shorter titles. Note that
dividing a title cannot be undone.
* Only playlist titles can be divided for DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs in VR mode.
1 After step 2 of “Erasing and Editing a
Title,” select “Edit,” and press
ENTER.
2 Select “Divide,” and press ENTER.
For the HDD, select a type of editing, and
press ENTER. For details, see page 92.
The display for setting the dividing point
appears.
The title starts to play.
3 Select the dividing point using m/
M, and press X.
• To return to the beginning of the title,
press X and then press ..
4 Press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
5 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The title is divided into two.
Creating and Editing a
Playlist
-RWVR -RVR
Playlist edit allows you to edit or re-edit
without changing the actual recordings. You
can create up to 99 Playlist titles.
b Note
Playlist titles containing titles recorded with the
“Copy-Once” copy protection signal cannot be
dubbed or moved (page 99).
TITLE LIST
</M/m/,,
ENTER
1 Press TITLE LIST.
Switch to the Playlist (page 92).
2 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select “Create,” and press ENTER.
The original titles in the Title List appear.
4 Select an original title to add to the
Playlist, and press ENTER.
The selected title is added to the Playlist.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select all of
the titles you want to add to the
Playlist.
1-23
Erasing and Editing a
Chapter
HDD -RWVR -RVR
You can edit individual chapters within a
title. To edit DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)
without changing the original recordings,
create a Playlist (page 96).
TITLE LIST
</M/m/,,
ENTER
.
m M
X
1 Press TITLE LIST.
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode,
switch the Title List (Original or
Playlist), if necessary.
2 Select a title containing the chapter
you want to edit, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
4 Select “Chapter Edit,” and press
ENTER.
For the HDD, select a type of editing, and
press ENTER. For details, see page 92.
Moving a Playlist title (Move)
1 Press TITLE LIST.
Switch to the Playlist (page 92).
2 Select a Playlist title, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
4 Select “Move,” and press ENTER.
5 Select a new location for the title
using M/m, and press ENTER.
The title moves to the new location.
• To move more titles, repeat from step 2.
Combining multiple Playlist
titles (Combine)
1 Press TITLE LIST.
Switch to the Playlist (page 92).
2 Select a Playlist title, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
4 8
Select “Combine,” and press ENTER.
5 Select a title you want to combine.
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The titles are combined.
5 Select an option, and press ENTER.
You can make the following edits to the
chapter.
“Divide”: Divides a chapter into two
(page 95).
“Erase/Move”
• “Erase”: Erases the selected chapter
(page 96).
• “Move” (for Playlist titles on DVD-
RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode): Changes
the chapter’s playing order (page 97).
“Combine”: Combines two chapters into
one (page 96).
Dividing a chapter (Divide)
1 After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a
Chapter,” select “Divide.”
Erasing and Editing
2 Select a chapter using </,, and
press ENTER.
The chapter starts to play.
3 Select the dividing point using m/
M, and press X.
• To return to the beginning of the
chapter, press X and then press ..
4 Press ENTER.
The chapter is divided into two.
,continued 95
Dividing a Playlist title (Divide)
You can divide a Playlist title. For
instructions, see page 94.
Moving a chapter (Move)
1 Press TITLE LIST.
Switch to the Playlist (page 92).
2 Select a Playlist title containing the
chapter you want to edit, and press
,.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
4 Select “Chapter Edit,” and press
ENTER.
5 Select “Erase/Move.”
Erasing and Editing
6 Select a chapter using </,, and
press ENTER.
7 Select “Move,” and press ENTER.
Select a new location for the chapter
using </,, and press ENTER.
The chapter moves to the new location.
97
 • The chapter marks in the dubbing source Dubbing restriction

Dubbing (HDD y DVD)

are dubbed. The position of chapter marks
may be slightly changed from the original.
You cannot dub movies and other DVD
VIDEOs to the HDD. Also, when dubbing
HDD/DVD Dubbing
However, the chapter marks in the dubbing from a DVD to the HDD, scenes that contain +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
HDD
Before Dubbing source are not retained in the dubbed title
when dubbing to a DVD-RW/DVD-R
a copy protection signal cannot be recorded.
Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy
-RVR -RVideo

HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
-RVR -RVideo
In this section, “dubbing” refers to “copying
a recorded title on the internal hard disk drive
(HDD) to another disc, or vice versa.” You
can dub a playing title using the HDD/DVD
DUB button (see “HDD/DVD Dubbing” on
page 99) or you can select to dub multiple
titles all at once (see “Dubbing Using
Dubbing List” on page 100). You can also
dub an entire DVD disc to make a backup
copy (see “Making a Backup Disc (DVD
Backup)” on page 103).
Before you start, read the following
precautions, which are common to all
dubbing methods.
If you want to record from a digital video
camera connected to the DV IN jack, see
(Video mode), DVD+RW, or DVD+R at protection signals can be moved only from You can dub a single title by pressing the
normal speed. The chapter marks are the HDD to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR HDD/DVD DUB button during playback.
automatically inserted according to the mode)* (after the title is moved, the original
“Auto Chapter (Video)” and “Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW)” settings in the
title in the HDD is erased). The “Move”
function is performed using Dubbing List.
1 Start playback of a title.
For playing a title, see “Playing the
“Recording” setup (page 143). Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy Recorded Programme/DVD” on page 80.
• The “Set Thumbnail” setting in the dubbing protection signals are indicated with .
source is dubbed as a thumbnail picture
Copy Dubbing
2 Press HDD/DVD DUB.
marker (except when dubbing from a protection The recorder starts dubbing the current
DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/ signals playing title from the beginning.
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)). The The recorder turns off automatically
position of thumbnail picture markers may Copy-Free when you do not use the recorder for
be slightly changed from the original. (No copy
protection HDD
, -RW
,
+RW
Video
-RWVR
+R
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing
signal) has finished.
z Hint -RVR -RVideo
When you dub a Playlist title, it is recorded as an
Original title.
Copy-Once
HDD , -RW VR *
*
To cancel the dubbing
-RVR
b Notes Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more
• You cannot make a recording while dubbing. than one second.
* CPRM-compatible DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR
• Before playing a dubbed disc on other DVD mode) only.
When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway,
no part of the title will be moved to the

Dubbing (HDD y DVD)

“DV Camcorder Dubbing” on page 104.
To record from equipment connected to the
LINE IN jacks, see “Recording from
Connected Equipment” on page 79.
Before you start…
• You cannot record both the main and sub
sound on the HDD (when “HDD Recording
Format” is set to “Video Mode On” in the
“Recording” setup), DVD+RWs, DVD-
RWs (Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs
(Video mode). For bilingual programmes,
set “Bilingual Recording” to either “A/L”
(default) or “B/R” in the “Audio In” setup
(page 138). About HDD Recording format,
see page 144.
• A title name in the dubbing source is
dubbed. However, only up to 40 characters
of a title name are dubbed when dubbing
from the HDD to a DVD+RW/DVD-RW
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video
mode).
equipment, finalise the disc (page 45, 100).
• You cannot dub from DVD VIDEOs or finalised
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode) to the HDD.
• Titles containing mixed aspect ratios cannot be
dubbed to a DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RW/
DVD-R (Video mode) using the HDD/DVD
DUB button.
• Titles over 8 hours cannot be dubbed to single-
layer DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs.
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes) 16:9
size titles cannot be dubbed to a DVD+RW/
DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
• When dubbing to a DVD+R DL, DVD-R DL
(Video mode) in Real-Time Dubbing mode, the
dubbing contents are divided into titles.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable
Media) is a coding technology that protects
copyrights for images.
b Notes
• Protected titles in the HDD cannot be moved.
• The “Move” function is not available for HDD/
DVD DUB dubbing.
• Even if you erase a scene that contains a copy
protection signal, the recording restrictions on
that title are retained.
dubbing target. However, note that this will
decrease the free space for DVD+Rs/DVD-
Rs.
About dubbing mode
Titles on the HDD are dubbed to a disc at
high speed (High-speed dubbing).
Titles on a disc are dubbed to the HDD at
normal speed (Real-Time dubbing).
To convert the recording mode (only when
dubbing from a disc to the HDD)
After step 1, press REC MODE to select the
recording mode.
b Note
You cannot use the HDD/DVD DUB button in the
following cases. Dub the title using Dubbing List
(page 100).
– When dubbing the title recorded in MN6 mode or
longer duration mode to a DVD+RW/DVD+R.
– When dubbing the title recorded in HQ+ mode to
a DVD.

98 99

D Total size of the selected titles and 10 Select “Start Dubbing,” and press Required times for High-speed Dubbing from
Dubbing Using Dubbing available space on the disc to be ENTER. HDD to DVD (for 60-minute programme)*1
dubbed (approximate) When you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in step Speed*2 6x 2.4x 2x
List E Selected title’s thumbnail picture
9, select the title menu style, and press
ENTER. High-speed
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R 5 Select a title, and press ENTER. The recorder turns off automatically Rec.
DVD+RW/ DVD+R
DVD-RW/ (Double
DVD-R
(Dual
-RVR -RVideo The selected title changes colour. when you do not use the recorder for mode
DVD+R/ Layer) Layer)
When you select “HDD -> DVD” in step more than 20 minutes after the dubbing DVD-R
You can select the titles you want to dub 3, you can change the title order or search has finished.
using Dubbing List. You can also edit titles HQ Approx. Approx. Approx.
for a title by genre (see “3. Playing the
before dubbing without changing the original 10 min. 25 min. 30 min.
Recorded Programme (Title List)” on
titles. page 38). To cancel dubbing HSP Approx. Approx. Approx.
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more 6 min. 16 min. 20 min.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU. 6 Repeat step 5 to select all of the titles than one second. 40 sec. 40 sec.
The System Menu appears. in the order you want to dub. When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway, SP Approx. Approx. Approx.
2 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER. 7 Select “Next” using ,, and press no part of the title will be moved to the
dubbing target. However, note that this will
5 min. 12 min.
30 sec.
15 min.
ENTER.
3 Select a dubbing direction, and press
The “Title Edit” display appears.
decrease the free space for DVD+Rs/DVD-
LSP Approx. Approx. Approx.
ENTER. Rs. 4 min. 10 min. 12 min.
For details about editing, see “To edit
To dub titles from the HDD to a disc, titles on the Dubbing List” on page 102. About dubbing mode ESP Approx. Approx. Approx.
select “HDD -> DVD.”
To dub titles from a disc to the HDD, 8 Select “Next” using ,, and press “ ” appears next to the title that can be 3 min.
20 sec.
8 min.
20 sec.
10 min.

select “DVD/CD -> HDD.” ENTER. dubbed at high speed (High-speed dubbing)
in the “Title Edit” display. The following LP Approx. Approx. Approx.
4 Select “Create New Dubbing List,”
The “Start Dubbing” display appears.
titles are dubbed at normal speed (Real-Time 2 min. 6 min. 7 min.
and press ENTER. dubbing). 30 sec. 15 sec. 30 sec.
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)

The Dubbing List appears. – Titles containing both main and sub sounds EP Approx. Approx. Approx.
• If you have previously saved a Dubbing (except DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)). 1 min. 60 min.*3 5 min.
List and want to resume editing it, – Titles recorded in mixed picture size (4:3 40 sec.*3
select “Use Previous Dubbing List,” and 16:9, etc.) (except for DVD-RWs/ SLP Approx. Approx. Approx.
and go to step 7. DVD-Rs (VR mode)). 1 min. 60 min.*3 3 min.
– Titles recorded on DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs 15 sec.*3 45 sec.
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video
SEP Approx. Approx. Approx.
mode).
1 min.*3 60 min.*3 3 min.*3
9 Select an option using M/m, and press – 16:9 size titles recorded on DVD+RW/
DVD+R. *1
ENTER. The values in the above table are for reference
The options differ depending on the only. Actual times for dubbing also require time
The minimum required time is as follows for creating disc’s control information and other
dubbing direction or disc type.
(approximate). data.
“Recording Mode”: Changes the *2 This is the maximum recording speed of this
dubbing mode of all selected titles at a recorder. The recording speed cannot exceed the
time using M/m (page 71). value indicated in the above table even when
“Input Disc Name”: Changes the disc using discs that support higher recording speeds.
A Direction of dubbing name (page 42). In addition, depending on the disc condition, the
B Total number of titles to be dubbed “Finalise”: Select “Yes” to finalise a disc recorder may be unable to record at the
automatically after dubbing (DVD-RW/ maximum recording speed indicated in the table.
C Dubbing step number DVD-R (Video mode), or DVD+R).
*3 High-speed dubbing is not available when

Display 1: Select a title you want to dubbing titles recorded in SEP, SLP, or EP mode
dub (the “Select Titles” display). to DVD+RWs and DVD+Rs.
Display 2: Edit a title (the “Title
Edit” display).
Display 3: Confirm the settings and
start dubbing (the “Start Dubbing”
display).

100 ,continued 101

1-24
 To edit titles on the Dubbing List
1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Dubbing Using
Dubbing List” on page 100.
The “Title Edit” display appears.
2 Select a title you want to edit, and press
ENTER.
The sub-menu appears.
3 Select an option, and press ENTER.
The options differ depending on the
dubbing direction or disc type.
“Erase”: Erases the selected title.
“Title Name”: Names or renames a title
(page 42).
“A-B Erase”: Erases the section of the
title (page 93).
“Move”: Changes the order of titles
(page 97).
“Preview”: Allows you to check the
content of a title.
“Divide”: Divides a title into two titles
(page 94).
“Combine”: Combines two titles
(page 97).
“Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters (page 95).
“Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s
thumbnail frame that appears in the Title
List (page 39).
“Recording Mode”: Sets the picture
quality of the dubbing.
“Bilingual”: Sets how a bilingual audio
programme is dubbed.
“Cancel”: Exits the sub-menu.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to edit all of the
titles.
5 Go to step 8 of “Dubbing Using Dubbing
List” on page 100 to dub edited titles.
102
DV Camcorder Dubbing
Before DV Camcorder
Dubbing
This section explains dubbing with a DV
camcorder and playing the contents of a DV
camcorder via the DV IN jack on the front
panel. If you want to dub by way of the LINE
IN jacks, see “Recording from Connected
Equipment” on page 79.
The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to
the i.LINK standard.
Follow the instructions in “Preparing for DV
camcorder dubbing,” and then move on to the
section on dubbing. For more information
about i.LINK, see “About i.LINK” on
page 163.
How chapters are created
The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD
become a single title. This title is divided into
chapters. When dubbing to the HDD or a
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) and when
“Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On” in
the “Recording” setup (page 143), each
shooting session on the tape becomes a
chapter on the disc. For other discs, the
recorder divides the title into chapters
according to the “Auto Chapter (Video)” or
“Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)” setting in
the “Recording” setup (page 143).
Preparing for DV camcorder
dubbing
You can connect a digital video camera to the
DV IN jack on the recorder to record or edit
from a DV/Digital8 format tape. Operation is
straightforward because the recorder will fast
forward and rewind the tape for you – you do
not need to operate your digital video camera.
Do the following to start using the “Manual
Dubbing” functions of this recorder.
See the instruction manual supplied with the
digital video camera as well before
connecting.
104
b Notes
• The Dubbing List you created remains after
dubbing. To edit the existing Dubbing List, select
“Use Previous Dubbing List” in step 4. The
Dubbing List is cleared when:
– you change “Input Line System” setting in the
“Basic” setup (page 130).
– you reset the recorder (page 158).
– you open the disc tray (except when dubbing
from the HDD).
– you edit the titles on a disc (except when
dubbing from the HDD).
– you switch the Title List to Original or Playlist
(when dubbing from DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in
VR mode only).
– you finalise the disc.
• The “seams” that are left over from editing may
remain on the disc after dubbing to DVD+RWs/
DVD-RWs (Video mode)/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs
(Video mode).
• Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording
starts, even if you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in step
9.
z Hint
If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after
the initial dub, use the DV IN jack and record on a
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) or HDD.
b Notes
• You cannot make a recording while DV
camcorder dubbing.
• The DV IN jack is for input only. It will not
output signals.
• You cannot use the DV IN jack when:
– signal input to the DV IN jack on the front panel
or recorder operation cannot be performed
correctly when using a digital video camera
(see “About i.LINK” on page 163). Connect the
camera to the LINE IN jack and follow the
instructions of “Recording from Connected
Equipment” on page 79.
– the input signal is not in DVC-SD format. Do
not connect a MICRO MV format digital video
camera even if it has an i.LINK jack.
– the images on the tape contain copy protection
signals, which limit recording.
• If you want to play DVDs dubbed from a DV
camcorder on other DVD equipment, finalise the
disc (page 45).
• Set the recorder and DV camcorder to the same
colour system (page 130).
Hookups
DVD recorder
to DV IN
i.LINK cable
(not supplied)
DV output
DV camcorder
: Signal flow
1-25
Making a Backup Disc
(DVD Backup)
+RW -RWVideo +R -RVideo
You can dub all of the contents on a finalised
DVD+RW/DVD+R or finalised DVD-RW/
DVD-R (Video mode) to another recordable
DVD+RW/DVD-RW or unused DVD+R/
DVD-R via the HDD as a backup copy.
b Note
Backup discs of unfinalised discs cannot be made.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.
3 Select “DVD Backup,” and press
ENTER.
4 Select “Start new DVD Backup,” and
press ENTER.
• If you have previously dubbed backup
data to the HDD, select “Resume
writing data,” and go to step 7.
5 Insert the DVD you are going to make
a backup of.
6 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The recorder starts dubbing all of the
contents on a DVD to the HDD.
7 Press Z (open/close), and replace the
DVD with a recordable DVD+RW/DVD-
RW or an unused DVD+R/DVD-R.
To make a backup disc of DVD+RWs/
DVD+Rs, insert a recordable DVD+RW
or unused DVD+R.
To make a backup disc of DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs, insert a recordable DVD-RW
or unused DVD-R.
8 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The recorder starts High-speed dubbing
the contents that were dubbed to the
HDD in step 6.
9 Select “Cancel,” and press ENTER.
The disc is automatically finalised.
• To make another backup disc, replace
discs, select “Start,” and press ENTER.
1 Press HDD or DVD to select the
recording destination.
If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1.
Inserting a Disc” on page 36).
2 Insert the source DV/Digital8 format
tape into your digital video camera.
For the recorder to record or edit, your
digital video camera must be set to video
playback mode.
3 Press REC MODE on the remote
repeatedly to select the recording
mode.
The recording mode changes as follows:
For details about the recording mode, see
page 71. Note that you cannot select
manual recording mode.
4 Set the “External Audio” setting in the
“Audio In” setup (page 138).
5 Set the “DV Input” setting in the
“Audio In” setup (page 138).
You are ready to start dubbing. Select
one of the dubbing methods on the
following pages.
To playback DV/Digital8 format tape
You can check the contents of DV/Digital8
format tape before dubbing. For details, see
“Playing from a DV Camcorder” on
page 107.
z Hint
The recorder completes dubbing even after being
turned off.
10 Select “Yes” or “No,” and press
ENTER.
To erase the backup data on the HDD,
select “Yes.”
To make another backup disc later, select
“No.”
The recorder turns off automatically
when you do not use the recorder for
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing
has finished.
To display the dubbing information
Press DISPLAY while dubbing.
To cancel DVD backup during dubbing
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more
than one second.
To erase backup data on the HDD
1 Select “Erase back-up data” in step 4, and
press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
2 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
b Notes
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)
• When dubbing to a DVD+R/DVD-R is stopped
partway in step 8, you cannot play or record on
the disc.
• You cannot make a backup disc of DVD+R DLs/
DVD-R DLs.
• You may not use the “DVD Backup” function
depending on the recording quality or physical
condition of the disc, or characteristics of the
recording device and authoring software.
103
b Notes
• You cannot connect more than one piece of
digital video equipment to the recorder.
• You cannot control the recorder using another
device or another recorder of the same model.
• You cannot record date, time, or the contents of
the cassette memory onto the disc.
• If you record from a DV/Digital8 format tape that
is recorded in multiple sound tracks, such as a
tape with multiple sampling frequencies (48 kHz,
44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz), no sound or an unnatural
sound will be output when playing back the
sampling frequency switch point on the disc.
• In order to use this recorder’s “Auto Chapter”
setting (page 104), be sure to correctly set the
clock on your digital video camera before
shooting.
• The recorded picture may be momentarily
affected or the start and end points of a title may
be different from what you have set if the source
DV/Digital8 format tape is in any of the following
conditions. In this case, see “Recording from
Connected Equipment” (page 79).
– There is a blank space in the recorded portion of
the tape.
– The tape’s time code is not sequential.
– If the picture size or the recording mode on the
tape being dubbed changes.
• A blank or black coloured screen will be dubbed
when the recorder is set to a different colour
system from the DV tape contents’ system. Set
“Input Line System” in the “Basic” setup to the
same colour system as the DV tape contents’
DV Camcorder Dubbing
system (page 130).
105
 z Hint
Dubbing an Entire DV Dubbing Selected You can turn off the dubbing menu by pressing the
DISPLAY button during dubbing. Press the Playing from a DV
Format Tape (DV One Scenes (Manual DISPLAY button again to display the dubbing
menu.
Camcorder
Touch Dubbing) Dubbing) b Note 1 Connect your DV camcorder to the DV
You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one IN jack on the front panel.
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R second.
-RVR -RVideo -RVR -RVideo 2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
You can record the entire contents of a DV/ You can select and dub scenes while playing
Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single a DV/Digital8 format tape. 3 Select “DV,” and press ENTER.
press of the ONE-TOUCH DUB button on
the recorder. The recorder controls the digital 1 Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for 4 Select “Playback,” and press ENTER.
video camera for the whole process, and DV camcorder dubbing” on page 104. 5 Start playback on the DV camcorder.
completes the recording.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
Images from the DV camcorder appear
on your TV screen.
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for DV The System Menu appears.
camcorder dubbing” on page 104, and
press ONE-TOUCH DUB on the recorder. 3 Select “DV,” and press ENTER.
To cancel playback
The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts 4 Select “Manual Dubbing,” and press Press SYSTEM MENU.
recording the tape contents. ENTER.
After the recording is finished, the recorder z Hint
rewinds the tape in the digital video camera, 5 Select the recording destination, You can dub the playing tape contents. During
and finalises the recorded disc (except DVD- “Record to Hard Disk Drive” or playback, press HDD or DVD to select the dubbing
RW/DVD-R (VR mode)) automatically. “Record to DVD,” and press ENTER. destination, and press z REC. To stop dubbing,
press x REC STOP.
6 Press H.
To stop during recording The scene starts to play.
Press x REC STOP more than 3 seconds. 7 Find the point on the DV/Digital8

DV Camcorder Dubbing
Note that it may take a few seconds for the format tape that you want to start
recorder to stop recording. dubbing from using m/M or c/
z Hint C, and press X.
You can also start DV One Touch Dubbing by
selecting “One-Touch Dubbing” of “DV” in the
8 Select “Start Rec.,” and press ENTER.
System Menu. The recorder starts dubbing.

b Notes
9 Select “Pause Rec,” and press
• When a blank space between the recordings on
ENTER.
the tape continues for more than two minutes, DV The recorder pauses dubbing.
One Touch Dubbing ends automatically.
• The recorder will pause recording when there is a
10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to dub more
blank space or an image containing copy scenes.
protection signals on the tape. The recorder will
resume recording automatically when receiving a
11 Select “Stop Rec,” and press ENTER.
recordable signal. The selected scenes are dubbed as a
• Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording starts single title.
(except for DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode)).
• DV One Touch Dubbing ends automatically
when there are images containing copy protection To cancel during “Manual Dubbing”
signals at the beginning of the tape. Press SYSTEM MENU.

106 107

To lock the recorder (Child Lock) Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a b Note
You can lock all of the buttons on the CD “A-B Repeat” is not available for MP3 audio tracks.
Audio Tracks recorder so that the settings are not cancelled • When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive
by mistake. noise will be heard from the LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/
Playing repeatedly (Repeat)
Playing Audio Tracks When the recorder is turned off, hold down x
on the recorder until “LOCKED” appears in
DECODER/LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks.
To avoid possible damage to the audio system,
from CD/DVD the front panel display. The recorder does not the user should take proper precautions when the
LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/DECODER/LINE 2 OUT
CD DATA DVD DATA CD
work except for timer recordings while the You can play repeatedly all the tracks or a
(R-AUDIO-L) jacks of the recorder are connected
CD DATA DVD DATA CD Child Lock is set. single track on an album or disc.
to an amplification system. To enjoy DTS Digital
Surround™ playback, an external DTS decoder
You can play audio tracks on CDs, DATA
DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/
To unlock the recorder, hold down x on the must be connected to the DIGITAL OUT jack of 1 Press PLAY MODE during playback.
recorder until “UNLOCKED” appears in the the recorder. The “Play Mode” menu appears.
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-RAMs), or front panel display. • Set the sound to “Stereo” using the AUDIO
DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs). button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD 2 Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.
(page 108).
Playback options
3 Select an item to be repeated using M/
m.
CD DATA DVD DATA CD Playing a specific portion “Repeat Disc”: repeats all of the tracks
on a disc.
repeatedly (A-B Repeat) “Repeat Album” (except for CD): repeats
AUDIO Buttons Operations the current album.
CLEAR CD
AUDIO Selects stereo or monaural “Repeat Track”: repeats the current
audio tracks recorded on the 1 Press PLAY MODE during playback. track.
TITLE LIST disc when pressed repeatedly The “Play Mode” menu appears. “Repeat Programme”: repeats the current
in normal playback mode. programme (page 110).
</M/m/,, 2 Select “A-B Repeat,” and press
ENTER ./>
(previous/
Goes to the next or previous
track when pressed during ENTER. 4 Press ENTER.
next) playback. “Set point A” is selected. Repeat play starts.
. >
For MP3 discs, goes to the next
m M
H or previous album when
x pressed repeatedly. To cancel Repeat play
X
Press CLEAR. Or, set “Repeat” to “Repeat
m/M Fast reverses/fast forwards the
(fast disc when pressed during Off” in the “Play Mode” menu.
Audio Tracks

PLAY
MODE reverse/fast playback.
forward) Search speed changes as z Hint
follows: You can select “Repeat” from “Play Mode” in the
1 Insert a disc. fast reverse fast forward
System Menu.
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 36. mFR1 T t MFF1 3
mFR2 T T t t MFF2
While monitoring the sound, press b Note
2 Press H. When you press and hold the
ENTER at the starting point (point A) of You can select “Repeat Programme” only during
Playback starts. the portion to be played repeatedly. Programme play.
button, fast forward/fast
reverse continues at the “Set point B” is selected.
selected speed until you release
To stop playback the button. 4 Continue playing to locate the ending
Press x (stop). To resume normal playback, point (point B), and press ENTER.
press H. A-B Repeat starts.
z Hint
You can play audio tracks using the Title List. Press X (pause) Pauses playback.
TITLE LIST. Then select a track, and press To resume normal playback,
press H. To cancel A-B Repeat
ENTER.
Press CLEAR. Or, set “A-B Repeat” to “Off”
b Note in the “Play Mode” menu.
When any video titles are recorded on a DATA
DVD, the MP3 audio tracks on that DATA DVD z Hint
cannot be played. You can select “A-B Repeat” from “Play Mode” in
the System Menu.

108 ,continued 109

1-26
 To cancel Programme play 4 Press the number buttons to select the
Creating your own programme Press CLEAR during playback. Or, set Searching for an Audio number of the album or track you
(Programme) “Programme” to “Cancel Programme Play” want.
in the “Play Mode” menu. Track If you make a mistake, select another
CD DATA DVD DATA CD number.
To erase the programme CD DATA DVD DATA CD
You can play the contents of an album or disc Press CLEAR in stop mode. Or, set 5 Press ENTER.
in the order you want by arranging the order “Programme” to “Erase Programme List” in You can search a disc by album or track. As The recorder starts playback from the
of the albums/tracks on a disc to create your the “Play Mode” menu. albums and tracks are assigned individual selected number.
own programme. You can make a numbers, select the album or track by
programme of up to 24 steps. z Hints entering its number.
• The programme you made remains after z Hint
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback. Programme play finishes. To play the same You can select an album or track using M/m in step
4.
The “Play Mode” menu appears. programme again, set “Programme” to “Start
Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu.
2 Select “Programme,” and press However, the programme is cleared after you Number
buttons
ENTER. remove the disc or press [/1.
• You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to
3 Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and “Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu
press ENTER. (page 109).
The “Input/Edit Programme” display • You can select “Programme” from “Play Mode”
in the System Menu.
differs depending upon the disc type.
Example: DATA DVD </M/m/,,
ENTER

PLAY
MODE

4 Select an album (example:

1

Audio Tracks
Press PLAY MODE during playback.
01.BRAHMS) using M/m, and press
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
,.
5 Select a track (example:
2 Select “Search Mode,” and press
ENTER.
001.SYMPHONY01) using M/m, and
press ENTER. 3 Select a search method, and press
The track is programmed. ENTER.
If you make a mistake, select the step “Album Search” (except for CD)
number (example: 01-001) using </M/ “Track Search”
m, and press CLEAR.
The display for entering the number
6 To programme other tracks, press </ appears.
M/m/, to select a step number, and Example: Album Search
repeat steps 4 and 5.
7 Press H.
Programme play starts.

110 111

7 Select “Copy Album,” and press

About Jukebox
There are two methods to use Jukebox:
connecting the USB device or copying audio
tracks to the HDD.
When using Jukebox, you can do followings:
• Store audio tracks on the HDD.
Preparing for Using
Jukebox
Connect a USB device to the USB jack on the
recorder, or copy audio tracks from CDs/
DATA CDs/DATA DVDs or the connected
Copying audio tracks ENTER.
(DISC t HDD) The display asks for confirmation.
8 Select “Yes” using </,, and press
1 Insert a disc that you are going to copy ENTER.
to the HDD. The selected album is copied to the HDD.
2 Press H to start playback. • To copy more albums, go to step 5.

• Play audio tracks using various play modes. USB device to the HDD. 3 Press HDD/DVD DUB.
• Label tracks or albums. For CDs, all the tracks on the disc are To cancel copying
• Assign albums a genre. copied to the HDD. Press ENTER.
• Change the track order. For DATA CDs/ DATA DVDs, the
Notes on copying current album is copied to the HDD.
• You cannot copy audio tracks on the HDD to
discs or USB devices.
• Some audio tracks may not be copied depending To cancel copying
on the file size. Press ENTER.
SYSTEM
• You cannot copy audio tracks if the HDD is full MENU
or almost full. z Hint
• An album name and MP3 audio track name are </M/m/,, You can copy all the contents on the disc by
also copied. However, there may be some names ENTER selecting “DVD/CD -> HDD” in “Dubbing” in the
that cannot be copied. System Menu.
• When copying is stopped partway, tracks finished
copying before you stop will remain copied onto
the HDD as an album. See the Album List to H
check which albums have been copied
Copying an album
(page 114). HDD/DVD (USB t HDD)
• When copying audio tracks from a CD, the album DUB
name is labelled as “F_***” and the audio track You can copy up to 99 albums or 999 tracks
names are labelled as “T_***” automatically. on the USB device to the HDD.
• During copying, other operations cannot be
performed.
• While copying, timer recordings are unavailable.
1 Connect the USB device to the USB
Connecting the USB device jack on the recorder (page 112).
Audio Tracks

If the timer is set during copying, the recorder

starts the timer recording after copying is
finished. You can connect a USB device to the USB 2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
• Copy-protected CDs cannot be copied to the jack on the recorder to listen to the MP3 The System Menu appears.
HDD. audio tracks or copy to the HDD. Refer to the
operating instructions supplied with the USB
3 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press
device before connecting. ENTER.
DVD recorder 4 Select “Listen to Music from USB
Device,” and press ENTER.
The Album List appears.
to USB jack 5 Select an album, and press ,.
6 Select “Edit” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
USB device
The sub-menu appears.

112 113

1-27

Playing Audio Tracks
Using Jukebox/USB
Device
SUBTITLE CLEAR
ANGLE
SYSTEM
MENU
</M/m/,,
ENTER
. >
m
H
M
x next)
X ENTER.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press
ENTER.
3 Select “Listen to Music / Edit” or
“Listen to Music from USB Device,”
and press ENTER.
To listen to the audio tracks on the HDD,
select “Listen to Music / Edit.”
To listen to the MP3 audio tracks from
the connected USB device, select “Listen
to Music from USB Device.”
The Album List appears.
114
Creating your own programme
(Programme)
You can play the contents of the HDD or
connected USB device in the order you want
by arranging the order of the tracks on the
HDD or connected USB device to create your
own programme. You can make a
programme of up to 24 steps.
1 Press , while the Album List is
displayed.
2 Select “Play Mode,” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
3 Select “Programme,” and press
ENTER.
4 Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and
press ENTER.
5 Select an album (example: Album
001) using M/m, and press ,.
6 Select a track (example: Track 001)
using M/m, and press ENTER.
The track is programmed.
If you make a mistake, select the step
number (example: 01.) using </M/m,
and press CLEAR.
7 To programme other tracks, press </
M/m/, to select a step number, and
repeat steps 5 and 6.
8 Press H.
Programme play starts.
116
4 Select an album or track, and press To skip a track (Set Skip)
ENTER. If you want a track not to play, set the track to Playing repeatedly (Repeat)
Playback starts from the selected album be skipped.
or track. 1 Select a track you want to skip.
You can play repeatedly all the tracks or a
single track in the album.
2 Press , while the Album List is
To stop playback displayed. 1 Press , during playback.
Press x (stop). 3 Select “Edit” using M/m, and press 2 Select “Play Mode,” using M/m, and
ENTER. press ENTER.
To scroll the list display by page (Page
4 Select “Set Skip” using M/m, and press The “Play Mode” menu appears.
mode)
Press SUBTITLE (previous)/ANGLE (next)
ENTER.
“ ” appears next to the selected track.
3 Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.
while the Album List is displayed. Each time
you press SUBTITLE (previous)/ANGLE
To cancel, select “Set Skip,” and press 4 Select an item to be repeated using M/
(next), the entire Album List changes to the
ENTER again. m.
next/previous page of the album. “Repeat Album”: repeats the current
album.
To change the album order (Sort Titles)
Playback options “Repeat Track”: repeats the current
track.
(HDD only)
“Repeat Programme”: repeats the current
1 Press < while the Album List is Buttons Operations
programme (page 116).
displayed. ./>
2 Select “Sort Titles” using M/m, and press (previous/
Goes to the next or previous
track when pressed during 5 Press ENTER.
playback. Repeat play starts.
m/M Fast reverses/fast forwards the
3 Select the item using M/m, and press (fast disc when pressed during
ENTER. reverse/fast playback.
To cancel Repeat play
forward) Search speed changes as Set “Repeat” to “Repeat Off” in the “Play
Order Sorted
follows: Mode” menu.
By number In order of album fast reverse fast forward
number. mT tM b Notes
mTT ttM • You can select “Repeat Programme” only during
By favourite In order of playback
times. The album that is When you press and hold the Programme play.
Audio Tracks
button, fast forward/fast • “A-B Repeat” is not available when using “Music
most often played is listed
Jukebox.”
at the top. reverse continues at the
selected speed until you release
By album In alphabetical order. the button.
To resume normal playback,
To search for the album by genre (Genre) press H.
(HDD only) X (pause) Pauses playback.
To resume normal playback,
1 Press < while the Album List is
press H.
displayed.
2 Select “Genre” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
3 Select the genre using M/m, and press
ENTER.
The albums in the selected genre appear.
To display all albums, select “All
Genres.”
,continued 115
To cancel Programme play 5 Select an option, and press ENTER.
Set “Programme” to “Cancel Programme Managing Audio Tracks “Erase”: Erases the selected album/track.
Play” in the “Play Mode” menu during Select “Yes” when asked for
playback. on the Music Jukebox confirmation.
“Edit”: Allows you to make the
To erase the programme You can erase or label albums/tracks on the following edits.
Set “Programme” to “Erase Programme List” HDD. You can also assign an album a genre. • “Album Name”: Allows you to enter or
in the “Play Mode” menu. re-enter an album name (page 42).
• “Track Name”: Allows you to enter or
z Hints re-enter a track name (page 42).
• You can select and play a track that is set to “Set • “Set Genre”: Assigns an album a genre.
Skip.”
• The programme you made remains after
• “Set Skip”: Sets a track to be skipped
(page 115).
Programme play finishes. To play the same
“Play Mode”: Selects play modes
programme again, set “Programme” to “Start
Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu. (page 115).
However, the programme is cleared after you SYSTEM “Genre Name”: Allows you to enter a
MENU
press [/1. genre name (up to 12 characters)
• You can repeat Programme play. Set “Repeat” to
“Repeat Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu </M/m/,,
ENTER
(page 42).
(page 115).
b Note
You cannot edit audio tracks on the connected USB
device.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Music Jukebox,” and press
ENTER.
3 Select “Listen to Music / Edit,” and
press ENTER.
Audio Tracks
The Album List appears.
4 Select an album or track, and press
,.
117
1-28

JPEG Image Files
About the “Photo
Album” Function
The “Photo Album” function enables you to
do following.
• Store JPEG image files on the HDD.
• View JPEG image files on the HDD, DATA
DVDs (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs)/DATA CDs,
or connected USB device.
• Edit JPEG image files.
• Print JPEG image files.
• Copy JPEG image files and slideshow to
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs.
Preparing for Using the
“Photo Album” Function
Connect a USB device to the USB jack on the
recorder, or copy JPEG image files from
DATA CDs/DATA DVDs or the connected
USB device to the HDD.
SYSTEM
MENU
</M/m/,,
ENTER
118
5 Press ENTER, and select a JPEG
image file using M/m.
6 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
7 Select an item, and press ENTER.
To copy two or more albums or files,
select “Multi-Mode.”
To copy the selected album, select “Copy
Album Contents” in “Album Options,”
and go to step 12.
To copy the selected files, select “Copy”
in “File Options,” and go to step 12.
8 Select an album or JPEG image file,
and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, select
“Single-Mode.”
9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the
albums or JPEG image files you want
to copy.
10 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
11 Select “Copy,” and press ENTER.
12 Select the destination album using M/
m, and press ENTER.
• To cancel, select “No.”
b Note
Albums or JPEG image files are not copied to the
HDD in the following cases.
– when the HDD disc space is insufficient for
copying.
– when there are already the maximum number of
files and/or albums on the HDD.
120
Connecting the USB device
You can connect a USB device (digital still
camera, Memory card reader, and USB
memory) to the USB jack on the recorder to
view JPEG image files or copy to the HDD.
Refer to the operating instructions supplied
with the USB device before connecting.
DVD recorder
to USB jack
USB cable (not supplied)
USB output
Digital still camera
: Signal flow
Copying JPEG image files to the
HDD (DISC/USB t HDD)
1 Insert a disc that you are going to copy
to the HDD or connect the USB device
to the USB jack on the recorder.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
Copying JPEG image albums to
a disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R)
You can copy the edited JPEG image albums
to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a
video file. You can play the slideshow on
other DVD equipment that may not be
compatible with the playback of JPEG image
files.
1 Insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R (in Video
mode).
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
4 Select “View/Edit Photos on the
HDD,” and press ENTER.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
5 Select an album using M/m, and press
,.
The sub-menu appears.
6 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press
ENTER.
To copy the album selected in step 5
only, go to step 10.
7 Select an album, and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, select
“Single-Mode.”
8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the
albums you want to copy.
9 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
10 Select “Copy to DVD,” and press
ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
1-29
4 Select the item, and press ENTER.
To copy from DATA CDs/DATA DVDs
(DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs), select “View
Photos on a CD/DVD.”
To copy from the connected USB device,
select “View Photos on a USB Device.”
The “Photo Album” list appears.
Example: CD/DVD
5 Select an album or JPEG image file
using M/m, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
6 Select an item, and press ENTER.
To copy two or more albums or JPEG
image files, select “Multi-Mode.”
To copy all the albums and JPEG image
files, select “Copy all to HDD,” and go to
step 11.
To copy the album or file selected in step
5 only, select “Copy to HDD,” and go to
step 11.
7 Select an album or JPEG image file,
and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, press , to
select “Single-Mode” from the sub-
menu.
8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the
albums or JPEG image files you want
to copy.
9 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
10 Select “Copy to HDD,” and press
ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
11 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
• To cancel, select “No.”
11 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The selected JPEG image albums are
copied in the “PICTURE” folder on the
disc.
The JPEG image album names are
automatically labelled as “***ALBUM.”
If you want to play the disc on other
DVD equipment, finalise the disc
(page 45).
• To cancel, select “No.”
z Hints
• See “8. Reformatting a Disc” (page 47) to format
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
• See the “Photo Album” list to check which
albums have been copied (page 122).
b Notes
• You may not be able to play the slideshow
depending on DVD equipment.
• You cannot copy JPEG image files to a
recordable DVD which has been recorded using
other recorders/devices.
• DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not
be able to play on other equipment (page 45).
• No more than 99 slideshows can be recorded to a
disc.
• When copying an album containing more than 99
JPEG image files to a disc, slideshows will be
created with every 99 JPEG image files and
recorded to a disc.
• For DVD-Rs, the available disc space does not
increase even if you erase slideshows.
Copying JPEG image files to a
disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R)
You can copy the edited JPEG image files to
a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a
video file. You can play the slideshow on
other DVD equipment that may not be
compatible with the playback of JPEG image
files.
1 Insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R (in Video
mode).
2 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3 Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
Copying all JPEG image files
from the connected USB device
(USB t DVD-RW/DVD-R)
1 Connect the USB device to the USB
jack on the recorder.
2 Insert a blank DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video
mode).
3 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
4 Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
5 Select “Copy Photos from a Digital
Camera,” and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
• To cancel, select “No.”
z Hint
See “8. Reformatting a Disc” (page 47) to format
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
b Notes
• During copying, other operations cannot be
performed.
• While copying JPEG image files, timer
recordings are unavailable. If the timer is set
during copying, the recorder starts the timer
recording after copying is finished.
JPEG Image Files
Copying JPEG image files or
albums on the HDD
(HDD y HDD)
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
3 Select “View/Edit Photos on the
HDD,” and press ENTER.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
4 Select an album using M/m.
To copy the selected album, go to step 6.
To copy a JPEG image file, go to step 5.
,continued 119
4 Select “View/Edit Photos on the
HDD,” and press ENTER.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
5 Select an album using M/m, and press
ENTER.
The photo list appears.
6 Select a JPEG image file using M/m,
and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
7 Select “Multi-Mode,” and press
ENTER.
To copy the JPEG image file selected in
step 6 only, go to step 11.
8 Select a JPEG image file, and press
ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, select
“Single-Mode.”
9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the JPEG
image files you want to copy.
10 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
11 Select “Copy to DVD,” and press
ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
12 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
JPEG Image Files
The selected JPEG image files are copied
in the “PICTURE” folder on the disc.
The JPEG image file names are
automatically labelled as “PHOT****.”
If you want to play the disc on other
DVD equipment, finalise the disc
(page 45).
• To cancel, select “No.”
To select a JPEG image file from a
different album
1 Switch to the album list in step 8.
For instructions, see “To switch between
the album list and JPEG image file list”
on page 123.
2 Select an album using M/m, and press
<.
,continued 121
 3 Switch to the JPEG image file list.
For instructions, see “To switch between
the album list and JPEG image file list”
on page 123.
4 Select a JPEG image file using M/m, and
press ENTER.
z Hints
• See “8. Reformatting a Disc” (page 47) to format
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
• See the “Photo Album” list to check which
albums have been copied (page 122).
b Notes
• You may not be able to play the slideshow
depending on DVD equipment.
• You cannot copy JPEG image files to a
recordable DVD which has been recorded using
other recorders/devices.
• DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not
be able to play on other equipment (page 45).
• No more than 99 slideshows can be recorded to a
disc.
• For DVD-Rs, the available disc space does not
increase even if you erase slideshows.
122
To reload the files or folders
When a disc or the connected USB device
contains 1,000 or more files and/or 100 or
more folders, select “Read next” in the
“Photo Album” list, and press ENTER to
view unloaded files or folders.
It may take a few minutes to load files or
folders.
b Note
The thumbnail for a file that cannot be playable on
the recorder is displayed as “ .”
Viewing a JPEG image file
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Using the
“Photo Album” List.”
The “Photo Album” list appears.
Switch to the album list, if necessary.
2 Select a JPEG image file using M/m,
and press ENTER.
The selected JPEG image file is
displayed on the entire screen.
To display the detailed information
1 Select a JPEG image file, and press ,.
2 Select “Detailed Information,” and press
ENTER.
The detailed information for the selected
JPEG image file appears.
Playing a slideshow
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Using the
“Photo Album” List.”
The “Photo Album” list appears.
Switch between the album list and JPEG
image file list, if necessary.
2 Select an album or JPEG image file
using M/m, and press H.
The slideshow starts.
If you press H while selecting a JPEG
image file, the slideshow starts from the
selected JPEG image file.
124
12-Photo List (Example: HDD) C Sub-menu:
Using the “Photo Album” Press , to display the sub-menu.
The sub-menu displays options
List applicable only to the selected item. The
displayed options differ depending upon
You can play JPEG image files on the HDD, the model, situation, and disc type.
DATA DVDs/DATA CDs, or connected
USB device using the “Photo Album” list.
m
4-Photo List
ANGLE Sub-menu
SYSTEM D Scroll bar:
MENU
Appears when all of the JPEG image files
</M/m/,, do not fit on the list. To view the hidden
ENTER
EXIT/ JPEG image files, press M/m.
O RETURN
. > E Album and JPEG image file
information:
H
x Displays the image, JPEG image file
X
number, recording date and time, JPEG
ZOOM image file name, and JPEG image file
size.
F Disc type and remaining space of
m current disc
1 Press SYSTEM MENU. 1-Photo List
The System Menu appears.
2 Select “Photo Album,” and press To scroll the list display by page (Page
ENTER. mode)
The “Photo Album” menu appears. Press ./> while the “Photo Album”
JPEG Image Files
list is displayed. Each time you press ./
3 Select the item, and press ENTER. >, the entire “Photo Album” list changes
To play JPEG image files on the HDD, to the next/previous page of albums/JPEG
select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD.” image files.
To play JPEG image files on DATA
CDs/DATA DVDs, select “View Photos To switch between the album list and
on a CD/DVD.” JPEG image file list
To play JPEG image files from the
connected USB device, select “View A Album name 1 Press < while the “Photo Album” list is
displayed.
Photos on a USB Device.” B Album size
The “Photo Album” list appears. 2 Select “Display Mode” using M/m, and
4 Select an album using M/m, and press press ENTER.
ENTER. 3 Select “File” or “Album” using M/m, and
To show the 4-Photo List or 1-Photo List, press ENTER.
press < to select “Title View,” and
press ENTER, then select “4 Photos” or To turn off the “Photo Album” list
“1 Photo” using M/m, and press ENTER. Press SYSTEM MENU.
,continued 123
To play a slideshow with the sound (HDD To rotate an image
only) Press ANGLE repeatedly during a slideshow.
Each time you press ANGLE, the image turns
Managing JPEG Image
You can enjoy a slideshow while listening to
the sound stored in the HDD. clockwise by 90°. Files on the HDD
1 Select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD” z Hint
in step 3 of “Using the “Photo Album” You can start a slideshow by selecting “Start
List” on page 122. Slideshow” from the sub-menu.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
Switch between the album list and JPEG
image file list, if necessary.
2 Select an album or JPEG image file using
M/m, and press ,.
3 Select “Start Audio Slideshow,” and SYSTEM
press ENTER. MENU
4 Select a genre using </,. </M/m/,,
For details about assigning a genre, see ENTER
“Managing Audio Tracks on the Music
Jukebox” on page 117.
5 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The slideshow and the playback from the
first track of the selected genre start.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
b Notes The System Menu appears.
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may
be displayed with black bands at top and bottom,
2 Select “Photo Album,” and press
or left and right. ENTER.
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to The “Photo Album” menu appears.
display. This is not a malfunction.
• All albums or tracks in the selected genre will be
3 Select “View/Edit Photos on the
played during Slideshow even if some albums or HDD,” and press ENTER.
tracks are set to skip. The “Photo Album” list appears.
To stop a slideshow
4 Select an album or JPEG image file,
Press x (stop) or O RETURN. and press ,.
JPEG Image Files
The sub-menu appears.
To pause a slideshow 5 Select an option, and press ENTER.
Press X (pause). You can make the following edits to the
Note that only slideshow pauses and the album/JPEG image file.
sound continues to play.
“Start Slideshow”: Starts a slideshow
To view the next/previous image during a (page 124).
slideshow “Start Audio Slideshow” (HDD only):
Press ./>. Starts a slideshow with the sound
(page 124).
To zoom an image “New Album”: Creates a new album.
Press ZOOM repeatedly during a slideshow.
Each time you press ZOOM, the “Album Options”
magnification changes as shown below. • “Erase Album”: Erases the selected
2× t 4× t normal magnification album.
You can move the area you want to zoom • “Copy Album Contents”: Copies all
using </M/m/,. JPEG image files in the selected album
to the HDD (page 119).
,continued 125
1-30
 • “Rename Album”: Changes the
selected album name (page 42).
• “Protect Album Contents”: Protects all
JPEG image files in the selected album.
• “Cancel Protection”: Cancels
protection of all JPEG image files in the
selected album.
“Copy to DVD”: Copies the selected
album or JPEG image file to a DVD
(page 120).
“Multi-Mode”: Selects multiple albums
or JPEG image files to edit.
“Copy all to HDD”: Copies all the
albums and JPEG image files to the HDD
(page 118).
“Copy to HDD”: Copies the selected
album or JPEG image file to the HDD
(page 118).
“File Options”
• “Erase”: Erases the selected JPEG
image file.
• “Copy”: Copies the selected JPEG
image file (page 119).
• “Rename File”: Changes the selected
JPEG image file name (page 42).
• “Protect”: Protects the selected JPEG
image file. Select again to cancel the
protection.
“Print”: Prints the selected JPEG image
file (page 126).
“Detailed Information”: Displays the
detailed information for the selected
JPEG image file (page 124).
“Single-Mode”: Cancels “Multi-Mode.”
126
Settings and Adjustments
Disc Settings (Disc
Setup)
The “Disc Setup” setup allows you to adjust
DVD related settings.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the
recorder is in stop mode.
2 Select “Disc Setup,” and press
ENTER.
The “Disc Setup” setup appears with the
following options. The default settings
are underlined.
Basic
Input Disc Name
You can label a disc.
For details, see page 43.
Protect Disc
You can protect a disc against erasure.
For details, see page 44.
Format DVD-RW (DVD-RW only)
The recorder automatically starts formatting
in VR mode or Video mode, whichever is
selected below, when a new, unformatted
DVD-RW is inserted.
VR Mode Automatically formats the disc
in VR mode.
Video Automatically formats the disc
Mode in Video mode.
Format
You can manually re-format a DVD+RW,
DVD-RW, or DVD-R disc to make a blank
disc.
For details, see page 47.
128
Printing JPEG Image
Files
You can print JPEG image files on the HDD
or connected USB device by connecting a
PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB
jack on the recorder.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the
printer.
SYSTEM
MENU
</M/m/,,
ENTER
1 Connect a PictBridge-compatible
printer to the USB jack on the
recorder.
DVD recorder
to USB jack
PictBridge-compatible
printer
Finalise
Finalises a disc to play it on other DVD
equipment.
For details, see page 45.
Optimise HDD
As you record, erase and edit recordings
repeatedly, the HDD file system gradually
becomes fragmented. To ‘clean up’ all the
fragmented files, optimise the HDD
periodically. When the HDD needs
optimising, a message recommending
optimisation will appear automatically.
1 Select “Optimise HDD” in “Disc Setup,”
and press ENTER.
2 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
A progress bar appears and the
optimisation starts.
To cancel optimisation, press ENTER.
The HDD will be partly optimised.
b Notes
• It will take about eight hours to optimise the
HDD. During optimisation, other operations,
such as recording or playback, cannot be
performed.
• You cannot optimise the HDD when the HDD
disc space is insufficient for optimising. Erase
titles to open up disc space (page 92).
Format HDD.
You can format the HDD and resolve the
problem when the hard disk error occurred.
“Format HDD.” can be selected only when
the hard disk needs formatting. Note that all
of the recorded content on the HDD will be
erased.
1 Select “Format HDD.” in “Disc Setup,”
and press ENTER.
2 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
1-31
2 Connect the USB device to the USB 13 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
jack on the recorder. You can set the paper size and layout.
Refer to the operating instructions
When printing JPEG image files on the
HDD, skip this step. supplied with the printer.
3 Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears. To cancel printing
4 Select “Photo Album,” and press Press ENTER.
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
To display the connected printer
Select “Confirm Printer” of “USB” in the
5 Select the item, and press ENTER. “Options 2” setup (page 150).
To print JPEG image files on the HDD,
select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD.” To restart the connected USB device
To print JPEG image files from the Select “Restart USB Device” of “USB” in the
connected USB device, select “View “Options 2” setup (page 150).
Photos on a USB Device.”
The “Photo Album” list appears. z Hint
Printing options, such as paper size or layout, differ
6 Select an album, and press ENTER. depending on the printer. For details, refer to the
instructions supplied with the printer.
7 Select a file using M/m, and press
,.
The sub-menu appears.
8 Select the item, and press ENTER.
To print two or more files, select “Multi-
JPEG Image Files
Mode.”
To print the file selected in step 7 only,
go to step 12.
9 Select a file, and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, select
“Single-Mode.”
10 Repeat step 9 to select all files you
want to print.
11 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
12 Select “Print,” and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
127
3 Press </, repeatedly until the
Recorder Settings programme position of the station that
carries a time signal appears.
(Basic) 4 Press m to select “Start,” and press
ENTER.
The “Basic” setup helps you to make clock • If the recorder does not receive a time
and other recorder related settings. signal from any station, press
O RETURN and set the clock
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the manually.
recorder is in stop mode. • If the Auto Clock Set function did not
set the clock correctly for your local
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press area, try another station for the Auto
ENTER. Clock Set function or set the clock
3 manually.
Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.
The “Basic” setup appears with the
following options. The default settings Manual (Manual Clock Set)
Set the clock manually.
are underlined.
To turn off the display, press SYSTEM 1 Select “Clock Setting” in “Basic,” and
MENU. press ENTER.
2 Select “Manual,” and press ENTER.
Clock Setting 3 Press </, to select the time zone for
your area, and press m.
The recorder will automatically set the clock
when any digital channels have been scanned 4 Select “On” if you are now on summer
and stored. time, and press ENTER.
Auto (Auto Clock Set)
Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when a
programme position in your local area
Settings and Adjustments
broadcasts a time signal.
1 Select “Clock Setting” in “Basic,” and
press ENTER.
2 Select “Auto,” and press ENTER.
,continued 129
 5 Press M/m to set the day, and press ,.
Set the month, year, hour, and minutes in
sequence. Press </, to select the item
to be set, then press M/m to set the
numbers. The day of the week is set
automatically.
To change the numbers, press < to
return to the item to be changed, and
press M/m.
6 Press ENTER to start the clock.
Input Line System
Selects the colour system when recording
from the connected equipment.
NTSC Records in NTSC or PAL-60
colour system.
PAL/ Records in PAL or SECAM
SECAM colour system.
b Notes
• When picture noise appears after you change the
“Input Line System” setting, change the “Input
Colour System” setting (page 136). If picture
noise still appears, hold down x (stop) on the
recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder.
• When you change the “Input Line System”
setting, the Dubbing List is erased.
Power Save
Selects whether this recorder is in power save
mode when the power is turned off (standby).
Mode 1 Only antenna input signals are
output to the connected TV
when the recorder is in standby.
Mode 2 No input signals are output
when the recorder is in standby.
Off Does not set to power save
mode. Normally, select this
setting.
b Note
Power Save mode does not function in the
following cases, even when “Power Save” is set to
“Mode 1” or “Mode 2.”
– There is a timer setting with “VPS / PDC” in the
SCHEDULE list.
– The SMARTLINK features are not available
when “Power Save” is set to “Mode 1” or “Mode
2.”
130
Channel Options
You can skip or lock certain channels.
1 Select “Channel Options” in “Digital
Tuner,” and press ENTER.
2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.
3 Enter your four-digit password using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
To set a password, see page 145.
4 Select the programme position you want
to skip or lock using M/m, and press
ENTER.
5 Select an option, and press ENTER.
• To skip the programme position, select
. been preset during “Easy Setup.” Set the
• To lock the programme position, select
. 1
A check mark appears in the check box
next to the selected programme position.
Auto Skip
Selects whether to skip radio or data
channels.
Off No channels are skipped.
Radio Radio channels are skipped.
Data Data channels are skipped.
Radio & Radio and data channels are
Data skipped when selecting
channels.
132
HELP Setting
Aerial Reception Add New Channels
On Displays Help information for
GUI displays.
Settings (Digital Tuner) Scans digital channels and adds found
channels to the channel list.
Off Does not set to HELP setting
mode. The “Digital Tuner” setup helps you to make 1 Select “Add New Channels” in “Digital
digital tuner and programme position settings Tuner,” and press ENTER.
for the recorder.
EPG Type Select 2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.
Selects the EPG (Electronic Programme The recorder scans channels and stores
Guide) type to use. 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the them.
recorder is in stop mode. To cancel the scan, press SYSTEM
GUIDE Select this to use the Gemstar
Plus+ GUIDE Plus+ electronic 2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press
MENU or EXIT.
programme guide (page 63). ENTER.
Guide Select this to use the digital 3 Select “Digital Tuner,” and press Channel Sort
(Digital) electronic programme guide ENTER.
(page 48).
After the programme positions have been set,
The “Digital Tuner” setup display
you can change the order of each programme
appears with the following options. The
position in the displayed list.
Easy Setup (Resetting the Recorder) default settings are underlined.
Select this to run the “Easy Setup” To turn off the display, press SYSTEM 1 Select “Channel Sort” in “Digital
programme. MENU. Tuner,” and press ENTER.
2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.
1 Select “Easy Setup” in “Basic,” and press
ENTER.
2 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
3 Follow the instructions for “Easy Setup”
(page 26) from step 2.
Replace Channels 3 Press M/m to select a programme
position you want to move, and press
Scans available digital channels, and replaces ENTER.
all the channels already stored in the channel • To display other pages, press M/m
list with the scanned results. repeatedly.
Settings and Adjustments
1 Select “Replace Channels” in “Digital 4 Press M/m to select the programme
position number to swap for the one
Tuner,” and press ENTER.
selected in step 3, and press ENTER.
2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.
The programme position numbers are
3 Select your country/region using </,, swapped.
and press ENTER. • To move other programme positions,
The recorder scans available digital repeat from step 3.
channels and stores them.
To cancel the scan, press SYSTEM
MENU or EXIT.
If any programme positions are unused
or contain unwanted channels, you can
disable them (page 132).
b Note
The timer settings for the replaced channels are
deleted.
,continued 131
Download from TV
Signal Check Aerial Reception If you connect a TV to this recorder with
SMARTLINK, you can preset programme
You can check the signal strength and quality
of the channel.
Settings (Analog Tuner) positions by downloading from your TV.
For details, refer to the operating instructions
1 Select “Signal Check” in “Digital The “Analog Tuner” setup helps you to make supplied with your TV.
Tuner,” and press ENTER. analogue tuner and programme position 1 Select “Download from TV,” and press
2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER. settings for the recorder. ENTER.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the
2 Select your country/region using </,,
and press ENTER.
recorder is in stop mode. The tuner preset data will be downloaded
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press from your TV to this recorder.
ENTER. If any programme positions are unused
or contain unwanted channels, you can
3 Select “Analog Tuner,” and press disable them (page 134).
ENTER.
To check the signal strength and quality The “Analog Tuner” setup appears with
of other channels, select a channel using the following options. The default Manual CH Setting
</,. settings are underlined.
To turn off the display, press SYSTEM Presets programme positions manually.
MENU. If some programme positions could not be set
using the “Easy Setup” function, you can set
D.TV Language them manually.
If there is no sound or if the picture is
Selects main and sub audio/subtitle
languages or teletext language for bilingual distorted, the wrong tuner system may have
programmes.
correct tuner system manually in the steps
Select “D.TV Language” in “Digital below.
Tuner,” and press ENTER.
1 Select “Manual CH Setting” in “Analog
2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER. Tuner,” and press ENTER.
2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.
Auto Channel Setting 3 Select your country/region using </,,
and press ENTER.
Auto Scan
If you connect a TV to this recorder not using
Programme position
SMARTLINK, you can preset programme
Settings and Adjustments
positions automatically using “Auto Scan.”
1 Select “Auto Channel Setting” in
3 Select an item using M/m. “Analog Tuner,” and press ENTER.
4 Select a language using </,. 2 Select “Auto Scan,” and press ENTER.
3 Select your country/region using </,,
and press ENTER.
The programme position order will be set
according to the country/region you set.
If any programme positions are unused 4 Press ./> to select the programme
or contain unwanted channels, you can position.
disable them (page 134). 5 Select the item you want to change using
M/m, and change the settings using </
,, then press ENTER.
• To preset another programme position,
repeat from step 4.
,continued 133
1-32
 Skip
On Select this when the
programme position is unused
or contains unwanted channels.
The selected position will be
skipped when you press PROG
+/–.
Off Does not skip the selected
programme position.
CH System
Select the region to get the best broadcast
reception.
FR Select this when in France.
Western Select this when in West
Euro European countries.
UK & IE Select this when in Great
Britain/Ireland.
Eastern Select this when in East
Euro European countries.
AFT
On Turns on the Auto Fine Tuning
function.
Normally select this position.
Off Allows you to adjust the
picture manually.
• If the Auto Fine Tuning function does not
work effectively, select “Off” and press m.
Press </, to obtain a clearer picture, and
press ENTER.
Sound System Receivable channels
Select an available TV system (page 135).
TV system Channel coverage
Channel Swapping
B/G Select this when in West BG (West European E2 – E12 VHF After the programme positions have been set,
European countries, except Countries, except you can change the order of each programme
those listed in “Receivable Italia A – H VHF
those listed below) position in the display list.
channels” on page 135. E21 – E69 UHF
1 Select “Channel Swapping” in “Analog
D/K Select this when in East S1 – S20 CATV Tuner,” and press ENTER.
European countries.
S21 – S41 HYPER 2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.
I Select this when in Great S01 – S05 CATV
Britain/Ireland.
DK (East European R1 – R12 VHF
Countries)
L Select this when in France. R21 – R69 UHF
S1 – S20 CATV
Name
S21 – S41 HYPER
Changes or enters a new station name (up to
5 characters). The recorder must receive S01 – S05 CATV
programme position information (e.g., I (Great Britain/ Ireland A – J VHF
SMARTLINK information) for station 3 Press M/m to select the programme
Ireland)
names to appear automatically. South Africa 4 – 11, 13 position number you want to swap, and
VHF press ,.
Press ,, then press </, repeatedly to
select a character. B21 – B69 UHF • To display other pages, press ./
To change the characters, press M/m to move > repeatedly.
S1 – S20 CATV
the cursor, and press </,. 4 Press M/m to select the programme
S21 – S41 HYPER position number to swap for the one
Decoder S01 – S05 CATV selected in step 3, and press ENTER.
Sets the external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal The programme position numbers are
L* (France) F2 – F10 VHF
Plus analogue decoder) channels. swapped.
For details, see page 34. F21 – F69 UHF • To swap the programme position
B – Q CATV number of another station, repeat from
Channel step 3.
Press </, repeatedly until the programme S21 – S41 HYPER
position you want is displayed. * To receive broadcasts in France, select “L.”
• To select a cable or satellite programme
position, press </, until the programme
position you want is displayed.

Settings and Adjustments

134 135

z Hint LINE 1 In
Video Settings (Video In/ When “Input Line System” is set to “NTSC,” you
can select “Auto,” “3.58NTSC,” or “PAL-60.”
Selects a method of inputting video signals
for the LINE 1/DECODER jack. The picture
Audio Input Settings
Out) b Note will not be clear if this setting does not match (Audio In)
“Input Colour System” cannot be set when viewing the type of video input signal.
The “Video In/Out” settings will adjust items digital broadcasts. The “Audio In” setup allows you to adjust the
Video Inputs video signals.
related to the image, such as size and colour. sound according to the playback and
Select the settings according to the type of Component Video Out S-Video Inputs S-video signals. connection conditions.
TV, tuner, or decoder connected to the DVD Selects the signal format in which the
recorder. recorder outputs video signals: interlace or RGB Inputs RGB signals. 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the
progressive, from the COMPONENT recorder is in stop mode.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the VIDEO OUT jacks. Decoder Select this when connecting
to an external decoder 2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press
recorder is in stop mode.
Normal(Inter- Outputs signals in the (PAY-TV/Canal Plus ENTER.
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press lace) interlace format. analogue decoder). If you
connect to a cable box/ 3 Select “Audio In,” and press ENTER.
ENTER.
Progressive Outputs signals in the satellite receiver such as The “Audio In” setup appears with the
3 Select “Video In/Out,” and press progressive format. Select
this when you want to view
CanalSat, do not select this
option.
following options. The default settings
ENTER. are underlined.
progressive signals.
The “Video In/Out” setup appears with
the following options. The default NTSC on PAL TV
settings are underlined. b Notes Sets the recorder to convert signals of the
• When you set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB,” you NTSC colour system to the PAL colour
cannot set “Component Video Out.”
system to play NTSC discs on PAL-only
• When you connect the recorder to a monitor or
projector via only the COMPONENT VIDEO TVs. Refer to the operating instructions
OUT jacks, do not set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB.” If supplied with your TV.
you set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB,” in this case, the
picture may not appear. On Plays NTSC discs on PAL-
• When picture noise appears after you set the only TVs.
recorder to progressive format, hold down x
(stop) on the recorder, and press Z (open/close) Off Select this if the connected NICAM Select (page 72)
on the recorder. TV is a multi-system
• No video signals are output when using the (NTSC-compatible) TV. NICAM Normally select this
HDMI connection. position.
Input Colour System
Selects the colour system when picture noise Standard Select this if the sound from
LINE 3 Out
appears after you change the “Input Line NICAM broadcasts is not
System” setting (page 130). Selects a method of outputting video signals clear.
for the LINE 3 – TV jack.
Auto
Settings and Adjustments

Recorder automatically
detects signals of colour
systems and selects the
appropriate colour system.
PAL Selects the PAL colour
system when “Input Line
System” is set to “PAL/
SECAM.”
SECAM Selects the SECAM colour
system when “Input Line
System” is set to “PAL/
SECAM.”
Video Outputs video signals. Analog Tuner Level
If the playback sound is distorted, set this
S-Video Outputs S-video signals. item to “Compression.” The recorder reduces
the audio output level.
RGB Outputs RGB signals.
This function affects the output of the
following jacks:
b Notes – LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks
• If your TV does not accept S-video or RGB – LINE 3 – TV jack
signals, the image will not be displayed in the
– LINE 1/DECODER jack
selected method on the TV screen even if you
select “S-Video” or “RGB.” See the instructions Normal Normally select this
supplied with your TV. position.
• SMARTLINK is available only when “Video” is
selected. Compression Select this when the
• RGB signals are not output when using the HDMI playback sound from the
connection. speakers is distorted.

136 ,continued 137

1-33
 External Audio DTS Output (DVD VIDEOs only) MPEG Output (DVD VIDEOs only)
Stereo Select this when receiving Audio Output Settings Selects whether or not to output DTS signals. Selects the type of MPEG audio signal.
stereo programmes from
connected equipment.
(Audio Out) On Select this when the
recorder is connected to an
MPEG Select this when the
recorder is connected to an
audio component with a audio component with a
Bilingual Select this when receiving The “Audio Out” setup allows you to switch built-in DTS decoder. built-in MPEG decoder.
bilingual programmes the method of outputting audio signals when
from connected you connect a component such as an Off Select this when the MPEG -> Select this when the
equipment. amplifier (receiver) with a digital input jack. recorder is connected to an PCM recorder is connected to an
If you connect a component that does not audio component without a audio component without a
b Note accept the selected audio signal, a loud noise built-in DTS decoder. built-in MPEG decoder. If
When receiving audio input signals from the DV you play MPEG audio
(or no sound) will come from the speakers, sound tracks, the recorder
input jack, the recorder automatically selects and may affect your ears or cause speaker b Note
“Stereo” or “Bilingual” regardless of the “External outputs stereo signals via
damage. When HDMI output is performed to equipment not
Audio” setting. the DIGITAL OUT
compatible with DTS signals, the signals will not be
(COAXIAL) jack.
Bilingual Recording 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the
output regardless of the “DTS Output” setting.

Selects the sound to be recorded. recorder is in stop mode. 96 kHz PCM Output (DVD VIDEOs only) b Note

A/L Records the main sound

2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press Selects the sampling frequency of the audio If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment
not compatible with MPEG audio signals, the PCM
ENTER. signal.
for the bilingual signals will be automatically output even when you
programme.
3 Select “Audio Out,” and press ENTER. 96 kHz ->
48 kHz
The audio signals of DVD
VIDEOs are converted to
select “MPEG.”

B/R Records the sub sound for
the bilingual programme.
b Note
When recording a bilingual audio signal to the
HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is set to
“Video Mode Off” (page 144) (except in PCM
mode)) or a DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode (except
in PCM mode), both audio channels are recorded
and you can select the sound when playing.
DV Input
Select the setting for the audio input when
DV camcorder dubbing.
Select “Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %)”/“Mix (Stereo
1: 50 %)”/“Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %)” or “Stereo
The “Audio Out” setup appears with the
48 kHz and output.
following options. The default settings
are underlined. 96 kHz All signals containing
96 kHz are output without
conversion. However, the
signals are output at 48 kHz
if copyright-protected
signals are contained.
b Notes
• “96 kHz PCM Output” setting has no effect when
audio signals are output from the LINE 2 OUT
(R-AUDIO-L) jacks or LINE 3 – TV/LINE 1/
DECODER jack. If the sampling frequency is
Dolby Digital Output (HDD/DVDs only) 96 kHz, signals are simply converted to analogue
Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal. signals and output.
• If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment
Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control)
(DVDs only)
Selects the dynamic range (difference
between soft and loud sounds) setting when
playing a DVD that conforms to “Audio
DRC.” This affects the output from the
following jacks:
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks
– LINE 3 – TV jack
– LINE 1/DECODER jack
– DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT
jack only when “Dolby Digital Output” is
set to “Dolby Digital -> PCM” (page 138).
On Makes low sounds clear
even if you turn the volume

Settings and Adjustments

2” only if you have added a second audio down.
Dolby Digital Select this when the not compatible with 96 kHz signals, 48 kHz PCM
when recording with your digital video recorder is connected to an will be automatically output even when you select
camera. audio component with a “96 kHz.” Off Normally select this
built-in Dolby Digital position.
Stereo 1 Records original decoder.
sound only.
Normally select this Dolby Digital Select this when the
when dubbing a DV -> PCM recorder is connected to an
format tape. audio component lacking a
built-in Dolby Digital
Stereo 2 Records additional decoder.
audio only.

Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %) b Note

If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment
Records both stereo not compatible with Dolby Digital signals, the
Mix (Stereo 1: 50 %)
1 and 2. PCM signals will be automatically output even
Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %) when you select “Dolby Digital.”

138 139

Auto Language Manual recording mode

Language Settings The “Auto Language” function is available
when “Audio Language” and “Subtitle
Recording Settings The table below shows the approximate
recording times for the HDD and the different
(Language) Language” are set to the same language, and (Recording) DVD types in each manual recording mode,
“Subtitle Display” is set to “On.” as well as the standard recording mode
The “Language” setup allows you to adjust The “Recording” setup allows you to adjust equivalents.
On For DVD VIDEOs whose
language settings. main audio track is the recording settings. The recording time for the HDD
language you set in “Audio Approx. recording time (hours)
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the Language” and “Subtitle 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the Recording
RDR- RDR- RDR- RDR-
recorder is in stop mode. Language,” the recorder recorder is in stop mode. mode
plays the main audio track HXD770 HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press without subtitles. 2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press HQ+*1 17 23 36 73
ENTER. For DVD VIDEOs whose ENTER.
main audio track is not the PCM*2 25 34 53 105
3 Select “Language,” and press ENTER. language you set in “Audio 3 Select “Recording,” and press MN32 25 34 53 105
The “Language” setup appears with the Language” and “Subtitle ENTER. (HQ)
following options. The default settings Language,” the recorder The “Recording” setup appears with the
plays the main audio track MN31 27 36 57 115
are underlined. following options. The default settings
with subtitles in the MN30 29 39 61 120
language you set.
are underlined.
MN29 31 42 66 130
Off Turns off the function.
MN28 33 45 70 140
MN27 36 48 75 150
DVD Menu Language (DVD VIDEO only)
Switches the language for the DVD menu. MN26 37 50 79 155
Select “w/Subtitle Language” to set the same (HSP)
language as the language you set in “Subtitle MN25 39 53 84 165
Language.”
MN24 42 56 88 175
OSD Language Subtitle Display MN23 44 59 92 185
Switches the display language on the screen. Manual Rec. Mode
On Displays subtitles. MN22 46 62 97 195
Audio Language (DVD VIDEO only) On (go to Allows you to select all MN21 51 68 105 210
Switches the language of the sound track. Off Does not display subtitles. setup) recording modes. (SP)
Select this, and press
Assist Subtitle Displays special assistive MN20 54 73 115 230
Subtitle Language (DVD VIDEO only) ENTER.
subtitles, where available. Then, select a recording MN19 59 79 120 245
Switches the language of the subtitles
mode using </,, and
recorded on the disc. press ENTER. MN18 63 84 130 265
z Hint (LSP)
Settings and Adjustments

If you select “Others” in “Audio Language,”

“Subtitle Language,” or “DVD Menu Language,” Off Allows you to select MN17 67 90 140 280
press m, and enter a language code from “Language standard recording modes
only. MN16 72 96 150 300
Code List” on page 167.
MN15 75 100 155 315
b Note (ESP)
If you select a language in “DVD Menu Language,”
MN14 78 105 165 335
“Subtitle Language,” or “Audio Language” that is
not recorded on the DVD VIDEO, one of the MN13 82 110 175 350
recorded languages will be automatically selected.
MN12 86 115 185 370
MN11 90 120 190 390
MN10 93 125 200 405
MN9 100 135 210 420
(LP)
MN8 110 150 235 475

140 ,continued 141

1-34
 Approx. recording time (hours) Approx. recording time Resolution Auto Chapter (HDD/VR) (HDD/DVD-RW/
Recording (hours) The first figure refers to when “Input Line DVD-R in VR mode only)
mode RDR- RDR- RDR- RDR- System” is set to “NTSC”; the second when
HXD770 HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 Recording DVD+RW/
mode set to “PAL/SECAM” in the “Basic” setup On The recorder detects
DVD-RW/ DVD+R DL/ changes in the picture and
MN7 120 165 265 530 DVD+R/ DVD-R DL (page 130).
sound and automatically
MN6 150 200 315 635 DVD-R For the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is set inserts chapter marks (up to
(EP)
MN12 3 hr. 30 min. 6 hr. 17 min. to “Video Mode Off”)/DVD-RW (VR mode)/ 99 chapters for one title
MN5 175 235 370 745 DVD-R (VR mode) recorded on the HDD).
MN11 3 hr. 40 min. 6 hr. 35 min. HQ+, PCM, MN32 to MN16: 720 × 480 / 720
MN4 200 270 425 850 × 576 Off No chapter mark is inserted.
MN10 3 hr. 50 min. 6 hr. 53 min.
(SLP) MN15 to MN12: 544 × 480 / 544 × 576
MN9 (LP) 4 7 hr. 11 min.
MN3 255 340 530 1060 MN11 to MN9: 480 × 480 / 544 × 576 b Notes
(SEP) MN8 4 hr. 30 min. 8 hr. 4 min. MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576 • The actual chapter mark interval may vary
MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288 depending on the amount of information
MN2 300 405 635 1275 MN7 5 8 hr. 58 min.
contained in the video to be recorded.
For the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is set
MN1 340 455 710 1420 MN6*3 (EP) 6 10 hr. 46 min. • Chapter marks are automatically inserted, where
to “Video Mode On”)/DVD+RW/DVD-RW the date or time information changes on the tape,
MN5*3 7 12 hr. 34 min. (Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) when “Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On”
The recording time for DVDs HQ+, PCM, MN32 to MN9: 720 × 480 / 720
MN4*3 (SLP) 8 14 hr. 21 min. during DV dubbing to the HDD or a DVD-RW/
Approx. recording time × 576 DVD-R (VR mode).
(hours) MN3*3*4 (SEP*4) 10 17 hr. 57 min. MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576
Recording DVD+RW/ MN2*3*4 12 21 hr. 32 min. MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288 Auto Chapter (Video) (DVD-RW/DVD-R in
mode DVD-RW/ DVD+R DL/ Video mode only)
MN1*3*4 13 hr. 24
DVD+R/ DVD-R DL 22 min.
Rec. Mode Adjust
DVD-R No No chapter mark is inserted.
*1 Records in higher quality (15 Mbps). On Automatically adjusts the Separation
PCM*2 1 hr. 1 min. 1 hr. 51 min. recording mode to enable
HQ+ mode is not available for DVDs. When
MN32 (HQ) 1 hr. 1 min. 1 hr. 51 min. recording to DVDs, the recording mode the entire programme to be 10 minutes Inserts chapter marks at
automatically switches to HQ mode even if you recorded (page 74). approximately 10-minute
MN31 1 hr. 5 min. 1 hr. 57 min. intervals.
set to HQ+ mode.
MN30 1 hr. 10 min. 2 hr. 6 min. *2 Audio signals are recorded in 48kHz PCM Off Turns off the function.
format, and video signals are recorded in HQ 15 minutes Inserts chapter marks at
MN29 1 hr. 15 min. 2 hr. 15 min. mode. When recording a bilingual programme, approximately 15-minute
Subtitle Recording intervals.
MN28 1 hr. 20 min. 2 hr. 24 min. select the sound to be recorded (page 138).
*3 Titles recorded in MN6 or lower mode cannot be
On Records digital broadcast
MN27 1 hr. 25 min. 2 hr. 33 min. dubbed to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs at high speed.
*4
subtitles. Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) (DVD+RW/
MN26 (HSP) 1 hr. 30 min. 2 hr. 41 min. SEP, MN1, MN2, or MN3 mode is not available
for DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+R DLs. When
DVD+R only)
Off No digital broadcast
MN25 1 hr. 35 min. 2 hr. 50 min. recording to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, the subtitles are recorded. No No chapter mark is inserted.
recording mode automatically switches to SLP

Settings and Adjustments

MN24 1 hr. 40 min. 2 hr. 59 min. Separation
mode even if you set to SEP, MN1, MN2, or
MN23 1 hr. 45 min. 3 hr. 8 min. MN3 mode. Set Thumbnail
10 minutes Inserts chapter marks at
MN22 1 hr. 50 min. 3 hr. 17 min.
Selects a scene for the thumbnail picture approximately 10-minute
z Hint shown in the Title List. intervals.
MN21 (SP) 2 3 hr. 35 min. Audio signals are recorded in Dolby Digital 2 ch
format (except for PCM mode). 0 seconds The first frame of the title is
MN20 2 hr. 10 min. 3 hr. 53 min. 15 minutes Inserts chapter marks at
set for the thumbnail approximately 15-minute
MN19 2 hr. 20 min. 4 hr. 11 min. picture. intervals.
MN18 (LSP) 2 hr. 30 min. 4 hr. 29 min. 30 seconds The frame at 30 seconds
MN17 2 hr. 40 min. 4 hr. 47 min. from the first frame is set for
the thumbnail picture.
MN16 2 hr. 50 min. 5 hr. 5 min.
MN15 (ESP) 3 5 hr. 23 min. 3 minutes The frame at 3 minutes from
the first frame is set for the
MN14 3 hr. 10 min. 5 hr. 41 min. thumbnail picture.
MN13 3 hr. 20 min. 5 hr. 59 min.

142 ,continued 143

HDD Recording Format 4:3 Letter Box

Selects the HDD recording format. Playback Settings Limitation Settings
Video Mode
Off
Records to the HDD in VR
mode.
(Playback) (Parental Lock)
When recording stereo and 4:3 Pan Scan
bilingual programmes, both The “Playback” setup allows you to adjust The “Parental Lock” setup allows you to set
main and sub sounds can be the playback settings. the password and limit the operations.
recorded.

Video Mode Records to the HDD in

1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the
recorder is in stop mode. 16:9 recorder is in stop mode.
On Video mode.
When recording stereo and
bilingual programmes, only
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press 2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press
ENTER. ENTER.
one sound track (main or
sub) can be recorded.
Set “Bilingual Recording”
3 Select “Playback,” and press ENTER. 3 Select “Parental Lock,” and press
The “Playback” setup appears with the b Note ENTER.
to “A/L” (default) or “B/R” Depending on the disc, “4:3 Letter Box” may be
in the “Audio In” setup
following options. The default settings The “Parental Lock” setup display
are underlined. selected automatically instead of “4:3 Pan Scan” or appears with the following options. The
(page 138). vice-versa.
default settings are underlined.
To turn off the display, press SYSTEM
z Hint Pause Mode
The HDD contents recorded in Video mode can be MENU.
Selects the picture quality in pause mode.
dubbed to a disc at high speed (page 98).
Field Outputs a stable, generally
shake-free image.

Frame Outputs a sharp image, but

may be prone to shake.

Auto Outputs a generally less

TV Type sharp but more stable still
Select the playback picture size according to image.
the type of connected TV (wide-screen/wide
mode TV or conventional 4:3 screen TV). Seamless Playback (HDD/DVD-RW/DVD- Set Password/Change Password
R in VR mode only) You can set or change the password that gives
4:3 Letter Box Select this when connecting
to a 4:3 screen TV. Displays access to the “Channel Options” settings in
a wide picture with bands On Playback is smooth, but the “Digital Tuner” setup and the “Parental
on the upper and lower with a trade-off against the Lock” settings.
portions of the screen. accuracy of the edit points.
1 Select “Set Password” or “Change
Settings and Adjustments

4:3 Pan Scan Select this when connecting
to a 4:3 screen TV.
Automatically displays a
wide picture on the entire
screen and cuts off the
portions that do not fit.
16:9 Select this when connecting
to a wide-screen TV or TV
with a wide mode function.
Off You may notice momentary Password” in “Parental Lock,” and press
interruption at edited points ENTER.
during playback of a VR
mode Playlist. 2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER.
The display for registering a password
appears.
Angle Indicator (DVD VIDEOs only) Example: when you select “Set
Password” in step 1
On Displays “ ” on the TV
screen if various angles
(multi-angles) for a scene
are recorded on the disc.

Off Does not display “ ” on

the TV screen.

144 ,continued 145

1-35
 3 Enter your four-digit password using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
• To change the password, enter your
four-digit password in the “Current
Password” row using the number
buttons, and press ENTER. Then enter
a new password in the “New Password”
row using the number buttons.
The password setting/password changing
setting is completed.
b Note
If you forgot your password, reset the recorder
(page 158).
DVD Playback (DVD VIDEO only)
Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be
limited according to a predetermined level,
such as the age of the users. Scenes may be
blocked or replaced with different scenes.
1 Select “DVD Playback” in “Parental
Lock,” and press ENTER.
To register a new password, see “Set
Password/Change Password” on
page 145.
2 Select “Standard,” and press ENTER.
4 Select “Code” (geographic area) as the
720 x 576p*1 Sends 720×576p video
playback limitation level, and press
ENTER.
HDMI Settings (HDMI signals.
The area is selected. Output) 720 x 480p*2 Sends 720×480p video
• When you select “Number,” press the signals.
number buttons to select and enter a The “HDMI Output” setup allows you to
country/area code in the table 720 x 576i*1 Sends 720×576i video
adjust items related to the HDMI connection.
(page 168), and press ENTER. signals.
You can select “HDMI Output” only when
5 Select “Change Level,” and press connecting equipment to the HDMI OUT
720 x 480i*2 Sends 720×480i video
ENTER. jack. signals.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the *1 Can be selected only when “Input Line System”
recorder is in stop mode. is set to “PAL/SECAM” in the “Basic” setup
(page 130).
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press *2
Can be selected only when “Input Line System”
ENTER. is set to “NTSC” in the “Basic” setup (page 130).
3 Select “HDMI Output,” and press b Notes
ENTER. • When picture noise appears after you change the
“Screen Resolution” setting, hold down x (stop)
The “HDMI Output” setup appears with
6 Enter your four-digit password using the
the following options. The default
on the recorder, and press Z (open/close) on the
number buttons, and press ENTER. recorder.
settings are underlined. • When “Colour” is set to “YCbCr 4:2:2” in the
7 Select the level. After connecting equipment to the HDMI “HDMI Output” setup, you cannot select “720 x
The lower the value, the stricter the OUT jack, “Screen Resolution,” “4:3 576i” (or “720 x 480i”).
limitation. Video Output,” and “Colour” are
Discs rated higher than the selected level automatically set to the appropriate 4:3 Video Output
will be restricted. settings. This setting is effective only when you set
8 Press ENTER. “TV Type” to “16:9” in the “Playback” setup.
The DVD Playback setting is completed. Adjust this setting to watch 4:3 aspect ratio
To cancel the DVD Playback setting for signals. If you can change the aspect ratio on
the disc, select “Off” in step 7. your TV, change the setting on your TV, not
this recorder.
D.TV Age Limit Note that this setting is effective only for
Viewing of some digital TV programmes can HDMI connection.
be limited according to the age limit you set.
Full Select this when you can
To watch programmes that exceed the age change the aspect ratio on
limit you set, your password is required. your TV.
(for customers in France/Denmark/Finland,

Settings and Adjustments

Screen Resolution
or Sweden only) Selects the type of video signals output from Normal Select this when you cannot
change the aspect ratio on
1 Select “D.TV Age Limit” in “Parental the HDMI OUT jack. If the picture is not your TV. Shows a 4:3 size
Lock,” and press ENTER. clear, natural or to your satisfaction, try video with the aspect ratio
2 Select “Next Screen,” and press ENTER. another option that suits the disc and your as it is.
The “D.TV Age Limit” display appears. TV/projector, etc. For details, refer also to the
instruction manual supplied with the TV/
3 Enter your four-digit password using the 3 Enter your four-digit password using the projector, etc.
number buttons, and press ENTER. number buttons, and press ENTER.
1920 x 1080p Sends 1920×1080p video
4 Select an age as limitation level, and
signals.
press ENTER.
The setting is completed. 16:9 aspect ratio TV
1920 x 1080i Sends 1920×1080i video
To cancel the setting, select “Off.” signals.

1280 x 720p Sends 1280×720p video

signals.

146 ,continued 147

Colour HDMI Control Command Mode

Selects the method of outputting video
signals for the HDMI jack. On Allows you to use the Other Settings (Options) Changes the Command Mode of the recorder
to avoid interference with your other Sony
HDMI control features
DVD recorder or player.
RGB (0-255) Outputs RGB (0-255) (page 21). The “Options” and “Options 2” setups allow
signals. Select this when you to set up other operational settings. 1 Select “Command Mode” in “Options,”
connecting to an RGB (0- Off Turns off the function. and press ENTER.
255) device. 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the 2 Select a Command Mode (DVD1,
recorder is in stop mode. DVD2, or DVD3), and press ENTER.
RGB (16-235) Outputs RGB (16-235)
signals. Select this if
colours appear overly rich
2 Select “Initial Setup,” and press b Note
ENTER. The default command mode setting for this
and the black appears too recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3.
deep. 3 Select “Options” or “Options 2,” and The remote does not function if different
press ENTER. command modes are set for the recorder and
YCbCr 4:2:2 Outputs 10-bit YCbCr remote. Set the same command mode.
4:2:2 component signals. The “Options” or “Options 2” setup
appears with the following options. The 3 Set the Command Mode for the remote
YCbCr 4:4:4 Outputs 8-bit YCbCr default settings are underlined. so it matches the Command Mode for the
4:4:4 component signals. Example: “Options” setup recorder you set above.
Follow the steps below to set the
b Notes Command Mode on the remote.
• Some settings may not be available depending on 1 Hold down ENTER.
the connected device. 2 While holding down ENTER, enter
• When a DVI device is connected, you cannot the Command Mode code number
select “YCbCr 4:2:2” or “YCbCr 4:4:4.”
using the number buttons.
• When “Screen Resolution” is set to “720 x 576i”
(or “720 x 480i”) in the “HDMI Output” setup, Command Mode Code number
you cannot select “YCbCr 4:2:2.”
DVD1 number button 1
Audio Output DVD2 number button 2
Selects the type of audio signal output from Options DVD3 number button 3
the HDMI OUT jack.
On Screen Display 3 Hold down both the number and
Auto Outputs Dolby Digital,
ENTER buttons at the same time for
MPEG and DTS audio On Automatically displays
signals as a bitstream more than three seconds.
information on the screen
signal. Normally select when the recorder is turned
this position. z Hint
on, etc.
You can check the Command Mode for the recorder
PCM Converts all audio signals in the front panel display.
Off Displays information only
Settings and Adjustments

except for DTS signals to when DISPLAY is pressed. Command In the front panel
PCM. Mode display
Bitstream Select this if the Front Panel Display DVD1 “1” appears.
Priority connected device is Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display.
DVD2 “2” appears.
compatible with bitstream
audio. On Bright lighting. DVD3 Either “1” or “2” does not
appear.
Off Turns off the lighting when
b Notes the power is off.
• The PCM signals may not be output even when
you select “Auto” depending on the “Audio Out”
settings, number of audio channels, and the
HDMI-connected device.
• The “Audio Output” function is not available
when a DVI device is connected.

148 ,continued 149

1-36
 SMARTLINK
This Recorder Allows you to use the
Only SMARTLINK function
with the recorder when the
recorder is in standby mode.
Pass Through Allows you to use the
SMARTLINK function
with the connected
equipment when the
recorder is in standby mode.
b Note
Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the “Basic” setup
(page 130) to set “SMARTLINK” to “Pass
Through.”
DivX
Registration Code
Displays the registration code of DivX video
files for this recorder.
For more information, go to http://
www.divx.com/vod on the Internet.
Set Preview (HDD only)
Selects the thumbnail type shown in the Title
List.
Quick Plays short excerpts from
Preview throughout the selected
title.
Normal Plays the selected title from
the beginning.
Software Update
You can check the current software version
of the built-in digital tuner and keep it up to
date with the latest software.
Manual Update
Updates the software manually.
1 Select “Software Update” in “Options,”
and press ENTER.
2 Press “Next Screen” and press ENTER.
3 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
4 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The update starts.
To cancel, press SYSTEM MENU.
The new software will be available next time
the recorder is turned on.
150
, If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video
output, changing the “Screen Resolution”
setting in the “HDMI Output” setup may
solve the problem (page 147). Connect the
TV and the recorder using a video jack
other than HDMI OUT, and switch the
TV’s input to the connected video input so
that you can see the on-screen displays.
Change the “Screen Resolution” setting in
the “HDMI Output” setup, and switch the
TV’s input back to HDMI. If the picture still
does not appear, repeat the steps and try
other options.
, The recorder is connected to an input device
that is not HDCP compliant (page 19).
, When picture noise appears after you
change the “Screen Resolution” setting,
hold down x (stop) on the recorder, and
press Z (open/close) on the recorder.
TV programme reception does not fill the
screen.
, Set the channel manually in “Manual CH
Setting” in the “Analog Tuner” setup
(page 133).
, Select the correct source using the INPUT
button, or select a channel of any TV
programme using the PROG +/– buttons.
The picture is breaking up.
, The signal strength is low.
, Check aerial installation.
TV programme pictures are distorted.
, Reorient the TV aerial.
, Adjust the picture (see the TV’s instruction
manual).
, Place the recorder and TV farther apart.
, Place the TV and any bunched aerial cables
farther apart.
, The aerial cable is connected to the
AERIAL OUT jack on the recorder.
Connect the cable to the AERIAL IN jack.
, The recorder’s colour system is different
from your TV. Hold down x (stop) on the
recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder
to change the recorder’s colour system.
152
Auto Update
On Updates the software
automatically. Normally,
select this position.
Off Does not update the
software automatically.
Technical Info.
You can check the current hardware and
software versions of the digital tuner.
Options 2
USB
Restart USB Device
Restarts the connected USB device if it does
not respond to the recorder. If the connected
USB device still does not work properly, try
following:
– Turn the connected USB device off and on
again.
– Disconnect and then connect the USB
cable.
Confirm Printer
Displays the manufacturer and model name
of the printer connected to the recorder. Note
that this function may not work depending on
the printer.
TV Pause
Selects the tuner for the TV Pause (page 87).
TV’s Tuner Selects this when
connecting the recorder to
your TV using the SCART
jack.
Recorder’s Selects this when
Tuner connecting the recorder to
your TV not using the
SCART jack.
TV channels cannot be changed.
, The channel is skipped (page 134).
, A timer recording started, which changed
the channels.
, The Parental Lock is activated (page 145).
The picture from equipment connected to
the recorder’s input jack does not appear
on the screen.
, If the equipment is connected to the LINE
1/DECODER jack, select “L1” in the front
panel display by pressing INPUT.
If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2
IN jacks, select “L2” in the front panel
display by pressing INPUT.
The playback picture or TV programme
from the equipment connected through the
recorder is distorted.
, If the playback picture output from a DVD
player, VCR, or tuner goes through your
recorder before reaching your TV, the copy-
protection signal applied to some
programmes could affect picture quality.
Disconnect the playback equipment in
question and connect it directly to your TV.
The picture does not fill the screen.
, Set “TV Type” in the “Playback” setup in
accordance with the screen size of your TV
(page 144).
The picture does not fill the screen, even
though the picture size is set in “TV Type”
in the “Playback” setup.
, The picture size of the title is fixed.
The picture is black and white.
, Check that “LINE 3 Out” in the “Video In/
Out” setup is set to the appropriate item that
conforms to your system (page 136).
, If you are using a SCART cord, be sure to
use one that is fully wired (21 pins).
1-37
Additional Information
Troubleshooting
If you experience any of the following
difficulties while using the recorder, use this
troubleshooting guide to help remedy the
problem before requesting repairs. Should
any problem persist, consult your nearest
Sony dealer.
Power
The power does not turn on.
, Check that the mains lead is connected
securely.
Tuner
The channel is not found or stored or
missed.
, Make sure that your aerial is properly
connected to the recorder.
, Confirm with your dealer that you are in an
area that can receive a digital signal.
, Check your aerial installation.
Picture
There is no picture.
, Re-connect all connecting cords securely.
, The connecting cords are damaged.
, Check the connection to your TV (page 15).
, Switch the input selector on your TV (such
as to “VCR” and “AV 1”) so that the signal
from the recorder appears on the TV screen.
, Check that the “Video In/Out” setup is set
to the appropriate item that conforms to
your system (page 136).
, If you connect the recorder to your TV via
only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
jacks, set “Component Video Out” in the
“Video In/Out” setup to “Progressive”
(page 136).
, A scrambled channel is selected.
, When playing a double-layer DVD, the
video and audio may be momentarily
interrupted at the point where the layers
switch.
GUIDE Plus+ system (in the UK
only)
GUIDE Plus+ system does not appear.
, 1Even if you complete “Easy Setup,” TV
programme listings do not appear until the
recorder receives the GUIDE Plus+ data.
2Turn off the recorder, but do not unplug
it. 3Wait for 24 hours. It may take several
days for the recorder to receive the GUIDE
Plus+ data for all programme positions. If
the recorder does not receive the GUIDE
Plus+ data after 24 hours, set the host
channel manually (page 69).
, The country/region or postal code is
incorrect. Correctly set your country/region
and postal code (page 26).
, When the recorder is connected to a set top
box receiver, the set top box receiver must
be turned on to download the GUIDE Plus+
data.
, Area numbers that cannot be received using
GUIDE Plus+ are set. Select “Easy Setup”
in the “Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in
the System Menu, and follow the on-screen
instructions to make the settings again
(page 26).
, The “Time Lock” function on your cable
box is activated. Set this function to off.
, If the host channel has changed or moved,
the programme guide data cannot be
received. In this case, follow the steps in
“Searching for the GUIDE Plus+ host
channel” (page 68) to update the host
channel setting. If the problem persists after
waiting for one day, search for the host
channel at the following website and set the
host channel manually (page 69).
www.europe.guideplus.com
The programme position number in the
programme listing does not match the
broadcast station.
, There may be more than one channel lineup
for your area. To change the channel lineup,
select “Editor” in the Menu Bar of the
GUIDE Plus+ system (page 69).
Picture noise appears.
, If the picture output signal from your
recorder passes through your VCR to get to
your TV, or if you are connected to a
combination TV/VIDEO player, the copy-
protection signal applied to some DVD
programmes could affect picture quality. If
you still experience this problem even when
you connect your recorder directly to your
TV, try connecting your recorder to your
TV’s S VIDEO input.
, You have set the recorder to progressive
format even though your TV cannot accept
the progressive signal. In this case, hold
down x (stop) on the recorder, and press
Z (open/close) on the recorder.
, Even if your TV is compatible with
progressive format (525p/625p) signals, the
image may be affected when you set the
recorder to progressive format. In this case,
hold down x (stop) on the recorder, and
press Z (open/close) on the unit and the
recorder is set to normal (interlace) format.
, You are playing a title recorded in a colour
system that is different from your TV.
, Noise may appear in the pictures recorded
on the HDD, which is due to the
characteristics of HDD, and is not a
malfunction.
, When playing a double-layer DVD, the
video and audio may be momentarily
interrupted at the point where the layers
switch.
There is no picture or picture noise
appears when connected to the DV IN
jack.
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off
and on again. 2Turn the connected
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect
Additional Information
and then connect the i.LINK cable again.
There is no picture or picture noise appears
when connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off
and on again. 2Turn the connected
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect
and then connect the HDMI cord again.
,continued 151
Programme listings for some programme
positions are missing.
, The programme guide data may not be
updated. Turn off the recorder and let the
recorder receive the programme guide data.
, Some broadcast stations support only two
days of data. For details, see the following
website:
www.europe.guideplus.com
, All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be
received because the reception is poor.
The programme listing is not up to date.
, The recorder was in use during the time that
the GUIDE Plus+ data was scheduled to be
downloaded.
, All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be
received because the reception is poor.
Sound
There is no sound.
, Re-connect all connections securely.
, The connecting cord is damaged.
, The input source setting on the audio
component or the connection to the audio
component is incorrect.
, The recorder is in reverse play, fast-
forward, slow motion, or pause mode.
, If the audio signal does not come through
the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI
OUT jacks, check the “Audio Out” setup
(page 138).
, The recorder supports only MP3 audio,
Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for DivX
video files. Press AUDIO and select MP3
audio or MPEG audio.
No sound is output from the HDMI OUT
Additional Information
jack.
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off
and on again. 2Turn the connected
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect
and then connect the HDMI cord again.
, The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a DVI
device (DVI jacks do not accept audio
signals).
, The equipment connected to the HDMI
OUT jack does not conform to the audio
signal format. In this case, set “Audio
Output” to “PCM” in the “HDMI Output”
setup (page 148).
,continued 153
 Sound distortion occurs.
, Set “Analog Tuner Level” in the “Audio In”
setup to “Compression” (page 137).
Sound is noisy.
, When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks,
noise will come from the LINE 2 OUT R-
AUDIO-L jacks, LINE 3 – TV jack, or
LINE 1/DECODER jack (page 109).
The sound volume is low.
, The sound volume is low on some DVDs.
The sound volume may improve if you set
“Audio DRC” in the “Audio Out” setup to
“On” (page 139).
, Set “Analog Tuner Level” in the “Audio In”
setup to “Normal” (page 137).
An alternate audio track cannot be
recorded or played.
, When recording from connected
equipment, set “External Audio” to
“Bilingual” in the “Audio In” setup
(page 138).
, Multilingual tracks (main and sub) cannot
be recorded on the HDD (when Video
Mode On) DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (Video
mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video
mode). To record the language, set
“Bilingual Recording” in the “Audio In”
setup to “A/L” or “B/R” before recording
(page 138). To record both the main and sub
sounds on a disc, record on DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs (VR mode). To record on the
HDD, set “HDD Recording Format” to
“Video Mode Off” in the “Recording” setup
(page 144).
, If you have connected an audio component
to the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack
and want to change the audio track for the
HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is
set to “Video Mode Off” in the “Recording”
setup (page 144))/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs
(VR mode) during playback, set “Dolby
Digital Output” in the “Audio Out” setup to
“Dolby Digital -> PCM” (page 138).
The sound is breaking up.
, The signal strength is low.
, Check aerial installation.
154
Recording does not stop immediately
after you press x REC STOP.
, It will take a few seconds for the recorder to
input disc data before recording can stop.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
the on-screen instructions.
Recording does not stop after you press
x.
, Press x REC STOP.
Timer recording is not complete or did not
start from the beginning.
, There was a power failure during recording.
If the power recovers when there is a timer
recording, the recorder resumes recording.
Should the power failure continue for more
than 1 hour, reset the clock (page 129).
, Another timer setting overlapped the timer
setting (page 60, 78).
, Disc space was not sufficient.
, The VPS/PDC function is working.
Contents previously recorded were
erased.
, Data that is not playable on this recorder but
was recorded on a DVD with a PC will be
erased from the disc when the disc is
inserted.
The VPS/PDC function does not operate.
, Check that the clock and date are set
correctly.
, Check that the VPS/PDC time you set is
correct (there might be a mistake in the TV
programme guide). If the broadcast you
wanted to record did not send the correct
VPS/PDC information, the recorder will not
start recording.
, If the reception is poor, the VPS/PDC signal
might be altered and the recorder might not
start recording.
, The VPS/PDC function may not work if the
GUIDE Plus+ host channel setup is not
complete.
, The VPS/PDC function does not work
when the GUIDE Plus+ data is being
downloaded.
156
Playback
The recorder does not play any type of disc
(except HDD).
, The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with
the labelled side facing up.
, The disc is not correctly inserted.
, Moisture has condensed inside the recorder.
In this case, if the recorder is on, leave it on
(if it is off, leave it off) for about an hour
until the moisture evaporates.
, If the disc was recorded on another recorder
and was not finalised (page 45), the
recorder cannot play the disc.
The recorder does not start playback from
the beginning.
, Resume play was activated (page 81).
, You have inserted a DVD whose Title menu
or DVD menu automatically appears on the
TV screen when it is first inserted. Use the
menu to start playback.
The recorder starts playing automatically.
, The DVD VIDEO features an auto
playback function.
Playback stops automatically.
, If the DVD has an auto pause signal, the
recorder stops playback at the auto pause
signal.
Some functions such as Stop, Search, or
Slow-motion Play cannot be performed.
, Depending on the DVD, you may not be
able to do some of the operations above. See
the instruction manual supplied with the
disc.
The language for the sound track cannot
be changed.
, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the
DVD being played.
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of
the language for the sound track.
, Try changing the language using the DVD
VIDEO’s menu.
Dubbing
You dubbed a title, but the title did not
appear in the HDD Title List.
, The title contained a copy protection signal,
so it was moved (page 99).
High-speed dubbing is not possible.
, The title cannot be dubbed at high speed
(page 100). Even if A-B erasure is
performed so that a title does not contain
mixed picture sizes, it is still treated as a
title with mixed picture sizes.
HDD/DVD Dubbing is not possible.
, The title cannot be dubbed (page 99).
Display
The clock has stopped.
, Set the clock again (page 129).
, The clock stopped due to a power failure
that lasted for more than 1 hour. Reset the
clock (page 129).
The timer indicator is flashing.
, The disc does not have enough space.
, Insert a recordable disc into the recorder.
, The inserted DVD is protected (page 44).
The clock does not appear in the front
panel display when the recorder is turned
off.
, “Front Panel Display” is set to “Off” in the
“Options” setup (page 149).
Remote control
The remote does not function.
, Different command modes are set for the
recorder and remote. Set the same
command mode (page 149). The default
command mode setting for this recorder and
the supplied remote is DVD3. You can
check the current command mode in the
front panel display (page 149).
, The batteries are weak.
, The remote is too far from the recorder.
1-38
The subtitle language cannot be changed
or turned off.
, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on
the DVD VIDEO.
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the
subtitles.
, Try changing the subtitle using the DVD
VIDEO’s menu.
, The subtitles cannot be changed for the
titles recorded on this recorder.
The angles cannot be changed.
, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD
VIDEO being played.
, You are trying to change the angles when
“ ” does not appear on the TV screen
(page 80). To display “ ” if various
angles (multi-angles) for a scene are
recorded on the disc, set “Angle Indicator”
to “On” in the “Playback” setup (page 145).
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing
angles.
, Try changing the angle using the DVD
VIDEO’s menu.
, The angles cannot be changed for the titles
recorded on this recorder.
, The angles cannot be changed during slow
motion playback or when playback is
paused.
The DivX video files do not play.
, The file is not created in DivX format.
, The file has an extension other than “.avi”
or “.divx.”
, The DATA CD (DivX video)/DATA DVD
(DivX video) is not created in a DivX
format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/
Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or UDF (Universal
Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50, 2.00, or 2.01.
, The DivX video file format is larger than
720 (width) × 576 (height).
The MP3 audio tracks do not play.
, The MP3 audio tracks are not recorded in a
format that the recorder can play
(page 161).
The JPEG image files do not play.
, The JPEG image files are not recorded in a
format that the recorder can play
(page 161).
, Progressive JPEG images cannot be played.
, The remote’s manufacturer code returned to
the default setting when you replaced the
batteries. Reset the code (page 24).
, The remote is not pointed at the remote
sensor on the recorder.
Others
The recorder does not detect a USB device
connected to the recorder.
, Make sure that the USB device is securely
connected to the recorder (page 126).
, Check if the USB device or a cable is
damaged.
, Check if the USB device is on.
Display language on the screen switches
automatically.
, When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” in the
“HDMI Output” setup (page 148), the
display language on the screen
automatically switches, according to the
language setting of the connected TV, if
you change the language settings on your
TV, etc.
The recorder does not operate properly.
, Press down [/1 on the recorder for more
than five seconds until the recorder turns
off. Then, press [/1 again to turn on the
recorder.
, When static electricity, etc., causes the
recorder to operate abnormally, turn off the
recorder and wait until the clock appears in
the front panel display. Then, unplug the
recorder and after leaving it off for a while,
plug it in again.
The disc tray does not open after you press
Z (open/close).
, It may take a few seconds for the disc tray
to open after you have recorded or edited a
DVD. This is because the recorder is adding
disc data to the disc.
Any buttons do not function and “LOCKED”
appears in the front panel display.
, The recorder is locked. Cancel the Child
Lock (page 81, 108).
TV Pause does not work.
, You are recording to the HDD or the HDD
is full.
Recording/Timer recording/
Editing
The programme position cannot be
changed from the programme position you
are recording.
, Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”
Recording does not start immediately
after you press z REC.
, Operate the recorder only after “LOAD,”
“FORMAT,” or “INFO WRITE”
disappears from the front panel display.
Nothing was recorded even though you set
the timer setting correctly.
, There was a power failure during recording.
, The recorder’s internal clock stopped due to
a power failure that lasted for more than 1
hour. Reset the clock (page 129).
, The channel was disabled after the timer
recording was set. See “Manual CH
Setting” on page 133.
, The programme position was hidden after
the timer recording was set. (See “Disabling
programme positions” on page 70.)
, Disconnect the mains lead from the mains,
and connect it again.
, The programme contains copy protection
signals that restrict copying.
, Another timer setting overlapped the timer
setting (page 60, 78).
, There is no DVD inside the recorder.
, There is not enough disc space for the
Additional Information
recording.
, The set top box receiver was turned off.
, The set top box controller was incorrectly
connected (page 15).
, The settings in “Setup” in the Menu bar
have been changed (page 68).
, The recorder was in the process of dubbing.
, A scrambled channel is selected.
, The channel activated Parental Lock is
selected (page 146).
,continued 155
The disc tray does not open and
“TRAYLOCKED” appears in the front panel
display.
, Contact your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
“REPAIR” appears in the front panel
display.
, The recorder’s repair function is activated
to repair the hard disk drive or disc when the
recorder is turned on after a power failure
has occurred during recorder operation,
such as while recording, or when some
errors have occurred. Leave the recorder on
until “REPAIR” disappears from the front
panel display.
“E01” appears in the front panel display.
, There is a problem in the HDD. Contact
your nearest Sony dealer. Note that contents
on the HDD may be erased when servicing
this unit.
“E02” appears in the front panel display.
, A hard disk error has occurred and you
cannot make a new recording to the HDD.
Press and hold [/1 on the recorder for more
than five seconds to turn the recorder off,
then turn it on again. If “E02” still appears,
format the HDD following the instructions
of “Format HDD.” (page 128). Note that all
of the recorded contents on the HDD will be
erased. If this does not fix the problem,
contact your nearest Sony dealer.
“HDCP_ERR” appears in the front panel
display.
, The recorder is connected to an input device
Additional Information
that is not HDCP compliant. Connect the
equipment that is HDCP compliant
(page 19).
Disregard this error message if the output
picture is displayed correctly.
The Parental Lock does not work.
, Check the “D.TV Age Limit” setting in the
“Parental Lock” setup (page 146).
,continued 157
 Mechanical sounds are heard when the
recorder is off.
, While the recorder is updating the EPG
information, operational noises (such as the
internal fan) may be heard, even when the
power is off. This is not a malfunction.
, While the recorder is adjusting the clock for
the Auto Clock Set function or updating the
EPG information, operational noises may
be heard, even when the power is off. This
is not a malfunction.
Resetting the Recorder
You can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings.
1 Make sure that the recorder is turned
on and remove the disc.
2 Hold down x (stop) on the recorder
and press [/1 on the recorder.
All settings are reset and the recorder
turns off.
Notes About This
Recorder
On operation
• If the recorder is brought directly from a
cold to a warm location, or is placed in a
very damp room, moisture may condense
on the lenses inside the recorder. Should
this occur, the recorder may not operate
properly. In this case, if the recorder is on,
leave it on (if it is off, leave it off) for about
an hour until the moisture evaporates.
• When you move the recorder, take out any
discs and do not apply shock or vibration to
the hard disk drive to avoid damaging the
disc or hard disk drive (page 3).
Notes about the discs
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its
edge. Do not touch the surface. Dust,
fingerprints, or scratches on the disc may
cause it to malfunction.
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or
heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave
it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the
temperature may rise considerably inside
the car.
• After playing, store the disc in its case.
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe
the disc from the centre out.

On adjusting volume
Do not turn up the volume while listening to
a section with very low level inputs or no
audio signals. If you do, the speakers may be
damaged when a peak level section is played.
On cleaning
Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a
soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild
detergent solution. Do not use any type of
abrasive pad, scouring powder or solvent
such as alcohol or benzine.
On cleaning discs, disc/lens cleaners
Do not use cleaning discs or disc/lens
cleaners (including wet or spray types).
These may cause the recorder to
malfunction.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine,
thinner, commercially available cleaners, or
anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.
• Do not use the following discs.
– A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g.,
card, heart).
– A disc with a label or sticker on it.
– A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker
adhesive on it.
On replacement of parts
In the event that this unit is repaired, repaired
parts may be collected for reuse or recycling
purposes.

Additional Information
158 159

Inputs and outputs Operating temperature: 5ºC to 35ºC

Specifications
System
Laser: Semiconductor laser
Transmission standards (Digital
broadcasting): DVB-T
Channel coverage (Digital
broadcasting):
VHF: E5 to E12, F5 to F10, Italian D to
H2
UHF: E21 to E69, B21 to B68, F21 to
F69
Channel coverage (Analogue
broadcasting):
PAL (B/G, D/K, I)/SECAM (L)
VHF: E2 to E12, R1 to R12, F2 to F10,
Italian A to H, Ireland A to J, South
Africa 4 to 11, 13
UHF: E21 to E69, R21 to R69, B21 to
B69, F21 to F69
CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S20, France
B to Q
HYPER: S21 to S41
The above channel coverage merely ensures
the channel reception within these ranges. It
does not guarantee the ability to receive
signals in all circumstances. For details, see
“Receivable channels” (page 135).
Video reception: Frequency synthesizer
system
Audio reception: Split carrier system
Aerial out: 75-ohm asymmetrical aerial
socket
Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer
LINE 2 OUT Operating humidity: 25% to 80% Notes on MP3 Audio
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms Supplied accessories:
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p Mains lead (1) Tracks, JPEG Image
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)
Aerial cable (1)
Remote commander (remote) (1)
Files, and DivX Video
LINE 2 IN Set top box controller (1) Files
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than R6 (size AA) batteries (2)
22 kilohms
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p Specifications and design are subject to About MP3 audio tracks, JPEG
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p, change without notice. image files, and DivX video
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL) files
LINE 3 – TV: 21-pin
CVBS OUT MP3 is an audio compression technology that
S-Video/RGB OUT (upstream) satisfies certain ISO/MPEG regulations.
LINE 1/DECODER: 21-pin JPEG is an image compression technology.
You can play MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3)
CVBS IN/OUT
S-Video/RGB IN format audio tracks and JPEG image files on
the HDD or DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/
Decoder
CD-RWs) or JPEG image files on the HDD
DV IN: 4-pin/i.LINK S100 or DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono jack/ DVD+Rs/DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs).
0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms DivX® is a video file compression
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT technology, developed by DivX, Inc. This
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR): product is an official DivX® Certified
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p, product. You can play DATA CDs (CD-
PB/CB: 0.7 Vp-p, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs) and DATA DVDs
G-LINK: mini jack (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-
HDMI OUT: HDMI 19-pin-Standard RWs/DVD-Rs) that contain DivX video files.
DATA DVDs must be recorded according to
Connector
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or
USB: UDF (Universal Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50,
USB jack Type A (For connecting 2.00*, or 2.01 format for the recorder to
digital still camera, Memory card recognise the MP3 tracks, JPEG image files,
reader and USB memory) and DivX video files.
USB jack Type B (For connecting DATA CDs must be recorded according to
PictBridge-compatible printers) ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet
format for the recorder to recognise the MP3
General tracks, JPEG image files, and DivX video
Additional Information

indication: 24-hour cycle (digital)/ Power requirements: 220-240 V AC, files.

Power back-up duration: 1 hour
Video recording format: MPEG-2,
MPEG-1
Audio recording format/applicable
bit rate: Dolby Digital 2 ch
256 kbps/128 kbps (in EP, SLP, and
SEP mode), PCM
160
50/60 Hz You can also play discs recorded in
Power consumption: 49 W MultiSession/Border.
See the instructions supplied with the disc
Dimensions (approx.):
drives and the recording software (not
430 × 76.5 × 286 mm (width/height/ supplied) for details on the recording format.
depth) incl. projecting parts
Hard disk drive capacity: * Not available for MP3 audio tracks.
RDR-HXD770: 120 GB
RDR-HXD870: 160 GB Note on MultiSession/Border discs
RDR-HXD970: 250 GB If audio tracks and images in Music CD
RDR-HXD1070: 500 GB format or Video CD format are recorded in
Mass (approx.): 4.7 kg the first session/border, only the first session/
border will be played back.
,continued 161

1-39

MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image
files, or DivX video files that
the recorder can play
The recorder can play the following tracks
and files:
– MP3 audio tracks with the extension
“.mp3.”
– JPEG image files with the extension “.jpeg”
or “.jpg.”
– Baseline JPEG image files that conform to
the Exif 2.2* image files format, and
Y:CB:CR is 4:4:4, 4:2:2, or 4:2:0.
– DivX video files with the extension “.avi”
or “.divx.”
* “Exchangeable Image File Format”: The file
format used by digital still cameras.
z Hint
Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start
playback, it is recommended that you create albums
with no more than two trees.
b Notes
• The recorder will play any data with the extension
“.mp3,” “.jpeg,” “.jpg,” “.avi,” or “.divx” even if
they are not in MP3, JPEG, or DivX format.
Playing these data may generate a loud noise
which could damage your speaker system.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may not
be possible. For example, the picture may be
unclear, playback may not appear smooth, the
sound may skip, and so on.
• Depending on the disc, playback may take some
time to start.
• Some files cannot be played.
• For MP3 audio tracks and DivX video files, the
recorder can play up to 99 albums each on a
DATA CD or DATA DVD. Up to 99 tracks and
files under an album can be played.
• For JPEG image files, the recorder can load up to
99 albums and/or up to 999 files under an album
• The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in
mp3PRO format.
• The recorder cannot play a DivX video file of a
size larger than 720 (width) × 576 (height)/4 GB.
• The recorder may not play a DivX video file
when the file has been combined from two or
more DivX video files.
Notes on copying JPEG image files/MP3
audio tracks
• You cannot copy JPEG image files/MP3 audio
tracks to the HDD if:
– The total number of JPEG image albums on the
HDD exceeds 999.
– The total number of JPEG image files/MP3
audio tracks under an album exceeds 999.
– The MP3 audio tracks are 1 GB or larger.
• Note that the size of JPEG image files copied to
the HDD may be automatically increased to fit the
TV screen.
• You cannot copy JPEG image files onto a DATA
DVD finalised on other recorders or devices.
• If a warning message indicating that the HDD is
full appears, erase several albums or files to make
space. For details on erasing tracks or files, see
page 117 or 125.
About i.LINK
The DV IN jack on this recorder is i.LINK-
compliant for digital video cameras. This
section describes the i.LINK standard and its
features.
What is i.LINK?
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for
handling digital video, digital audio and other
data in two directions between equipment
having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling
other equipment.
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be
connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible
applications are operations and data
transactions with various digital AV
equipment. When two or more i.LINK-
compatible equipment are connected to this
recorder in a daisy chain, operations and data
transactions are possible with not only the
equipment that this recorder is connected to
but also with other devices via the directly
connected equipment.
Note, however, that the method of operation
sometimes varies according to the
characteristics and specifications of the
equipment to be connected, and that
operations and data transactions are
sometimes not possible on some connected
equipment.
b Note
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be
connected to this recorder by the i.LINK cable (DV
connecting cable). When connecting this recorder
to i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or
more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), see the instruction
manual of the equipment to be connected.
i.LINK baud rate
i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies
according to the equipment. Three maximum
baud rates are defined:
S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*)
S200 (approx. 200 Mbps)
S400 (approx. 400 Mbps)
The baud rate is listed under “Specifications”
in the instruction manual of each equipment.
It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on
some equipment.
The maximum baud rate of equipment on
which it is not indicated such as this unit is
“S100.”
When units are connected to equipment
having a different maximum baud rate, the
baud rate sometimes differs from the
indicated baud rate.
* What is Mbps?
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the
amount of data that can be sent or received in one
second. For example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps
means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in
one second.
i.LINK functions on this
recorder
For details on how to dub when this recorder
is connected to other video equipment having
DV jacks, see page 104.
The DV jack on this recorder can only input
DVC-SD signals. It cannot output signals.
The DV jack will not accept MICRO MV
signals from equipment such as a MICRO
MV digital video camera with an i.LINK
jack.
For further precautions, see the notes on

Additional Information
on a DATA CD/DATA DVD or the connected page 104.
USB device at a time. To view unloaded albums,
About the name “i.LINK” For details on precautions when connecting
reload them. this recorder, also see the instruction manuals
• Proceeding to the next or another album may take i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394
for the equipment to be connected.
some time. data transport bus proposed by SONY, and is
• The image size that can be displayed is limited. a trademark approved by many corporations.
The following image sizes can be displayed: IEEE 1394 is an international standard Required i.LINK cable
width 160–5,120 pixels by height 120–3,840 standardized by the Institute of Electrical and
pixels. Electronics Engineers. Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable.
• This recorder supports MP3 audio tracks
i.LINK and are trademarks.
recorded with a sampling frequency of 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
• No more than a 1 GB MP3 audio track can be
played.

162 163

wl PLAY MODE button (84, 89, 109, es TV PROG (programme) +/– buttons
Guide to Parts and Controls 111) (24)
The + button has a tactile dot*.
e; TV t (input select) button (24)
For more information, see the pages in parentheses.
ea TV 2 (volume) +/– buttons (24) * Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating
the recorder.
Remote
J TV/DVD button (24) Front panel
K SUBTITLE button (82)
L (text) button (51)
M MENU button (80)
N Colour buttons (48, 65)
O SYSTEM MENU button (76, 85, 100,
106, 112, 118, 128)
TITLE LIST button (38, 80, 92)
TOP MENU button (80)
GUIDE button (48, 63)
A [/1 (on/standby) button (26) K PROGRAM +/– buttons (36)
P TIMER button (53, 60)
The + button has a tactile dot*.
B (remote sensor) (24)
Q INFO (information) button (48, 63) L INPUT (input select) button (61, 79)
C Disc tray (36)
R </M/m/,/ENTER button (26) M LINE 2 IN (S VIDEO/VIDEO/
D Front panel display (166)
S O RETURN button (26) L(MONO) AUDIO R) jacks (32)
EXIT button (131) E Z (open/close) button (36)
N ONE-TOUCH DUB button (106)
T DISPLAY button (40) F N (play) button (80, 108, 124)
O DV IN jack (104)
The N button has a tactile dot*.
U / (instant replay/instant P USB jack (type A) (112, 118)
advance) buttons (82) G x (stop) button (80, 108, 114, 124)
H z REC button (36) Q PictBridge USB jack (type B) (126)
V ./> (previous/next) buttons (82,
108, 115) I x REC STOP button (36) * Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating
PAGE +/– buttons (48, 65) the recorder.
J HDD button/indicator (36)
W mc / CM (search/slow/ DVD button/indicator (36)
A HDD button (36) freeze frame) buttons (82, 108, 115)
DVD button (36) DAY +/– buttons (65)
B [/1 (on/standby) button (26) X H (play) button (80, 108, 124)
Additional Information

C Z (open/close) button (36) X (pause) button (82, 108, 115, 124)

x (stop) button (80, 108, 114, 124)
D PROG (programme) +/– buttons (36) The H button has a tactile dot*.
The + button has a tactile dot*.
Y TV PAUSE button (87)
E Number buttons (42, 89)
The number 5 button has a tactile dot*. Z z REC button (36)
x REC STOP button (36)
F INPUT (input select) button (61, 79) HDD/DVD DUB button (99)
G AUDIO button (82, 108) REC MODE button (36)
The AUDIO button has a tactile dot*. wj ZOOM button (124)
H CLEAR button (42, 84, 109, 110)
wk TV [/1 (on/standby) button (24)
I ANGLE button (80, 125)
164 ,continued 165

1-40
 Front panel display Language Code List
For details, see page 140.
The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.

Number Language Number Language Number Language

(code) (code) (code)

A Displays the following: D Timer indicator (73)

• Playing time
• Current title/chapter/track/index
number
• Recording time/recording mode
• Clock
• Programme position
• EPG indication (63)
“EPG” appears when receiving the
GUIDE Plus+ data.
• TV Direct Rec. indication (36):
“TV” appears in the right most two
digits.
B NTSC indicator (130, 137)
CVPS/PDC indicator (78)
E Disc type
Lights when a recordable DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc is loaded.
F Command Mode indicator (149)
Displays the Command Mode of the
remote.
When the Command Mode for the
recorder is set to DVD3 (default), either
“1” or “2” does not appear.
G Recording status
H Dubbing direction indicator
I Playing status

Rear panel

A ANALOG AERIAL IN/OUT jacks
(15)
B LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L/VIDEO)
jacks (19, 22)
C LINE 1/DECODER jack (31)
D G-LINK jack (17)
E DIGITAL AERIAL IN/OUT jacks
(15)
Additional Information
F HDMI OUT (high-definition
multimedia interface out) jack (19, 22)
G DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack (22)
H AC IN terminal (23)
I LINE 3 – TV jack (19)
J LINE 2 OUT (S VIDEO) jack (19)
K COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR) jacks (19)

166 167

Country/Area Code
For details, see page 145.

Number Area (Code) Number Area (Code)

0118 Argentina (ar) 1325 Malaysia (my)
0121 Australia (au) 1324 Mexico (mx)
0120 Austria (at) 1412 Netherlands (nl)
0205 Belgium (be) 1426 New Zealand (nz)
0218 Brazil (br) 1415 Norway (no)
0301 Canada (ca) 1611 Pakistan (pk)
0312 Chile (cl) 1608 Philippines (ph)
0314 China (cn) 1620 Portugal (pt)
0411 Denmark (dk) 1821 Russia (ru)
0609 Finland (fi) 1907 Singapore (sg)
0618 France (fr) 0519 Spain (es)
0405 Germany (de) 1905 Sweden (se)
0811 Hong Kong (hk) 0308 Switzerland (ch)
0914 India (in) 2023 Taiwan (tw)
0904 Indonesia (id) 2008 Thailand (th)
0920 Italy (it) 0702 United Kingdom (gb)
1016 Japan (jp) 2119 USA (us)
1118 Korea (kr)

168

1-41
MEMO

1-42E
 RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.

Set

Upper case
(Page 2-2)

Tray cover assembly Hard disk

(Page 2-2) (Page 2-5)

Front panel section

(Page 2-3)

FR-274 board,
DVD drive
FL-178 board
(Page 2-4)
(Page 2-3)

Power supply block DC fan AV-114 board DT-120 board

(Page 2-6) (Page 2-4) (Page 2-5) (Page 2-6)

2-1
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. UPPER CASE

4 Upper case

2 Tapping screw

3 Three screws
(special front point screw)

1 Tapping screw

2-2. TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY

Hole

3 Two claws

1 The stiff wire

2 Open the tray

4 Tray cover assembly

2-2
2-3. FRONT PANEL SECTION

1 Three claws

2 Four claws

3 Front panel section

2-4 FR-274 BOARD, FL-178 BOARD

3 Connector (10p) 4 Connector (6p)

(CN102) (CN101)
2 The wire pin that holds (except GX350)
the harness is set up.

6 FL-178 board

5 Two screws
(+BV3)

1 Flexible flat cable 7 Three screws

(FLR-012) (5core) 9 Flexible flat cable
(+BV3)
(17core)(CN203)

8 Flexible flat cable

(11core)(CN202)
q; FR-274 board

2-3
2-5. DVD DRIVE

qh Four screws 6 Harness (7p)

5 Connector (13p) (+BV3) (CN5604)
(CN201) qg Two screws
4 Connector (4p) (+BV3)
(CN203)
ql

ws Two screws
(+PSW3 × 6)

wd Clamp (L35)

wf Connector (13p) qf Remove the harness.

(CN4501)
wa Connector (6p)
(CN5101)
wg DVD drive
8 Screw (+P3)
9 Screw (+BV3)
w; Connector (10p)
(CN5201) q; Screw (+P3 × 4)
3 Connector (6p)
(CN101) qa Six screws (+BV3)

2 Connector (10p)
(CN102) qs Screw (+P3 × 4)
(except GX350)

1 The wire pin that holds

the harness is set up.

qk Rear panel

qd Flexible flat cable (40core)

7 Flexible flat cable (28core) (CN2301)
(CN4701)
qj Connector (2p)
(CN103)

2-6. DC FAN

1 Two screws
(+BV3)

2 DC fan

Air flow

2-4
2-7. HARD DISK

3 Screw (+BV3)
and wire clamp

2 Screw (+BV3)
1 Two screws (+BV3)

8 Hard disk

7 Two screws
6-32UNCX4(SG)
6 Two screws
5 Harness (7pin) 6-32UNCX4(SG)
(power)
4 Harness (4pin)
(data)

2-8. AV-114 BOARD

4 Flexible flat cable (FRA-006)

7 Two screws (40core)(CN101)
(+BV3)

6 Two screws
(+BV3)

5 Earth plate

8 AV-114 board

3 Flexible flat cable (FAD-008)

(24core) (CN302)

1 Flexible flat cable 2 Flexible flat cable

(11core) (CN106) (17core) (CN105)

2-5
2-9. DT-120 BOARD

3 Three screws (+BV3)

4 Three screws (+BV3)

5 Flexible flat cable (FVR-001) 6 DT-120 (AG) board (EXCEPT AEP2)

(28core)(CN104) DT-120 (BG) board (AEP2)

2 Connector (12p)
(CN202)

1 Flexible flat cable (24core)

(CN106)

2-10.POWER SUPPLY BLOCK

2 Three screws (+BV3) 1 Connector (12p)

(CN202)

5 Power supply block

3 Two board holders

4 Spacer

2-6
2-11.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

RD-65 board
Power supply block
DT-120 board

FL-178 board

AV-114 board
FR-274 board

2-7
MEMO

2-8E
 RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM

CN201
AEP2 model
CI SLOT

MD0-7
MA0-14
DT-120 BOARD P-CONT

MDO0-7
MDI0-7
IC101
3 3 12
IC205 IC104
IC203,204 IC202 256Mbit
27MHz X100
32Mbit DDR SDRAM
27MHz 27MHz EV+12V D101-104
X300
LATCH BUFFER FLASH ROM 3
VCXO RD-065 BOARD EV+5.8V RECT

D0-15
A0-12
U301 20MHz

ED0-15
EA2-22
13 JA5701 SW+12V

ED8-15
SDA SDA SDA
TDXA SWITCHING AC IN

EA1-15
DTT SCL SCL SCL SW+5V
AERIAL RDXA DIGITAL REGULATOR FU101
TUNER
XCOFDM_RESET IC201 ED0-15 ED0-15
OUT SW+3.3V
IN IC313 SPDIF
IC321 IC5701 SW+1.5V
OUT
CI EA16-22 EA1-22 IC106 SPDIFO_LL
IF
IC311 IF
OFDM CONTROLLER
BUFFER SPDIF SEL
DEMODULATOR
EMMA
AGC TS1_0-7 CI_TPS_0-7
STREAM_0-7 STREAM_0-7
SWITCHING REGULATOR (SRV-2057EK)
TXD0_LL
3 3 RXD0_LL
VCLK SO, SI, SCLK IC200
DVD
10 SDA EEPROM OPTICAL
SCL ADATA IC4703 AIOBD PICK-UP
XCOFDM_RESET ABCK IC322 AIOBCK SI, SCLK BLOCK
ALRCK BUFFER AIOLRCK
XRESET W2EN+,W2EN-,
AEP1,AEP3, IC110 SPDIF W3EN+,W3EN-,
UK,AUS model 27MHz W1EN+,W1EN-,
OSCEN+,OSCEN- LD
X1001
24.576MHz DRIVER
D0-15 IC4701 5
R,G,B B, G
IC1002
AV-114 BOARD SDRAM A0-10
BUFFER
R LASER
STREAM_0-7 STREAM_0-7 VIOD0-VIOD7 FMO+, FMO-
R/C FRONT
41
C 7
IC1001 MONITOR
R,G,B R,G,B
JA501(2/2) V/Y,C
B,G VIDEO VCLK VCLK IC1001
R/C DECODER SDA_VDEC
LINE 3/DECODER Y AV ENC/DEC RF+,RF-
L,R Y SCL_VDEC
L,R Y PHOTO
XRESET IC4702 A, B, C, D, S1, S2, S3, S4 DETECTOR

FUNCTION IC403 BUFFER

XRESET
N-LINK SDA_VDEC
FAN-
22 IC401 SELECTOR FAN SCL_VDEC 4
TU_V Y,C DRIVE
VIDEO AUDIO
IC406 TU_L
TU_R SELECTER
V
FAN XRESET
PY,PB,PR
AVLTH SW SDA
SCL
20 YP,CR,,CB YP,CR,,CB
R,G,B
Y,C Y,C TDRV T+,T- TRACKING
V/Y,C COIL
JA501(1/2) R,G,B
LINE 1-TV
V/Y,C IC402 FDRV F+,F- FOCUS
L,R COIL
BUFFER 4
L,R IC3101
FUNCTION L,R L,R L,R AIBD0 MDRV
AUDIO ADC XDMUTE1
N-LINK XDMUTE2 U,V,W
1 Y,C
IC501 HU+,HU-
M
V L,R L,R L,R AOD0 SPINDLE
L,R IC3201 FG TRACKING COIL DRIVE
HV+,HV-
HW+,HW-
MOTOR
5
AUDIO DAC FOCUS COIL DRIVE
SPINDLE MOTOR DRIVE
H
XRST1 IC104 IC3203 SLED MOTOR DRIVE
LOADING MOTOR DRIVE ST1+,ST1-,
DDC SW AUDIO LPF SL1,SL2 SLED
ST2+,ST2-
SDA
M MOTOR
X101
SDA SCL 16.9344MHz
FUNCTION SCL LD LDO+,LDO- LOADING
SW 2 M MOTOR
P-CONT
FANCTL X1001 OPEN
AEP,UK only N-LINK IC3702 24.576MHz OPEN
MRST CLOSE
JA751 CLOSE
XRST1 XRESET
G LINK
X101 CEC, HPD
15MHz
IC101
TU_V 6 JA401 4
IT
Y
U601 IC103 CONTROLLER
S VIDEO
SDA IC101 VDD C 2
UHF/VHF
TUNER SCL IC101 VDD DET IC3707
AERIAL V+1R5_IN
IC601 TU_L V VIDEO RESET IC3701 CN3801
IN TU_R LINE2 OUT
AT0DAT10-15 AT0DAT10-15
SIF
OUT L IDE I/F
EURO MSP AUDIO L
X601 IC102 13 13
18.432MHz MSPSTAT V+5V
POWER FAIL R
X102 AUDIO R DDATA0-31 XRESET
DET
32.768KHz
X1002 IC1201
27MHz
AGC, MSPSTAT PY Y DADRS0-12
IC1221
AGC X5602
COMPONENT
IC5204 25MHz
KEY1-3 PB EV+5.8V 512Mbit x2
CB VIDEO 5V REG DDR SDRAM IC5602
OUT MD0-15 17 TXP,TXN
PR
CR
IC201
MA0-11
AT1DAT10-15 SATA
BRIDGE
RXP,RXN HDD
64Mbit
JA402 IC5202 SDRAM
8
HDATA0-15
IC1102
XRESET
13 UNIT
5V SW X5101 HADRS1-22
24.576MHz 64Mbit
J201
FL-178 BOARD FLASH ROM
Y 3 2
S VIDEO
S201,203,204,
KEY1-3
IC5103 PHY D0-7 CN3802
C S207-213 S101 AT1DAT10-15 AT1DAT10-15
KEY1,2
FUNCTION POWER DV PHY IDE HDD
LINE2 IN
V
SWITCH S102
ONE TOUCH DUB
IC101 7 13 TXD,RXD 13
VIDEO IR REMOTE
L COMMANDER X5201 XRESET
AUDIO L RECEIVER 48MHz
CN104
(MONO) D212,214 USBDM2 XTAL OSC
R HDD,DVD USB USBDP2
AUDIO R IC201 FLDATA ATYPE IC5801 JA5801
V+5USB
SEG1-16
FL DRIVE
FLCLK IC5802
GRD1-12 FLSTB
15
CN105 USBDM1 SDA
USBDP1 SCL
ND201 USB
VEE
BTYPE USBVFB
FLUORESCENT
DISPLAY IC5203 CEC, HPD
Q201,202
F1,F2
T201 V+12V
DC/AC CN103
TPAP,TPAN
CONVERTER DV TPBP,TPBN
FR-274 BOARD IN

Abbreviation Note1: The HDMI block is highly confidential, and prohibited from releasing to public.
AUS:Australian model. Note2: The components identified by mark 9 contain confidential information.
Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and/or replaced.

3-1 3-2
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

3-2. AV-114 BLOCK DIAGRAM

Q509

AV-114 BOARD BUFFER

Q510
BTOMAIN

B_IN
6
B_IN

GTOMAIN G_IN TO
BUFFER 4 DT-120 BOARD
G_IN (CN103(1/2))

U601 UHF/VHF
Q511
RTOMAIN
Q408
2
C/R_IN
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
BUFFER BUFFER
TUNER Q411
C/R_IN
IC401 (3/5)
Q601 D420
TU_VIN RCSEL1 Y_IN
AERIAL
VIDEO OUT BUFFER 8
IN
VIDEO/AUDIO SELECTOR
IC601 (5/5) Q410
CN302

EURO MSP
DVD C OUT 59 BUFFER
Q606 Q604 Q413
TU_LIN RCSEL2
SIF OUT AMP 2 AIN1+ DACML 27 BUFFER
AERIAL 18 BS IN JA401
OUT Q605 87 A TUNER IN(L)
X601 5 XIN
TU_RIN
18.432MHz DACMR 26 BUFFER 86 A TUNER IN(R) Y2 OUT 36
S VIDEO
6 XOUT SDA C2 OUT 34
13
SCL 12
22 RESETQ MSPSTAT
DC01 8
V2 OUT 32 VIDEO

Q602
XRST1 IC101 (1/5)
LINE2 OUT
AGC AUDIO L IT CONTROLLER
AGC OUT BUFFER
Q406
AEP,UK
SDA
Q751,752 JA751
SCL
BLAIR 45 SW
IC103 (1/5)
AUDIO R G LINK
Q404
2Y Y2 IN AMUTE1
4 7 SEP Y2 IN IC101 VDD IC101 VDD DET
XAMUTE2 MUTE
2C C2 IN
1 9 SEP C2 IN Q407 RFTHRU
RFTHRU 52
2 IN OUT 1 43 CAPACITOR FANCTL
FANCTL 54
SDET2 2 SDET2 PY(Y) OUT 40 Y TUON
TUON 60
SWVION9V
TO/FROM COMPONENT SWVION9V 61
2V 2VIN P_CONT
FR-274 BOARD 6 14 VIDEO L2 IN Pb(Cb) OUT 38 CB VIDEO P_CONT 62
(CN202) X101 SWVION5V
OUT
15MHz SWVION5V 64
(SEE PAGE 3-9) TU_DCCON
2L L2_LIN Pr(Cr) OUT 39 CR IC102 (1/5) 12 CF1 TU_DCCON 74
8 92 A L2 IN(L) POWER FAIL DET
V+5V
13 CF2
(SEE
2R L2_RIN JA402
2 IN OUT 1 5 ACDET "POWER BLOCK
10 91 A L2 IN(R)
DIAGRAM")
CN106 51 2 YP_OUT
F DVD PY (G)
4 CR_OUT
F DVD PR (R) 52 CN302(2/2)
CB_OUT X102
41 41 V/Y IN AV2_V/Y_IN F DVD PB (B) 53 6 DT_TUON
32.768kHz 10 TO
12 VIDEO L3 IN Y_OUT DTBON 85
36 R/C IN R/CIN F DVD Y 55 8 9 TX1 ANT5V_SW DT-120 BOARD
49 RorC IN C_OUT ANT5V_SW 86 11 (CN103(2/2))
32 G IN GIN F DVD C 57 10 DET_ANT
48 G IN Y_IN DET_ANT 87 12 (SEE PAGE 3-5)
28 B IN/C OUT BIN DVD VorY OUT 61 12 10 TX2
50 B IN 4
40 V/Y OUT AV2_V/YOUT
JA501 (2/2) 22 AV2 OUT 2 AUS only CN105
37 BLANKING_IN BLANK 6 FLPON
LINE3-DECODER 60 PAL SCART IN B_IN SDET2 1
18 SDET2 FLON 63
31 N-LINK BLANK 1 24 FLDATA
G_IN XAMUTE2 6
16 XAMUTE2 FLDATA 49
29 FUNCTION SW IN FUNC_IN RCSEL2 33 FLCLK
C/R_IN RCSEL1 7
14 RCSEL1 FLCLK 51
27 L IN AV2_L_IN 34 FLSTB
90 A L3 IN(L)
23 R IN AV2_R_IN
89 A L3 IN(R)
IC403 (3/5) TO/FROM
RD-065 BOARD
RCSEL2
P_SAVE
35 RCSEL2 FLSTB
LED_HDD2
50
97
LED_HDD2
8
10
24 L OUT AV2_L_OUT SELECTOR L_OUT 46 P_SAVE LED_A_TV
72 A AV2/OUT(L) F A DVD (L) 77 20 (CN2301(1/2)) CSYNCIN Q108 LED_A_TV 96 11
22 R OUT AV2_R_OUT R_OUT 67 CSYNCIN LED_D_TV TO/FROM
22 71 A AV2/OUT(R) F A DVD (R) 76 22 (SEE PAGE 3-7) BLANK LED_D_TV 95 12
BLANK FR-274 BOARD
72 LED_DIVX
Q507 IC406 (4/5) TO DVD (L) 80
3
+ 1 L_IN
FUNC_ON
41 FUNC_ON LED_DIVX 94
LED_PLTV
13 (CN203)
(SEE PAGE 3-9)
2 AVLTH SW 2 26 SQU LED_PLTV 93 14
_ 42 SQUEEZE KEY1
AVLTH FUNC_IN Q102 KEY1 17 15
4 22 FUNC KEY2
AVLOUT KEY2 18 16
BUFFER 26 AVLOUT KEY3
5
TO DVD (R) 79 + AVLTH KEY3 19 17
1 7 R_IN 48 AVLTH IR
6 _ 24
20 V/Y_IN AV1_V/Y_IN AVLIN IR 7 2
20 AVLIN
16 VIDEO L1 IN 70
19 V/Y_OUT AV1_V/Y_OUT CN101 (1/2) MSPSTAT
30 Y1 OUT 71 MSPSTAT
15 R/C_OUT R/COUT Q401 AGC CN101 (2/2)
45 Pr(Cr)/RorC OUT AGC
11 G_OUT GOUT
46 PY(Y)G OUT V C&S C3 IN 1 SW
P_SAVE
IC402 (3/5) 20
P_CONT2 57 28
P_CONT2

7 BOUT MRST
B_OUT BUFFER 65 29
JA501 (1/2) 44 Pb(Cb)/B OUT CSYNCIN
MRST
16 BLANKING_OUT RGBOUT Q402 XRST1
SYNC 41 XRST 29 30
LINE1-TV DAM_TO_T
10 N-LINK 54 RGB M OUT Q403 Q110-112 31
BUFFER TEXTVIN DAM_TO_T 99
8 HSM_TO_T
FUNCTION_SW_OUT 81 CVBSIN 6 32
BUFFER EQ HSM_TO_T
6 AV1_L_IN DAT_TO_M
L_IN 98 33
94 A L1 IN(L) DAT_TO_M
2 AV1_R_IN ASCK
IC104 (1/5)
R_IN 34 TO/FROM
93 A L1 IN(R) 59 EPGEQ ASCK 100 RD-065 BOARD
3 AV1_L_OUT HST_TO_M
L_OUT SDA 42 79 35 (CN2301(2/2))
74 A AV1/OUT(L) DDC SW HST_TO_M
1 AV1_R_OUT DDC_SW1
R_OUT SCL 43 DDC_SW1 37 39 (SEE PAGE 3-7)
1 73 A AV1/OUT(R) HPD
14 40
12 SDA HOTPLUG 73
Q506 Q508 27 DSDA
13 36
SAMUTE 28 SCL DSCL
SAMUTE 38
11 69 CEC0 CEC
9 37
38 DDC_SW2 AMUTE1
10 23
Q505
X525P
AVLOUT 5 Q103-105 1
SW 47 XSCMUTE
7
6 SAMUTE SAMUTE 58 MUTECTL
Q503,504 1 AMUTE1 TXD1
CONTROL
AVLIN TXD1 75 3
SW RXD1
RXD1 76 4
RESET CN103
V+5R8E 6
DBGP0 FOR CHECK
Q501,502 Q101 DBGP0
FUNC_ON 92 7
DBGP1
FUNCTION RESET 8 RESET DBGP1 91 8
SW SQU DBGP2
DBGP2 90 9

AMUTE1

XRST1

Abbreviation
AUS:Australian model.

3-3 3-4
 RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

3-3. DT-120 BLOCK DIAGRAM

DT-120 BOARD
AEP1,AEP3,UK,AUS model

I2C_SDA_DTBR
SDA 30 117 SDA0
I2C_SCL_DTBR
SCL 31 118 SCL0

XCOFDM_RESET
IC106
105 PPORT20 EMMA

IC201 X100
(1/5)
27MHZ
CI
27MHz
1 XTB IC104 CO 5 137 CLK27IN
X300 CONTROLLER
20MHz 27MHz
U301 56 XCOFDM_RESET (2/5) 8 XT VCXO VC 3 141 PWMOUT IC321 (1/5)
2
DTT
57
(1/5) BUFFER
TUNER T300 F319 CN102
OE 19
PPORT30
IF OUT 4 4 2 IC311 7 39 IC313 25 40 MDI0 MDO0 53
5-10, PPORT4 | 9 11 21
BALUN SAW | TS1_0-7 | | | | CI_TPS_0-7 | PPORT35, 119-124, STREAM0-7 | | STREAM0-7 VDO0-7 |
AERIAL 6 1 AGC OFDM 14,15
FILTER 32 47 MDI7 MDO7 60 PPORT11 PPORT38, 127,128 2 8 8 18
DEMODULATOR 14
IN IF OUT 3 5 3
(3/5) 6 38
PPORT39
2 (3/5) TS1_8 CI_TPS_8
4 TS1_10 CI_TPS_10
17 TS1_9 50 MICLK
MISTRT
MOCLK
MOSTRT
63 CI_TPS_9 1 PPORT0
PPORT3
IC322 (1/5)
21 49 62 4
63 3 MIVAL MOVAL 3 3 PPORT1
BT(+32V) V+32V Q305 18 48 61 2
VCLK VCLK VCLK
AERIAL B1(+5V) VA+5V
54 IC110 (1/5) PPORT40 129 2 1 12
CI_27MHZ
OUT CLK 35 4
4 2 Q312
SDA I2C_SDA_DTBR
SDA 33 16
SCL I2C_SCL_DTBR TO/FROM
SCL 34 15
ADATA RD-065 BOARD
ADO 72 (CN4701)
24
ABCK ABCK (SEE PAGE 3-7)
2,4,5,7,8,10, 212-208, 70 25
B2(+5V) DQ0
DQ0 11,13,54,56, 204-202, ALRCK ALRCK
DQ0-15 | 73 23
| 57,59,60,62, 166,165,
ADRS DQ15 159-154 DQ15
63,65
TDXA TDXA
190-187, RXD1B 145 6
A0 29-32, DADD0 RDXA
IC312 IC101 | 35-40, DADRS0-12 183-178,
191,174,
|
DADD12
TXD1B 146
RDXA
SDA_VDEC
7
A12 28,41,42
AEP2 model 173 3
5V REG 256Mbit SCL_VDEC
94,96, DDR SDRAM 4
(3/5) 47-50, 99,103,
MDIA0 AT/XDT
1
53-56
MDI0-7 107,112,
|
MDIA7
(1/5) BA0, BA1
CK, /CK
26, 27
45, 46
193,192
171,170
DBA0,DBA1
DCLK,DCLKB ATX 71
SPDIF SPDIF
27
V+5.8E 1 VIN VOUT 5 114,116 /WE 21 199 DWEB XRESET
MCLKI RSTSWB XRESET
CONT /CAS 22 198 DCASB 143 9
MISTRT
20 MDI8 /RAS 23 197 DRASB
3 IC309 46
MIVAL 110
92 MDI10 /CS 24 13 196 DCSB
5V SW 19 3 MDI9 CKE 44 170 DCKE
105
LDM, UDM 20, 47 200,169 DQM0,DQM1
(3/5) 1,3, MDOA0
LDQS, UDQS 16, 51 201,167 DQS0,DQS1
64-66, MDO0-7 5,74, | ROY2 97-94,
5 1 37-41 76,78, MDOA7 91,90,
EC9 | STREAM0-7
80,84 ROY9 87,86
FLAG 3 MCLKO EC10
MOSTRT CS LLA22 GCCB0
DT_TUON 4 57 118 MDO8 18 65 VCLK
MOVAL MAIT/ACK CI_RESET GRDYB
13 63 127 MDO9 15 74 ROCK 101
TO/FROM AN5V_SW 3 MDO10 A22 26 4 4 61 RADD22
12 62 125
AV-114 BOARD RESET 34 108 PPORT23
DET_ANT CE1# INT_CI
(CN302 (2/2)) 11 INT_CI SDA_VDEC
OE# INT 14 100 PPORT15
(SEE PAGE 3-4) WE# EC8 SDA 72
CN103 (2/2) Q308 Q306,307,309,310 SCL_VDEC
CE2# RD/DIR 17 EC6 SCL 71
PROTECT 7 IORD# 16 XRESET
82 MDC1 WR/STR 2 RSTB
DET IOWR# 74
9 88 MDC3
15 RESET MDC6
97 XRESET
42 REG# MDC2
87 12 RESET
44 CD2# MDC4
89
45
58
9 90 MDC5
MDC8
IC205 EC7 EC7
120 66
61
67
123
7
MDC10
MDC11 67
32Mbit
FLASH ROM CE# 26
EC8
EC6
EC8
EC6 64 FCSB0 IC1001
CN201 IREQ# OE# 28 62 FOEB
68 3 3 VIDEO
CI SLOT 16
CD1#
WAIT# 101 MDC7 69
(2/5) WE# 11 63 FWEB
DECODER
36 72 MDC0 DQ0-15
59 3
122 MDC9 A15-21
29,31,33,35,
A0-20
25-19,
(5/5)
Abbreviation 19-25 38,40,42,44, 8-1,48,
30,32,34,36, 17,16,
AUS:Australian model. 39,41,43,45 9,10

IC202 (2/5)

ED0-15

EA2-22
EA16-22
BUFFER 51,49,46,42, 2,3,5,6,8,9,
SDRDQ0 40,36,34,30,
SDRDQ0-15 11,12,39,40, DQ0
| 31,35,37,41, |
D0-7 OE 19 42,43,45,46,
SDRDQ15 43,47,50,52 DQ15
48,49
2 18 RDATA00
30-32, 16-26, |
MD0-7 | 8 8 | ED8-15 ED0-15 29-33
2-6 11 RDATA015
9
A0
DIR SDRA0 19,18, 21-24,
1 SDRA0-10 |
| 15-12, 27-32, A9
SDRA10 10-6,4 19 BA IC1002
A0-14 OE 1 SDRAM
29-22,
12,11, 2,5,6, Q0
9,12,15, |
D0 3,4,7, 34-41,
45-52,
RADD0 SDRABP 4 20 A10/AP (5/5)
8,10, MA0-14 | 8,13,14, EA1-15 EA1-22 | SDRWE 29 15 XWE
21,13, 16,19 Q7 D7 17,18 55-61 RADD21 SDRCAS 28 16 XCAS
14 SDRRAS 22 17 XRAS
LE 11
IC208 (2/5) SDRCS
SDRCLK
20
25
7 18
35
XCS
CLK
5V SW SDRCKE 21 34 CKE
IC203,204 (2/5) 6 1 CI+5V
LATCH 7 2
Q203 Q202
3
VCC XCI_VCC_5V
17,51 113 PPORT26

VS1# Q201 CI_VS1 158 ASCI

43 104 PPORT19
Q1004,1008 XO 54
B_IN X1001
19 LPF 164 ABI 24.576MHz
XI 55
Q1003,1007
G_IN
FROM 21 160 AGI
LPF
AV-114 BOARD
(CN302 (1/2))
Q1001,1005
(SEE PAGE 3-4) C/R_IN
23 LPF 172 ARI

Q1002,1006
Y_IN
17 148 AVI
LPF
CN103 (1/2)

3-5 3-6
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

3-4. RD-065 BLOCK DIAGRAM

RD-065 BOARD
DVD
IC1001 (2/7,4/7 to 7/7 ) OPTICAL
PICK-UP
AV ENC/DEC BLOCK

CN4701 IC4701 (2/7) PKPULSEP1P,

PKPULSEP1M
AH2, AH1
W2EN+. W2EN-
2 27, 28
AF24,AE24, W3EN+, W3EN- CN3801 24,26,28,30, V14,U11,U12,W15,
8 9 12 AE21,AD24, VIOD0 PKPULSEP2P, AJ4, AJ3 29, 30 32,34,36,38,
AT0D00
STREAM0-7 | PKPULSEP2M 2 V11,T12,P13,R15, |
| | | VIOD0-7 AF23,AD23, LD IDE I/F AT0DATA0-15
8 8 W1EN+, W1EN- 37,35,33,31, R13,V10,P15,U13, 17,15,13,11,
15 2 18 AC24,AC22 VIOD7 WRPULSEP, AH4, AH3 31, 32 DRIVER 29,27,25,23
AT0D015
9,7,5,3,
WRPULSEM 2 R14,U15,W13,T14 AT1DATA0-15 DD0-15
OSCEN+, OSCEN- 4,6,8,10,
HFONP,HFONM AH5, AJ5 33, 34 AT0DA0
2 6, W14 12,14,16,18

VCLKI 1 IC4702 (2/7) PB4 AE6

LDDEN
35 8,
AT0ADR0-2
3
U10 |
AT0DA2
4 W3SET 5 AT0CS0 U14 35,
17 AB20 VIOCLK PLED AE11 36 AT1ADR0-2 DA0-2
2
W2SET AT0CS1 33, CN3802
AF11 37 AT0CS0B AT1CS0 3 CS0#
P2LD 4 AT0DMARQ W12 36
W1SET 3 AT0DIOW W11 AT0CS1B AT1CS1 CS1# IDE HDD
WLD AE9 38
AT0DMARQ
IC4703 (2/7) APCV RSET 20 AT0DIOR T15 AT1DMARQ DMRQ 37
RLD AF8 39 18 AT0RESET P14 AT0DIOWB AT1DIOW DIOW# 38
FMO+, FMO- LASER AT0DIORB
AGP, AG8 17, 18 FRONT 16 6 R12 AT1DIOR DIOR# 21
FPDVI, PDIN 2 AT0RESETB
ADATA DVD/CD MONITOR 40 AT0IORDY V13 AT1RESET RESET# 23
5 5 6 AB22 AIOBD PA3 AG6 20 25
AT0DMACK 6
TO/FROM ABCKI HFGAIN 14 T13 AT0IORDY AT1IORDY IORDY 1
DT-120 BOARD 4 9 8 AA20 AIOBCK PB3 AG1 21 AT0INTRQ
OSCNT 12 V15 AT0DMACKB AT1DMACK DMACK#
(CN102) ALRCKI 24 3
6 2 3 AE20 AIOLRCK PB5 AF6 10 V12 AT0INTRQ AT1INTRQ INTRQ 27
(SEE PAGE 3-6) RF+, RF-
9, 7 3 29
RFP, RFN AH12, AJ12 2
M3,M4,M1,M2 31
TXI A, B, C, D B3, A3, DBA0, DBA1,
23 AJ11,AJ10, 14, 11, PHOTO
AF21 TXD0B A1,B1,C1,D1 4 C1, B1, DCLKO, DCLKNO, PDIAG#
RXI AJ9,AJ8 12, 13 DETECTOR DASPn 34 34
22 RXD0B C2, B2, DWEB, DCASB, DASP#
AF22 39
SDA_VDEC AH9,AH8, S1, S2, S3, S4
3, 4, A2, C3, DRASB, DCS0B, PDIAGn 46
26 L19 SDA0 G1,H1,F1,E1 DCKE,
AH10,AH11 4 5, 2 17 D5,
SCL_VDEC DDQM0, DDQM2,
25
AT/XDT
M19 SCL0
PB0 AG4
SW1
1
DBA0, DBA1 IC1201,1221 (4/7) F3, J1,
F2, J2, DDQS0, DDQS2, AT1D00
M4,R1,R4,R2, 62,64,2,5
DD0
TXP 32 2
DCLKO, DCLKNO
28
SPDIF_LL
T19 GPIO6
PB1 AE7
SW2
15 DWE 512Mbit X 2 DDR SDRAM A5, B9, DDQM1, DDQM3,
DDQS1, DDQS3
| N5,R3,P4,T1,
T2,P5,T3,R5,
AT1DATA0-15
7,11,13,15
14,12,10,6 | TXN 31 3 HDD
2 C18 SDA1 TEMP C6, C9 AT1D015 DD5
DCAS
20
XRESET
D17 SCL1
RFP3 AJ23
LCDS
40
SEN DRAS
U1,N4,U2,W1 3,1,63,61 RXN 28 5 UNIT
PA2 AH7 44 DCS0B (IC1201) AT1DA0 U3 50 DA0 RXP 27 6
CN2301 Q3301-3302 2,4,5,7,8,10, F5,F4,G5,G4,J4,J5,H4,H5, DQ00 | AT1ADR0-2
DCKE W2 51 |
Y_IN
LPF E24 AYI
DDM0, DDM2
26, 27
45, 46
BA0, BA1
CK, /CK
DQ0
|
11,13,54,56, DDATA0-7,16-23 A8,B8,C8,A7,B6,A6,C7,B7, |
G1,G2,G3,F1,H3,H2,H1,J3, DQ31
AT1DA2 T5 3 AT1CS0 3 49 DA2 IC5602 CN5604
29 (IC1201) 57,59,60,62, DDATA8-15,24-31
AUS only DDQS0, DDQS2 21 /WE DQ15 D9,E9,D8,E8,D7,E7,D6,E6 AT1CS1 SATA BRIDGE
DDM1, DDM3 22 63,65 (IC1221) AT1CS0B T4 AT1DMARQ 48 CS0n
/CAS X5502
C/R_IN Q3303,3304
27 LPF
Q3305,3306
G24 ACI (IC1221) DDQS1, DDQS3 23
24
/RAS
CS
AT1CS1B
AT1DMARQ
V3
V5
AT1DIOW
AT1DIOR
47
60
CS1n
DMARQ
(5/7) 25MHz
G_IN 44 CKE AT1DIOWB U5 AT1RESET 59 DIOWn XTALI 22
25 LPF D23 ABI SI SDIO A0 29-32, B4,A4,C5,B5, DADD00 AT1DIORB
45 20, 47 LDM, HDM V1 6 6 58 DIORn
35-40, DADRS0-12 E1,E2,D1,D2, |
SCLK SCLK 16, 51 LDQS, UDQS | AT1RESETB V4 AT1IORDY 16 RESETn
B_IN Q3307,3308 46 A12 28,41,42 D3,E4,C4,D4,E5 DADD12
23 LPF ARI AT1DMACK XTALO 23
F23 VPPD VREFPD IORDY
VREFIO AF10 10 AT1IORDY U4 AT1INTRQ 55
XRESET RESET AT1DMACKB V2 54 DMACKn XRESET
YP_OUT Q2503 D101 3 3 PORn 17
39 BUFFER B23 VAG 42 AT1INTRQ M5 53 INTRQ
Q2505 PA1 AJ6 VA5V
V+5L 6, 16 AA2 LDQM TXD2_BRIDGE
CR_OUT VD3V TXD2B AJ24 43 UAI
37 BUFFER A22 VAR AB2 UDQM
Q2504 V+3A 41 RXD2_BRIDGE
T+ TR AD5 MBA RXD2B AH23 45 UAO
CB_OUT TRACKING ACO1+ 54 48 TRACKING AF2 WEB L5201
35 BUFFER A24 VAB TDRV AH20 4 ACTIN1 T- TD 8 USB_DN0 USBDM2
COIL DRIVE AE2 CASB 10
Y_OUT
Q2501 ACO1- 53
F+
47
FR
COIL
IC201 (4/7) AF4 RASB
USB_DN0 M1
USB_DP0 USBDP2 8
33 BUFFER A20 VAY FOCUS ACO2+ 52 50 FOCUS AB4 MCLKOUT USB_DP0 M2
Q2502 AH21 5 ACTIN2 F- 64Mbit SDRAM USB_D_CONEECT
C_OUT
FDRV COIL DRIVE
ACO2- 51 49
FD COIL
LDQM
AC4 MCKE USB_D_CONEECT P3
USB_D_DN0
IC5203 (6/7) L5202
USBDM1
TO/FROM
FL-178 BOARD
31 BUFFER B21 VAC USB_D_DN0 P1 3
CN101 UDQM (CN102)
USB_D_DP0 USBDP1
IC501 MBA
2,4,5,7,8,10, Y3,AA4,AB1,AA5, MD0
USB_D_DP0 P2 1 (SEE PAGE 3-9)
WEZ 15 LDQM DQ0 AB3,AA3,W4,Y4,
11,13,42,44, |
15
LCHIN
2 AINL SDTO 9
AIBD0
AIBD0
REF16 AF9 42 VC (7/7) SPINDLE CASZ 39 UDQM | 45,47,48,50,
MD0-15 W5,W3,Y5,Y2, MD15 USB_D_VBUS
USB_D_VBUS 4
1
USBVFB 5
TO/FROM
17
RCHIN
1 AINR
IC3101 LRCK 10
AILRCK0
E20
AILRCK0 U 11 4
U MOTOR RASZ
MCLK
20
16
BA0
/WE
DQ15 51,53 AC2,AB5,AA1,Y1 N3
X5201
2
V+5USB 6
AV-114 BOARD F19 V
AUDIO ADC ADCCLKO MCKE USB_CLKI
(CN101(1/2))
(SEE PAGE 3-4) (3/7)
MCLK 11
AIBCK0
C20 AIOMCK0 V 13
W 16
3
2
W M 17
18
38
/CAS
/RAS
CLK
4 USB_CLKI N1
48MHz
XTAL OSC IC5202 (6/7) CN5201
SCLK 12 E19 AIBCK0 A0 23-26, AE3,AD3,AF3,AE5, MA0 5V SW
ADPOW VCC 37 USB_H_PPON0
MDRV AJ22 26 SPIN V+5M 12 10 V+3D CKE | 29-34, MA0-11 AE4,AD2,AD1,AC5, | USB_H_PPON0
PON 13 U19 GPIO37 XDMUTE1 N2 5V
HU+ A11 22,35 AD4,AC1,AC3 MA11 USB_H_OCI0 EV+5.8V 4 5 4 5
RFP1 AG21 34 CTL1 HU+ 20 11 PW MD2 USB_H_OCI0 REG
1 M3
XDMUTE2 HU- D5(AG) MD5 FLG 3
RFP2 AH22 35 CTL2 SPINDLE HU- 21 10 3
MOTOR D1(SL) MD1
HV+ 4
IC3203 (3/7) IC3201 (3/7) FG AG20 43 FG DRIVE HV+ 22 9 D0(MA) MD0 IC5204 (6/7)
1

AUDIO LPF
AUDIO DAC HV- 23 8
HV-
HW+
H CN201
FOR CHECK
5
8
TX_FE 4 REMO
AF7 PB7
HW+ 24 7 RX_FE REMI
2 AOD0 9 AG5 PB6
L_OUT _ 7 VOUTL DATA 2 E18 AOD0 6 HW-
21 AOBCK HW- 25 XRESET
+ 3 HB 7 V24
1 BCKIN 1 C19 AOBCK 5 FCSB0
AOLRCK HB 19 A9(ATA) W22
6 2 3 FOEB
R_OUT _ 8 VOUTR LRCKIN 3 D20 AOLRCK CN501 AA24 PHY_D0 E13,D13,E12, 8,9,11, D0 TPAP
FWEB
19
7
+ 5
MCLK 16
DACCLKO
E21 AIOMCK1
IC1102 (4/7) | D12,E11,D11, PHY_D0-7 12,14,15, | TPA0p 39
TPAN
1
TO/FROM
SMDOUT ST1+ PHY_D7 E10,D10 17,18 D7 2 FL-178 BOARD
SLO1+ 40 1 TPA0n 38
AMUTE1 MD 13 L4 SMDOUT SL1 64Mbit FLASH ROM PHYCTL0 TPBP (CN101)
18 11 ZEROR SMCKOUT SLED ST1- TPB0p 37 5
SDRV1 AJ21 29 SL1IN SLO1- 39 2 CTL0 E14 5 CTL0
MC
ML
14
15
NSCS
K5
L3
SMCKOUT
GPIO62 SDRV2 AJ20
SL2
30 SL2IN
MOTOR
DRIVE SLO2+ 38
ST2+
ST2-
4 M SLED
MOTOR HCS0 CTL1 D14
PHYCTL1
PHYSCLK
6 CTL1 IC5103 TPB0n 36
TPBN
6
(SEE PAGE 3-9)
HDOE 29,31,33,35, W21,Y21,AA21,U23, RDATA00 SCLK D15 2 SCLK
D3201 SLO2- 37 3 26 CE DV PHY CN5101
AMUTE HWS0 DQ0 38,40,42,44, V22,T24,U24,N23,R23, | PHYLREQ
CN502 28 OE HDATA0-15 LREQ E15 63 LREQ X0 22
F17 GPIO54 | 30,32,34,36, M22,T22,T21,P21,N22, RDATA015
11 WE PHYLPS
10
DAM_TO_T SMDOUT
LD
LOADING
LDO+
LDO+ RED DQ15 39,41,43,45 N20,R21 LPS D16
PHYLINKON
59 LPS (6/7) X5101
2 1 24.576MHz
9
HSM_TO_T
DAT_TO_M 1 7
HSMTOT
SMDIN
P19 GPIO04 DAOUT AJ19 46 LDIN MOTOR
DRIVE LDO- 1
LDO-
2
BLACK M LOADING
MOTOR
Y20,Y24,AA22,W23,
LINKON
GPIO52
E16
F20
PHY_XRST
58
55
LKON
RESETB
X1 23
8 L5 SMDIN
ASCK SMCKOUT A0 25-18, V23,Y23,V21,AA23, RADD01
7 CLOSE LPS1 CLOSE XRESET | 8-1,48,17, HADRS1-22
PA7 AH6 4 Y22,P22,U22,P23,U21, |
HST_TO_M 3 5 HSTTOM 12 RESET A21 16,9,10,13
6 N19 GPIO03 OPEN LPS2 OPEN U20,AB24,R24,M21, RADD22
X525P X525P PA6 AJ7 5
N21,T23,R22,W20,P24 XRESET
40 AB19 GPIO41 CN601
TO/FROM 4
AV-114 BOARD
(CN101(2/2)) 5
DSDA TU_DSDA IC3701 (3/7) X101 SFSO AD8
SO
5 SI HADRS13 HADRS5-7,13 L5001
(SEE PAGE 3-4) 3
DSCL TU_DSCL 16.9344MHz
SFSI AD10
SI
2 SO
IC200
AE1 XA1 SCLK EEPROM JTSEL HADRS5
DDC_SW1 DDC_SW1
2 SFSCK AD9 6 SCK HADRS6
CSOZ DINTEN
1
HDP TU_HPD
XA2
SFCS0B AD11 1 CE (4/7) 3
9
EJSNGEN HADRS7
IC5801
L5002
CEC TU_CEC AF1
13 3
4 X1001 TXD
AG23 TDI JTDI
24.576MHz TXD1B 1 12 F21 JTDI
P_CONT2 2 6 RXD TCK JTCL
13 RXD1B AG22 JTCL L5003
M24 CLK24IN
Q1811 V+5D
2
5
CN1402
FOR CHECK
6
TDO JTDO
J19
JTDO
(6/7)
CN1401 10 G19
MRST XRESET
12 IC3702 (3/7) L24 CLK24OUT FSCO K23 FSC BPF IC3701 7 FOR CHECK
8
TMS JTMS
G20 JTMS
JA5801
TRST JTMRST L5004
JTRST
11
XRST1
1
4 XRESET
RSTSWB FSCI J24
(3/7) D3712 14
DINT EDINT
H20
EDINT
2 L21 2 H19 Q5809
X1002 Q1801 RST D3711
4 Q102
27MHz SW
L1 CLK27AIN K20
HLCO HCL BPF 1 V+3D AJ2 OFPULSE Q5802,5804
Q5701 SW +5V
JA5701 IC5701 5
K2 CLK27AOUT
V+5VHD
BUFFER 1 HLCI H21 Q5810
DIGITAL SPDIF SELECT AJ14 FCEFM1
OUT 13
SPDIFO
D19 ATX LEVEL
IC5802 (6/7)
(3/7) SHIFT
5
SPDIFSEL
V19 GPIO36

Q5801,5805
TU_DSDA
TU_DSCL DET
IC3707 V+1R5_IN
DDC_SW1 V+3HD
1 2
RESET TU_HPD Q5808
(3/7) TU_CEC

Abbreviation Note1: The HDMI block is highly confidential, and prohibited from releasing to public.
AUS:Australian model. Note2: The components identified by mark 9 contain confidential information.
Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and/or replaced.

3-7 3-8
 RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

3-5. FL-178, FR-274 BLOCK DIAGRAM

FR-274 BOARD
Q206

LED2 2 LED DRIVE D214 DVD

Q205

LED3 3 LED DRIVE D212 HDD

IC201
FL DRIVER SEG1
|
SG1 14 SEG16
| |
SG16 29 16
GRD1
FLDATA
12 |
7 DIN GR1 42
FLCLK GRD12
11 8 CLK | |
FLSTB GR12 31 12
10 9 STB
VEE 30

ND201
T201 FLUORESCENT
Q203,204 DC/AC CONVERTER DISPLAY
TRASFORMER
V+12RIE
D208-211
2 10

FLPON
17 1
3
F2
7
Q201,202
DC/AC 4
CONVERTER 8
5

F1
TO/FROM 9
AV-114 BOARD 6
(CN105)
(SEE PAGE 3-4)

FL-178 BOARD
KEY1 KEY1 S101 POWER
3 4 2

KEY2 KEY2
2 5 1 S102 ONE TOCH DUB

KEY3
1

16
IR
3 3
IR IC101
CN203 CN201 CN106 REMOTE CONTROL
RECEIVER
S201,213,212
OPEN/CLOSE,
HDD, 1
DVD
USBDM2 2 CN104
7
S203,204,207 USBDP2 3 USB
9
4 ATYPE
3 USBDM1
REC STOP, TO/FROM
INPUT SELECT, RD-065 BOARD USBDP1
1
REC (CN5201)
6 USBVFB
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
5 V+5USB
S208-211
CN102 CN105
CH+, CH-,
PLAY, 2 1
USB
STOP BTYPE
3 4

FL102
TPAP TPA+ 4
2
TO/FROM TPAN TPA- 3 CN103
1
RD-065 BOARD FL101 2
(CN5101) TPBP TPB+ DV
5
1 IN
(SEE PAGE 3-8) TPBN TPB-
6

CN101

J201

3 2Y
S VIDEO 4
4 2C
1

5 SDET2 2
LINE2 IN TO/FROM
2V AV-114 BOARD
7 (CN106)
VIDEO 6
(SEE PAGE 3-3)

AUDIO L 9 2L
(MONO) 8

11 2R
AUDIO R 10

CN202

3-9 3-10
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM

SW+12V(H)
SWITCHING REGULATOR
(SRV-2057EK)
T101
SWITCHING
SW+5V(H)
1
4
CN203
HDD
SW+1.5V(T) SPINDLE

UNIT
TRANSFORMER DVD
D401 P401 11,12 MOTOR OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK
EV+12V EV+12V(T)
9
FU101 D101-104 P201 EV+5.8V(T)
T3.15A/250V Q401,402 6,7 VA5V VD3V
L SW+12V SW+3.3V(T)
2,4 12 6,16 41
AC IN D402 P_ON/OFF
N 1 CN501 CN101
L101,102
CN202 IC1301 (2/7)
CN101 LPF
D109
D201 L201
EV+5.8V
IC501 8
VREF_V

RD-065 BOARD
3
TRACKING COIL DRIVE + 1 VREF_V
Q201 2 _
SW+5V FOCUS COIL DRIVE
5V REG SPINDLE MOTOR DRIVE
SLED MOTOR DRIVE
IC3703
Q101 LOADING MOTOR DRIVE
8 5 RESET
SWITCHING
IC1302 (2/7)
(7/7) (3/7)
IC101 VREF_D

SWITCHING
3
IC202 3
+
8
1 VREF_D
P204 2
REGULATOR SHUNT REG EV+5.8V(M) EV+5.8V EV+5.8V _
1 1
Q501 SW+1.5V(M) SW+1.53V V+1R5_IN
D501 L501 P501 3,4 3,4
2 6 SW+3.3V SW+3.3V(M) SW+3.33V V+3D CN103
D105 3.3V REG 6,7 6,7 14
FOR CHECK
4 P402 SW+12V V+12V V+12V
9 9 IC4502
SW+5V(W) V+5M V+5M
D502 11 11 1 CN1401

DT-120 BOARD
SW+12V(W) V12M V12M FOR CHECK
13 13
CN4501 IC4501 V+2R5
IC501 CN201

SHUNT REG IC4511 (1/7) VREF_V

3V REG V+1R5_IN VREF_D

Q601
IC302 (5/5) D601 L601
1.5V REG
SW+1.5V EV5.8V
4 VIN VOUT 5
V+3V V+3V
IC1001
3.3V REG ON/OFF V+3D
AV ENC/DEC IC1201
7 VIN VO 1
V+3.3D IC1002 D603
1 V+2R5

CONT
PC101
VR601
P_CONT2
V+1R0 (2/7,4/7 to 7/7) IC1221
SDRAM PHOTO 1.5V ADJ
VR201 D604
5
(5/5) COUPLER
5.8V ADJ IC601 IC4521 (1/7) V+3A
USB_H_PPON0
512Mbit X 2
DDR SDRAM
P_CONT2 N2
2.5V REG USB_H_OCI0
SHUNT REG
M3 (4/7)
(5/5) IC320 V+3.3D IC201 V+3D
4 VIN VOUT 5
V+2R5

1.5V REG IC1001 SHUNT REG ON/OFF V+3D

R223
V+1.5VDEC 1 10 CN201
VIDEO
7 VIN VO 1 FOR CHECK
DECODER P_CONT2
V+3.3A
CONT
5 (5/5) IC4531 (1/7)
P_CONT2
IC201 IC200 IC1102
1V REG
SW+1.5V 64Mbit SDRAM EEPROM 64Mbit FLASH ROM
11,12 V+1R5_IN V+1R0
IC300 (4/5) 9
EV+12.1V 8 VIN VOUT 1 (4/7) (4/7) (4/7)
V+5.8E CONT
(5/5) IC319 2.5V REG 6,7
SW+3.3V 1 5
V+3D
SW+3.3V 2,4 CN103
5V REG D+2.5V P_CONT2
P-CONT P_CONT2

AV-114 BOARD
5 VOUT VIN 4
+5V 1 28 13
1 VIN VOUT 5 Q1002-1008 F300 ON/OFF
ON/OFF
LPF 1
CN202 CN101 CN2301 IC4541 (1/7) IC4701-4703 IC3701 IC3702
3V REG
3 CN103 CN302 D103 V+5V BUFFER BUFFER AND GATE
EV+12.1V EV+12.1V EV5.8V V+3A
P_CONT2 V+12R1 7 VIN VO 1
V+5.8E V+5.8E
7 16
EV+5.8V V+5R8E D104 CONT
(2/7) (3/7) (3/7)
3,5 20,18
V+3.3SW V+3.3SW V+12R1E C118 5
P-CONT P-CONT BACK-UP P_CONT P_CONT2
P-CONT2
2 21
P-CONT2 P_CONT2
62 IC101 IC3201 IC3202 IC3101
DT+3.3V
10 13
FANCTL
57
IT CONTROLLER IC4552 (1/7)
54 5V REG AUDIO DAC AUDIO LPF AUDIO ADC
RFTHRU
V+3.3A F302
FAN- Q201 FANCTL TUON
52 (1/5) EV5.8V V+5L (3/7) (3/7) (3/7)
4 VIN VOUT 5
15 23 60
IC104 V+1.5V
V+3.3D
F301
FAN DRIVE SWVION9V
61
ON/OFF V+3D
D+2.5V L4551
27MHz
VCXO IC106
Q301,302
V+5BB
IC403 SWVION5V
64
1 V+5AO
TU_DCCON P_CONT2
(1/5)
XCI_VCC_5V
113 EMMA
A+3.3V
(3/5) RCSEL
DTBON
74 V+5A IN
V+5D
VREF
(1/5) D+3.3V IC307 IC313 RFTHRU (3/5) ANT5V_SW
85
IC4561 (1/7) 5
CN1402
FOR CHECK
86 5V REG V+12VA
REG Q305,306
F314 OFDM R307
IC110 V+3.3SW
4 VIN1 VO1 5
DEMODULATOR
V+5VD FLPON
63
EV5.8V
1 VIN VOUT 5
V+5HD
18 JA5801
INVERTER
IC101 3 VIN2 VO2 6 (3/5) SWVION5V
R308 V+5VI IC401 CONT
VREF 3
(1/5) 256Mbit
D+2.5V PS1 PS2
3 3
Q303,304 VIDEO/AUDIO
DDR SDRAM V+5TU SELECTOR
V+3D IC5801
(1/5) DT+3.3V IC311 (3/5) IC102
VA+5V
TUON IC4562 (1/7) IC5802
IC321 D+3.3V AGC POWER FAIL DET 3V REG
(3/5) (1/5) V+3HD
(6/7)
BUFFER
IC318 (1/5) D+2.5V
IC304 (4/5) Q307,308 V+9V
U601 EV5.8V
1 VIN VOUT 5
9V REG
(1/5) VREF 5V REG
SWVION9V
UHF/VHF CONT
8 V+5.8E VA+5V B1(+5V) TUNER 3
1 + 3
VREF
_ 2
1 VIN VOUT 5 IC317 Q309-311 V+32V
(5/5) IC103 IC5701
CONT DC/DC CONV.
IC322 3
TU_DDCON
IC101 VDD DET
IC4571 (1/7) L5601 V+3DS
SPDIF SELECT

SW P-CONT2 (1/5) 1.8V REG

EMI
IC5602 (7/7)
(1/5) IC201 DT+3.3V BT(+32V) V+32V IC601 V+3D V+1R8 SATA BRIDGE
IC312 (3/5) 9 14
5 VIN VOUT 1
CI
5V REG
EURO MSP ON/OFF (5/7)
CONTROLLER
B2(+5V) (5/5) IC104 4 IC5203
DT+3.3V D+5V
(2/5) V+5.8E
1 VIN VOUT 5 U301
IC205 CONT DTT
DDC SW
L5101 V+3V_A
AND GATE
32Mbit 3 TUNER
(1/5) Q4581 IC5103 (6/7)
FLASH ROM IC306 (4/5) DT_TUON IC402 V+12V RIPPLE
FILTER
V+12VA
L5122 DV PHY
(2/5) 5V REG (3/5) V+3V_D
V+5.8E
BUFFER EMI
(6/7)
5 VOUT VIN 4
IC309 (3/5) (4/5) IC406 IC5204 (6/7) IC5202 (6/7)
ON/OFF 5V REG 5V SW
IC202 1
5V SW AVLTH SW
EV5.8V 5V V+5USB
BUFFER P-CONT2 5 1
ADRS
(4/5) 4 VIN VOUT 5 4 5
USB_H_OCI0
6
NC CN5201
IC150 FLG 3
(2/5) 3
IC208 (2/5) 4 DT_TUON
13 10
DTBON V+3D
1
5V SW AN5V_SW ANT5V_SW USB_H_PPON0
12 11
CI_5V CN105
1 6
IC203,204 2 7
3 4 1

V+5USB
LATCH Q202,203 3 5
2 V+5F
(2/5) EV+12.1V
1
FAN 14 1
CN102
IC101
VCC CN203
D208-211
RECT
CN201
REMOTE FL-178
FR-274
17,51 Q203,204 CN106 CN104
Q201,202 V+5F COMMANDER
V+12RIE VEE IC201 5
CN201
CI SLOT
15 T201
DC/AC F1,F2
ND201
FLUORESCENT FL DRIVE
RECEIVER
BOARD 1 USB
ATYPE

BOARD
CONVERTER DISPLAY
FLPON
17
AEP2 model
CN203

Note1: The HDMI block is highly confidential, and prohibited from releasing to public.
Note2: The components identified by mark 9 contain confidential information.
Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and/or replaced.

3-11 3-12E
 RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070
SECTION 4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A
CN201 13P 4P
5V
EV+5.8V(M ) 1 4
GND
GND 2 3

SW+1.5V(M ) 3 PH-080 2
GND

12V
SW+1.5V(M ) 4
HARNESS 1

GND D 5 DVD-UNIT
SW+3.3V(M ) 6

SW+3.3V(M ) 7

GND

SW+12V
8

9 1
7P

GND
HDD UNIT
CN101 50P 50P
GND(J) 10 2 HT+
FR 50 50 FR
SW+5V(W ) 11 3 HT-
FD 49 49 FD
GND(W) 12 4 GND
TR 48 48 TR
SW+12V(W) 13 5 HA-
TD 47 47 TD
6 HA+
SCLK 46 46 SCLK
7 GND
AEP,UK only SDIO 45 45 SDI O

B CN202 12P
COMPONENT
SEN

VPP
44

43
44

43
SEN

VPP
LINE 2 OUT G-LINK
POWER P_ON/OF F

SW+3.3V(T )
1

2
VIDEO OUT RESET

VD3V
42

41
42

41
RESET

VD3V

BLOCK
GND

SW+3.3V(T )
3

4
RH-059 TEM P 40 40 TEM P

HARNESS RSET 39 39 RSET

TUNER
GND 5
SWITCHING W1SET 38 38 W1SET

( REGULATOR ) EV+5.8V(T )

EV+5.8V(T )

GND
6

8
W2SET

W3SET
37

36
37

36
W2SET

W3SET

7
LDDEN 35 35 LDDEN
EV+12V 9

GN D

TX N

GN D

RX N

GN D
RXP
TXP
OSCEN- 34 34 OSCEN-
GND 10
OSCEN+ 33 33 OSCEN+
SW+1.5V(T ) 11 CN2301 40P C N101 40P
W1EN- 32 32 W1EN-
SW+1.5V(T ) 12 X 525P 40 40 HPD
W1EN+ 31 31 W1EN+
YP_OUT 39 39 DDC_SW 1
W3EN- 30 30 W3EN-
CN5604 7P GND

CR_OUT
38

37
FRA-006 38

37
DSCL

CEC
W3EN+ 29 29 W3EN+

FLEXIBLE W2EN- 28 28 W2EN-

GND 36 36 DSD A
FLAT CABLE W2EN+ 27 27 W2EN+
CB_OUT 35 35 HST_TO_M

C GND

Y_OUT
34

33
34

33
ASCK

DAT_TO_M
VO5V

VO5V
26

25
26

25
VO5V

VO5V

OSCNT 24 24 OSCNT
GND 32 32 HSM_TO_T
GNDO 23 23 GNDO
CN4501 13P C_OUT 31 31 DAM_TO_T
GNDO 22 22 GNDO
1 EV+5.8 V GND 30 30 XRST1
HFGAIN 21 21 HFGAIN
2 GND D Y_I N 29 29 MRST
DVD/CD 20 20 DVD/CD
3 SW+1.53V GND 28 28 P_CONT2
GNDA 19 19 GNDA
CN203 4P 4 SW+1.53V C/R_IN 27 27 GN D
FMO- 18 18 FMO-
SW+5V(H)
4 5 GND D GND 26 26 L_IN
FMO+ 17 17 FMO+
GND
3 6 SW+3.33V G_I N 25 25 GN D
VA5V 16 16 VA5V

RD-065 BOARD
GND
2 7 SW+3.33V GND 24 24 R_IN
SW2 15 15 SW2
SW+12.1V(H) 1 8 GND D B_IN 23 23 AMUTE1
M3 14 14 M3
9 V +12V GND 22 22 R_OUT
M2 13 13 M2
10 GND L_OUT 21 21 GNDA
M1 12 12 M1
11 V+5M GNDA 20 20 L_OUT
M4 11 11 M4
12 GND M R_OUT 19 19 GN D

13 V12M AMUTE 18 18 B_IN

AV-114 BOARD VREFPD 10 10 VREFPD

PR-076 R_IN 17 17 GN D
RF+ 9 9 RF+

D
GNDA 8 8 GNDA
HARNESS GND 16 16 G_I N
RF- 7 7 RF-
L_IN 15 15 GN D
VA5V 6 6 VA5V
CN5201 10P GND 14 14 C/R_I N
S3 5 5 S3
10 USBDM2 P_CONT2 13 13 GN D
S2 4 4 S2
9 GND MRST 12 12 Y_I N
S1 3 3 S1
8 USBDP2 XRST1 11 11 GN D
S4 2 2 S4
7 GND DAM_TO_T 10 10 C_OUT
SW1 1 1 SW1
6 V+5USB HSM_TO_T 9 9 GN D

5 USBVFB DAT_TO_M 8 8 Y_OUT

4 GND ASCK 7 7 GN D

3 USBDM1 HST_TO_M 6 6 CB_OUT

2 GND DSDA 5 5 GN D
CN502 4P 4P
1 USBDP1 CEC 4 4 CR_OUT
ST2+ 4 4 ST2+
CN5101 6P CN4701 28P DSCL 3 3 GN D
ST2- 3 3 ST2-
DDC_SW 1 2 2 YP_OUT
ST1- 2 2 ST1-
HD P 1 1 X525P
ST1+ 1 1 ST1+
GND(RFE/XLL)
A_GN D

A_GN D
TPB P
TPB N

TPAP
TPAN

STREAM_7

STREAM_6

STREAM_5

STREAM_4

STREAM_3

STREAM_2

STREAM_1

STREAM_0
SDA_VDEC

SCL_VDEC
AT/XD T

XRESET

ALRCKI

ADATA

SPDIF
VCLKI

ABCKI
GN D

GN D

GN D

GN D
RX 1
TX 1
GND

GND

GND

GND

E
6

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

CN601 5P 5P
FVR-001 LPS2 5 5 LPS2
FLEXIBLE GNDD 4 4 GNDD
FLAT CABLE LPS1 3 3 LPS1

BLACK 2 2 BLACK

RED 1 1 RED
10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28
1

VD01
VD07

VD06

VD04

VD02

VD00
VD05

VD03

ADATA

SPDIF
AT/XDT

GN D

GN D

GN D

GN D

GN D

GN D

ALRCK

GN D

GN D
ABCK
RDXA
TDXA

GND(REF/LL)
SCL_VDE C
SDA_VDEC

XRESET

VCLK

CN103 24P C N302 24P CN501 12P 12P

GND 24 1 GN D
VCC 12 12 VCC
C/R_I N 23 2 C/R_I N

CN202 12P CN104 28P GND 22 FVA-002 3 GN D

HU+

HU -
11

10
11

10
HU+

HU -
1 P_CONT G_I N 21 FLEXIBLE 4 G_I N
HV+ 9 9 HV+
2 SW+3.3V GND 20 FLAT CABLE 5 GN D
HV - 8 8 HV -
3 GN D B_IN 19 6 B_IN
HW + 7 7 HW +

F 4

5
SW+3.3V

GN D
GND

Y_I N
18

17
7

8
GN D

Y_I N
HW -

HB
6

5
6

5
HW -

HB
6 V+5.8E GND 16 9 GN D
U 4 4 U
7 V+5.8E FAN- 15 10 DT_TUO N
V 3 3 V
8 GN D GND 14 11 ANT5V_SW

PV-145 10
9 EV+12.1V

GN D
DT-120 BOARD DT_TUON

ANT5V_SW
13

12
12

13
DET_ANT

P_CONT2
GNDD
W 2

1
2

1
W

GNDD

HARNESS
11 SW+1.5V DET_ANT 11 14 V +32V

12 SW+1.5V P_CONT2 10 15 GN D
CN103
V+32V 9 16 EV+12.1V

DV IN GND 8 17 GN D

EV+12.1V 7 18 EV+5.8V

GND 6 19 GN D

V+5.8E 5 20 EV+5.8V
CN106 11P CN105 17P
GND 4 21 P_CONT
CN105
CN203 2P

V+5.8E 3 22 GN D

PICT BRIGE P_CONT 2 23 FAN-

LED_HDD2
LED_D_TV
LED_PLTV

LED_A_TV
USB B TYPE

LED_DIVX
1 24 GN D

V+12R1E
GND

FLPO N
FLDATA
SDET2

FLSTB

FLCLK

V +5F
KEY3

KEY2

KEY1
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
FAN+

G
FAN-

2R
2C

2V

2V

2L

IR
10

11

17
16

15

14

13

12

11

10
1

1
2

CN04 RU-001 RV-003 DIGITAL FAR-006 FAR-007

HARNESS HARNESS
TUNER FAN FLEXIBLE FLEXIBLE
FLAT CABLE
USB A TYPE FLAT CABLE

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17
10

11

9
1

9
10

GN D

GN D

GN D
USBDM 2

SDET 2

GND

2R

GND
USBVF B

2C

2Y

2V

2L

IR
USBDP1

USBDP2
USBDM1

V +5F
FLST B
TPBP

PLT V
V+5USB

FLPO N
TPAP

DITV

V+12RIE
GND

GND

GND

GND
TPBN

HDD2
D_TV
TPAN

KEY3

KEY2

KEY1

A_TV

FLCLK
CN106 5P

FLDATA
CN201 5P
GND

GND

GND

GND

KEY2 1 5 KEY2

KEY1 2
FLR-010 4 KEY1 J201
IR 3 3 IR
FLEXIBLE LINE 2 IN
GND 4 2 GND
CN102 10P CN101 6P FLAT CABLE CN202 11P CN203 17P

FL-178 BOARD
V +5F 5 1 V +5F
FR-274 BOARD

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

4-1 4-2
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS WAVEFORMS

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AV-114 BOARD DT-120 BOARD
(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For schematic diagrams) 1 X101 7 JA402 COMPONENT PR 1 X100
• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µµF.
50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and
tantalums.
• All resistors are in ohms, 1/4 W (Chip resistors : 1 /10 W) un-less
otherwise specified.
kΩ=1000Ω, MΩ=1000kΩ.
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, be- 5.1 Vp-p 1.0 Vp-p 2.2 Vp-p
66.6 ns H 37 ns
cause it is damaged by the heat.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B,
unless otherwise noted. 2 X102 8 JA402 COMPONENT Y 2 X300
• 2 : non flammable resistor
• 5 : fusible resistor
• C : panel designation
• f : internal component
• C : adjustment for repair
• G : IN/OUT direction of (+/–) B line
• U : B+ Line 1.6 Vp-p
H
• V : B– Line
30.5 µs 5.1 Vp-p 2.3 Vp-p
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. 50 ns
• Voltages are dc between measurement point and ground.
• Readings are taken with a color-bar signals on DVD reference
disc. 3 JA401 S-VIDEO C 9 JA501 ql 3 X1001
• Readings are taken with a digital multimeter (DC 10MΩ).
• Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production toler-
ances.
• Abbreviation
AUS : Australian model
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted 1.4 Vp-p
line with mark 0 are critical for safety. H
2.0 Vp-p
H
Replace only with part number specified. 40.7 µs 4.2 Vp-p

When indicating parts by reference number, please include

the board name. 4 JA401 S-VIDEO Y 0 X601

1.6 Vp-p
H
4.0Vp-p
54.3ns

5 JA402 VIDEO

2.0 Vp-p
H

6 JA402 COMPONENT PB

1.1 Vp-p
H

WAVEFORMS
AV-114/DT-120 4-3 4-4
 RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-47 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Q103 Q104 Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted

UMD2N-TR UMD2N-TR
D106
1SS355TE-17
SA MUTE CONTROL SA MUTE CONTROL line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
AV-114 BOARD(1/5) B+ JL20 8 JL213

Replace only with part number specified.

A IT CONTROLLER, IR
R147
JL216 1k JL21 7
B+
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES- R169
5.4 4 1
2.4 0
10k 3 6
Q108 JL209 0 4.9
DTC124EUA-T106 5 5
2 2
BLANK 5.3 0
C135
3 6
5.0 0.1 0 0
C 127 4 1
D108 100 2.5 0.7
DAP202uT106 16V
JL21 0
JL27 4 Q105
2SD2114KT146

BLANK
0 0 MUTE CONTROL

SAMUTE

AMUTE1
RESE T
RXD1

TU_DCCON

HOTPLUG

MSPSTAT
TXD1

CSYNCIN
AVLIN

CEC0

P_CONT2

RFTHRU
HST_TO_M
B+

TUON
FLPON

P_CONT

FANCTL
SWVION5V

SWVION9V

EPGEQ
+5V

B L2_RIN
L2_LIN
L2_RIN
L2_LIN
2VIN B+
2VIN CN105 17P
Y2IN Y2IN
C2IN B+ KEY3 JL22 2
C2IN 17 KEY3
R_IN
R_IN KEY2 JL22 3
L_IN L_IN
R_OUT 16 KEY2

R174 100k
R_OUT KEY1 JL22 4

0.1

0.1
R172 100

R171 100

R168 180

R199 100

R167 100

R160 100

R155 100

R154 100

R153 100

R125 100
L_OUT
L_OUT

0
R150 R149 15 KEY1

R175

R151 0
Y_IN

330
Y_IN 0 0 LED_PLT V JL22 5
C_OUT

R165

R159

JL15 4 R157 100k C133

C132
1 C_OUT
Y_OUT C 134
14 LED_PLTV
Y_OUT LED_DIVX JL22 6
CB_OUT 0.1
TO (3/5) CB_OUT R156 13 LED_DIVX

JL14 9 R158 100k

CR_OUT CR_OUT R161
100 JL15 3 0 LED_D_TV JL22 7
YP_OUT YP_OUT
12 LED_D_TV
TEXTVIN TEXTVIN JL22 8

0.1
LED_A_TV

JL11 2
P_SAVE

R173 100k
P_SAVE CSYNCIN R103 11 LED_A_TV
100 TO FR-274

JL14 0

JL14 1

JL14 4

JL14 6

JL15 1

JL15 7

JL15 9

JL16 1

JL16 4

JL16 5

JL16 7

JL16 9

JL17 1

JL17 3
JL22 9

JL111

JL132

JL135

JL138

JL177

JL179

JL181

JL183
CSYNCIN SCL FLCLK LED_HDD2

C131
SCL 10 LED_HDD2 BOARD
SDA B+ CN203
SDA RCSEL1
RCSEL1 RCSEL2 9 GND THROUGH THE
RCSEL2 FLSTB JL23 0 FAR-007 FFC

4.9

4.9

3.1

5.0

4.9

3.6

4.8

4.9

4.9

4.9

4.8

4.9

4.9

4.9

4.8

4.9

2.7

4.9
4.9
BLANK
BLANK FLSTB

0
XAMUTE2 8
XAMUTE2 FLCLK JL23 1
C AMUTE1
AMUTE1
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51
FLDATA JL23 2
7 FLCL K (SEE PAGE 4-26)

RXD2

RXD1

TU_DCCON

HOTPLUG

BLANK

XCHECKER

MRST

FLON

TUON

MUTECTL

VDD2

RFTHRU
CEC

FANCTL
EPGEQ
TXD2

TXD1

FLCLK
P_CONT

P_CONT2
VDDDDA

HST_TO_M

MSPSTAT

AVLIN

CSYNCIN

SWVION5V

SWVION9V

GND
NC(IN)
6 FLDATA

NC
V+5VI 5 GND
2.0 4.9 JL185 R102 100 FLST B IC15 0 B+ JL27 5
V+12R1E JL113 81 FLSTB 50 0.5A 4 V+5 F
CVBSIN
B+ C138 0 JL186 R101 100 FLDATA
32V B+ JL23 3
V+5R8E 2.2 82 GND FLDATA 49 3 V+12R1E
50V
R176 1k JL114 2.9 0 JL187 R148 100 AVLTH JL23 4
SWVION9V 83 FILTSLC AVLTH 48 2 IR
SWVION9V C139 0.1 4.9 4.9 JL188 R146 100 FLPON JL23 5
2 P_CONT
P_CONT
84 VDDVCO XSCMUTE 47 1 FLPO N
P_CONT2
P_CONT2 DET_ANT DTBON R177 100 JL115 0 0 JL189 R152 0 P_SAVE
TO (2/5)
DET_ANT ANT5V_SW 85 DTBON P_SAVE 46
ANT5V_SW DTBON ANT5V_SW R178 100 JL116 0 0 JL190
DTBON FANCTL 86 ANT5V_SW BLAIR 45 CN106 11P
FANCTL RFTHRU DET_ANT R179 100 JL117 0 JL191
RFTHRU
TUON
SWVION5V
TUON
SWVION5V
87

88
DET_ANT

GND
IC101 CAPACITOR
NC 44

43
4.9 JL192 L2.RIN JL23 6
11

10
GND

2R
TU_DCCON R233 C140 0.1 IC103
TU_DCCON 100k 4.9 IT CONTROLLER 0 JL193 SQU BU4220G-TR
GND 89 VDD3 SQUEEZE 42 9 GND
JL118 4.9 JL194 R145 4.9 2.6 JL214 L2.LIN JL23 7
DBGP 2 R180 100 0 10k FUNC_ON
IC101 TO FR-274
D

5
90 DBGP2 FUNC_ON 41 OUT CT 8 2L
DBGP 1 R181 100 JL119 4.9 LC87F06J2A-F58W3-E 4.9 B+ 4.9 BOARD
+5V CN202

2
SAMUTE 91 DBGP1 VDD4 40 IN 7 GND
S AMUTE DBGP 0 R182 100 JL120 4.9 JL21 5 2VIN JL23 8 THROUGH THE
FUNC_IN
FUNC_IN

4
FUNC_ON 92 DBGP0 GND 39 GND NC 6 2V FAR-006 FFC
FUNC_ON LED_PLTV R183 100 JL121 0 4.9 JL195 R205 100 DDC_SW 2
3 BLANK
BLANK
93 LED_PLTV DDCSW2 38
C156
5 GND
AVLTH 0.1
TO (4/5)
AVLTH
AVLIN LED_DIVX R184 100 JL122 0 4.8 JL196 R204 100 DDC_SW 1
C157
0.1 Y2IN JL23 9 (SEE PAGE 4-25)
AVLIN 94 LED_DIVX DDCSW1 37 B 4 2Y
AVLOUT
AVLOUT LED_D_TV R185 100 JL123 0 JL197 C126 0.1
SQU
SQU 95 LED_D_TV NC 36 3 GND
LED_A_TV R186 100 JL124 0 0 JL198 R202 0 RCSEL2 JL24 0
96 LED_A_TV RCSEL2 35 2 SDET 2
LED_HDD2 R187 100 JL125 0 4.9 JL199 R203 0 RCSEL1 C2IN JL24 1
AFT
AFT
AGC
SCL
AGC
SCL DAT_TO_ M R188 330 JL126 0
97

98
LED_HDD2

DAT_TO_M
RCSEL1

XAMUTE2
34

33
4.9 JL200 R144 0 XAMUTE2 IC103 1 2C

4 SDA
SDA
DAM_TO_ T R189 470 JL127 0 JL201 IC101 VDD DET
XRST1
XRST1 MSPSTAT 99 DAM_TO_T NC 32 CN101 40P
TO (5/5) JL128 3.3 JL202 R222 0 JL24 2
MSPSTAT ASCK R200 330 0 AFT HOTPLUG
+5V 100 ASCK AFT 31 40 HPD
DDC_SW 1 JL24 3
HSM_TO_T

BATTDET
39 DDC_SW 1
MODEL1

MODEL2

AVLOUT
CN103 9P
RESET

SDET3

SDET2

SDET1
ACDET

JL10 1 JL24 4
VDD1

XRST
FUNC DDC_SCL
KEY1

KEY2

KEY3
WDT

GND

DBGP2
AGC

SDA

SCL
CF1

CF2
TX1

TX2
NC

NC

NC

NC
DBGP2
IR

9 38 DSCL
E DBGP1 8
JL10 2 R193
100k DBGP1
R194
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
JL24 5
37 CEC
JL10 3 100k DBGP0 DDC_SDA JL24 6
DBGP0 7 36 DSDA
0

JL142 4.9

JL145 3.3

JL147 4.9

JL150 4.9

JL152 1.7

JL155 2.5

JL160 2.4

JL162 2.4

4.9

JL170 4.9

JL172 4.9

JL174 4.9

JL175 4.5

JL176 5.0
0

JL180 4.9

JL182 4.9

JL184 4.9

JL206 5.0

JL205 5.0

JL204 4.9
JL10 4 R195 JL24 7
100k RESET HST_TO_ M
RESET
JL133

JL136

JL139

JL166

JL168

JL178

JL207

JL203
6 35 HST_TO_ M
JL10 5 R196 JL24 8
100 ASCK
FOR CHECK GND 5 34 ASCK
JL10 6 RXD1 B+ B+ DAT_TO_ M JL24 9
RXD1 4 AUS only 33 DAT_TO_ M
JL10 7 R104 47k JL25 0
1

HSM_TO_ T
100k

100k
R225

R123

R124

R129

R126

R127

R133

R134

R135

TXD1
330

330

330

100
15k

10k

1k

TXD1 3
IC102 32 HSM_TO_ T
R117

C113
1M

JL25 1
330p

DAM_TO_ T
C107

6.8k

RTOMAIN
R139

C104
6.8k
R141

GND 2 C125 DAM_TO_ T

R105

R109

R110

R111

22 31
100

330

100

100

B+ B+ ACDET 25V B+ 0.1

XRST 1 JL25 2
V+5V 1 10 30 XRST1
B+ GTOMAIN JL25 3
TO (2/5) 29 MRST
R138 470

R137 100

R140 100

R142 100

R143 100

JL272 P_CONT2 JL25 4

C106 R107
28 P_CONT2
R116

R118

0.1 10k R106

5.0
0

0
JL163

0 C124 Q102 C/R IN

0.1 0 27 GND
2SC4154TP-1EF
4.9

JL143 JL156
5.0

L_IN JL25 5
JL14 8

JL21 2 RESET 26 L_IN

32.768kH z

R131 0
F
15MHz
X102

X101

3 2 1 4.7k GND
25
1 JL211 R_IN JL25 6
R132 R_IN
6.8k AEP,UK only 24
IN
GND

OUT

AMUTE1 JL25 7
BD4846G-TR

C105
IC102

0.1 Q110 23 AMUTE1 TO RD-065 (3/7)

DTA143EUA-T106 R_OU T JL25 8 BOARD
22 R_OUT CN2301
C111 C112 C114 C115 EPGEQ B+
NC

NC

22p 22p 10p 10p

2 21 GNDA THROUGH THE
L_OU T JL25 9
HSM_TO_ T

4 5 R207 FAR-006 FFC

20 L_OUT
FUNC_IN

470
AVLOUT

4.9
XRST1
RESET

SCL0
SDA0
KEY1

KEY2

KEY3

(SEE PAGE 4-34)

AGC

19 GND
JL131 JL134 EPGEQ 0 C149 JL26 0
10p RTOMAIN
18 B_IN
JL137 R112 10k 50V R197 0
JL273
SCL0
SCL
SDA

SDA0
CEC0

DDC_SW 2

DDC_SC L

JL218 17 GND
DDC_SDA

4.9
JL26 1
GTOMAIN G_IN
R208 L102 16
C110 2.6 4.9 0 47uH
1 15 GND
B Q101 JL22 0 JL26 2
R224

R223

C152 C/R IN
100

100

DTC124EUA-T106 1 14 C/R_IN
10V Q112 JL27 7 R210
D101 RESET 4.9 C142 F 3.2 820
2SC4154TP-1EF
G 1SS355TE-17 R113
0
JL130 0
C109
R228
C141
1 1000p
CV I/F JL276
0.5%
Y_IN JL26 3
13 GND
5.0

5.0

4.4

4.9

5.0

4.4

4.9

0 10V 50V
0.1 F JL28 0 12 Y_IN
Q111 R209
JL129 3.3k
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 3.2 2SC4154TP-1EF 11 GND
D102 JL26 4
1SS355TE-17 CV I/ F C_OU T
10 C_OUT
TC7MB3257FK(EL)

2.5 JL279 R216

1.8 750 9 GND
IC104

0.5% TEXTVI N Y_OUT JL26 5

D103 JL27 8
1SS355TE-17 8 Y_OUT
B+ JL27 0 JL27 1
C15 0 7 GND
B+ R130 R217 R215 1 R214
CB_OUT JL26 6
R201 0 1k 680 10V 3.3k
0 R701 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 F 6 CB_OU T
B+ 220k R703 0
D104
5 GND
SIGNAL PATH
4.9

1SR154-400TE-25
3.6

3.6

3.6

B+ Q751 CR_OUT JL26 7

R751 2SA1576A-T106-QR CR_OU T
1k 4
JL109 IR I/F SW R221
100 3 GND VIDEO SIGNAL
JL26 8
R752
C753
100p
5.0 C751
0.1
YP_OUT
2 YP_OUT
AUDI O
JL705 4.7k JL26 9 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
C120 C122 C123 JL707 1 X525P
H 0.1 1
10V
F
470
6.3V
C118
0.22F
5.5V R755
4.7k
C752
100p
0
5.0 JL70 9 5.0
0
L751
0uH JL712
KN101 KN102 REC
JL71 1

R753 JL706
4.7k
JL710
R756
R754
150
G-LINK
C 121
1
IC104 E E
PB
1k JL713
JA751 DDC SW JL22 1

Q752 JL708 C754 JL714

100p
2SC4081T106R
IR I/F SW

AEP,UK only

IT CONTROLLER, IR
4-5 4-6 AV-114 (1/5)
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-47 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AV-114 BOARD(2/5)
POWER/FAN CONT. AUS only Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES- GTOMAIN line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
10
BTOMAIN
Replace only with part number specified.
A BTOMAIN
C/R_IN TO (1/5)

GTOMAIN
5 B+
V +5V I CN302 24P
TO (4/5) JL322
GND GN D
24
JL30 5
V +12R1 FAN-
C302 23
0.1
B+ R301
0 C303 JL323 25V GN D
100 F 22
16V JL329
P_CONT P_CONT
R302 21
0
V +5R8E EV+5.8V
20
B+ B+ JL31 9
GN D
R303 19
0
EV+5.8V
18
JL306
D301 GN D
17
UDZS-TE17-15B
JL317 EV+12.1V
16
B+ C301 JL330
B V+12R1E 0.1
25V
F B+
15
GN D

V +32V
TO DT-120
14 BOARD
CN103
P_CONT2 P_CONT2
13
JL331 THROUGH THE
DET_ANT DET_ANT
12 FVA-002 FFC
JL332
ANT5V_SW ANT5V_SW
11
JL333 (SEE PAGE 4-22)
DTBON DT_TUON
10
JL31 4 JL325
GN D
9
R218 C205
0 22 Y_IN
8
25V JL326
D201 GN D
1SS355TE-17 7
R251
L201 0 B_IN
1mH 6
C204 C202
100 0.1 GN D
C208 5
C206 16V 25V 0.1
470p F 5.4 16V G_IN
50V B 4
0.3
FANCTL GN D
3
C JL307
JL311
Q201 2
C/R_I N
R219
3.3k R220 2SD2114KT146 GN D
2.2k 1
FAN CONT
GND C/R_I N

Y_IN

B+
GND 6
V +5V I V+5V I
TO (3/5)

JL34 5

JL34 4
B+ V+5V O
B+
Q302 V+9V

R308 0

R307 0
2SC4154TP-1EF
B+ +5V REG
JL31 2 5.6 4.9 B+ JL34 3
V+5BB
2 L303
0uH JL315
TO (1/5) 0 JL336 5.7 5.0 B+
5 5.6
R304 C305
100 0.1
JL34 1
D 25V
F 5.6
4
5.6
3 R306 0
JL339
5.6 Q306
JL30 8
1 0 33 5 2SC2411K-T-146-CQ
6 +5V REG
Q301 C306 C307 C308
UMD2N-TR 0.1 100 100 5.7 5.6
25V 16V 16V
+5V REG F 3
4
2
4.9 JL334 1 6

JL301 0 0 C314 C315 C 316

RFTHRU 0.1 100 100
Q305 25V 16V 16V
2 UMD2N-TR F
4.8 +5V REG
B+ Q304
2SD2153T100V
+5V REG
SWVION5 V JL338

R318
0 JL313 5.6 5.0 B+ JL34 6
V+5TU
0 JL316
R305 C309 5
12.0
33 0.1 5.6 JL337 9.0 B+ JL34 7
25V
E F 5.6
3
5.6 JL34 0

JL309
4
0 9.6
7
0 Q308
1 6 5 2SC2411K-T-146-CQ
R309 TO (5/5)
C310 C311 C312 C329 1.5k +9V REG
0.1 220 100 0.1 D304
Q303 25V 16V 16V 25V 9.7 9.6 1SS355TE-17
2
4.9 UMD2N-TR F F 4 3
+5V REG JL335 6
1
JL320 0 C318 C319 C320
TUON 0.1 100 100
25V 16V 16V
Q307 F
2 UMD2N-TR
4.8
B+ JL34 2

D302
SWVION9 V UDZSTE-179.1B
F +9V REG B+
IC317
0.5A L304
D303 L305
32V B+ 1SS355TE-17 JL32 7 0uH B+
330uH
V +32V
C323 C328
1 R313 R315 C326
R310 R314 100k 10 0.1
4.7k 50V 22k 180k 50V
F 0.5% 50V
F
JL304 12.0 JL32 1
JL302 JL303 0.3 6.2 1 4 6.2
TU_DCCO N
R311 5.7 JL324
820

C322
JL318
2
5

5.7
SIGNAL PATH
100p 6 3 R316
C324 0.6 22k
50V 0.1
25V
0.5% VIDEO SIGNAL
F AUDI O
0.3
JL310 JL32 8
GND CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
Q310 Q309
0.6
2SC5876T106QR
Q311 REC
2SC4154TP-1EF HN1A01FU-TE85R
R312
G +32V SWITCHING
REG
10k +32V SWITCHING
REG +32V SWITCHING
REG PB

POWER/FAN CONT.
AV-114 (2/5) 4-7 4-8
 RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
• Refer to page 4-47 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

TEXTVI N

A AV-114 BOARD(3/5) R458

470 2.2

VIDEO/AUDIO
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES- JL488
1.6
R455
47 SIGNAL PATH
Q403 IC403 VIDEO SIGNAL
ISA1602AM1TP-1EF C461 MM1503XNRE AUDI O
1
4.9 0 B JL485 4.9 JL48 7 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
3 6 IN 1 SW

1
0.5 2.0 1.6 Y_I N
2 GND OUT REC

2
4.9 JL486 4.9
IN 2 Vcc

3
4.9
4 1
Q411 B+ C460 2.3 PB
UMD2N-TR R459 1 C462
75 B 1
0.5%

IC402
BUFFER

B D420 R465
Q410
2SC4154TP-1EF 4.9 4.9
DAP202uT106 470 JL49 1 0
IC403

R_IN
L_IN
2.3

RCSEL1
2.3 RCSEL
1.6 Q408 1.6
RCSEL2 0
2SC4154TP-1EF Y_I N

RTOMAI N
IC402 Q413
C472 BA4558F-E2 C475
10 10 DTC124EUA-T106 C/R_IN
50V 4.6 9.0
50V B+ B+
V+9V

8
4.6 4.6

+
2

7
C464

-
4.6 C473
4.6 0.1 100
3 25V 16V

6
-
F

AV1_ROUT

AV2_ROUT
AV1_LOUT

AV2_LOUT
4.6

RGBOUT
C_OU T

Y_OU T

YP_OUT
CR_OUT
CB_OUT
BLANK
4

5
JL4416
6
R_IN TO (2/5)
R_IN
L_IN R453 C471 C474
R463 B+ B+
10 10

UDZSTE-1711B
L_IN 8.2k 8.2k V+5VI
0.5% 50V 50V C450 C451 R401
RCSEL1 0.5% B+
C

D401
RCSEL1 4.7 4.7 0 R461
C453 C404 680 V+5V O
50V 50V

JL4424
RCSEL2 100 1
RCSEL2 JL4423 10V 10V
F
BLANK
BLANK GND
C_OUT C452 C401 C402

R402 560

R403 560
100 1 100p C409 C410
C_OUT 10V 10V C403 R404 1 1
Y_OUT 50V 100p 10V 10V 4.9 0
F R454 R462 0
10k 10k 50V C406 C407 C 408 B B
Y_OUT 0.5% 0.5% 0.1 1 1

C413
0.1
CB_OUT

16V
B
16V 10V 10V
CB_OUT JL45 5 B B B D410
CR_OUT JL456
0 UMZ6.8N-T106
CR_OUT D801
YP_OUT Q402
2SD2114KT146 UMZ6.8N-T106
JL454

4.6 JL453

4.5 JL452

JL451

JL450

JL449

JL448
2.3 JL447

4.9 JL446

JL445

JL444

2.3 JL443

JL442

2.3 JL441

JL440
2.3 JL439

JL438
2.3 JL437

2.3 JL436
YP_OUT R407
Y_IN 0 C486 R468
Y_IN 470 68 R469
6.3V 0.5% JL441 8 3.9 JL4422
TEXTVIN C438
4.6

4.5

4.5

9.0

4.5

4.5

4.5

2.2

2.3

2.3
1

0
TEXTVIN 10V
F C454
1 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 100
10V

1
2VIN JA401

A HorHDD/OUT(R)
A HorHDD/OUT(L)
A AV1/OUT(R)

A AV2/OUT(R)
A AV1/OUT(L)

A AV2/OUT(L)

A AV1/OUT2(L)

3
A AV1/OUT2(R)
A DVD M C

VCC
To DVD(R)
To DVD(L)

VIDEO AGC

MAIN C D

VCC

SLICER OUT

DVD VorY OUT

PAL SCART IN
F A DVD(R)

DVD C OUT

PAL SCART D2

F DVD C

PAL SCART D1

F DVD Y

RGB M OUT

F DVD Pb(B)

F dvd Pr(R)

F DVD PY(G)
F A DVD(L)

MAIN C IN
TO (1/5) 2VIN
C414 C435
C 436 4 S VIDEO

G
Y2IN 0.1 R433 1
1
D Y2IN 25V 1M 10V
C476

4
F JL457 4.5 B 10V
C2IN 1.8 JL435 BI N 0.01

2
B R470
C2IN 81 A HIFI IN(R) SCART B IN 50 25V 75 R471
C415 JL458 4.5 B 0.5% 0
XAMUTE2 0.1 2.3 JL434 R/CI N JL4420 JL441 9 JL4421
XAMUTE2 25V 82 A HIFI IN(L) SCART RorC IN 49
AMUTE1 F JL459 0 1.8 JL433 GI N D409
AMUTE1 R422 83 V DVD M C SCART G IN 48 UMZ6.8N-T106
10k JL460 4.5
R_OUT 4.9 C437
R_OUT C468 84 A L4 IN(R) 1
0.1 VCC 47 R435
L_OUT JL461 4.5 0.4 1M
10V
B GOUT 3
L_OUT C469
C411 1 0 . 1 85 A L4 IN(L) PY(Y)G OUT 46 LINE 2
R408 JL483 10V B JL462 4.5
CSYNCIN TU_RIN 470 0.3 R/COUT OUT
CSYNCIN
SDA
R413
TU_LI N 470 JL484 C412 1
10V B JL463 4.5
86 A TUNER IN(R)
IC401 Pr(Cr)/RorC OUT 45
0.3 BOUT JL4401
SDA 87 A TUNER IN(L) Pb(Cb)/B OUT 44

UMZ6.8N-T106
R436

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106
SCL 4.5 VIDEO/AUDIO 4.4 JL432 100 SCL
SCL SCL 43

D416
88 VREF(9V/2) SELECTOR

D413

D414

D415
R414 JL480 C419 1 R437 JA402
B+ V+5V 470 10V B JL464 4.5 4.4 JL431 100 SDA R801
V+5V
V 89 A L3 IN(R) SDA 42 0
R415 JL479 C420 1 JL465 4.5
P_SAVE 470 10V B 4.8 JL430 CSYNCI N V
P_SAVE 90 A L3 IN(L) IC401 SYNC 41
R416 JL478 C421 1 HA118326APFR-E C487 R472 R473 VIDEO
L2_RIN 470 10V B JL466 4.5 2.2 470 6.3V 68 0.5% JL4407
3.9
L2_RIN 91 A L2 IN(R) PY(Y)OUT 40
R417 C422 1 C 489 R476 0.5% R477 JL4411
L2_LIN JL477 10V B JL467 4.5 2.5 470 6.3V JL4408
470 68 3.9
L2_LIN 92 A L2 IN(L) Pr(Cr)/OUT 39
C423 1 C 488
E AV1_RIN
AV1_RIN JL4426 R418
470
R419
JL476 10V
C424
JL475 10V
B
1
JL468 4.5
93 A L5 IN(R) Pb(Cb)/OUT 38
2.5 470 6.3V
R474
68 0.5%
JL4409 R475
3.9
JL4413
JL4412 CR

AV1_LIN JL4427 470 B JL469 4.5 8

AV1_LIN 94 A L5 IN(L) GND 37
AV2_RIN 2.2 7 L
AV2_RIN 95 GND V2 OUT 36 AUDIO L
AV2_LIN JL470 2.7 JL429 6 L801
AV2_LIN 96 A AV1 R OUT(R) FBCD 35 0uH
AV2_V/YIN C455 JL471 2.5 JL428
AV2_V/YIN 4.7 97 A AV1 R OUT(L) C2 OUT 34
C439 5 CB
50V 0.1
AV1_V/YIN JL472 JL427 16V JL440 3
AV1_V/YIN 98 RF-C A OUT S1/S2 B OUT 33 B
C497 JL473 JL441 0 C478
AV2_V/YOUT C418 0.1 2.1
AV2_V/YOUT 1 25V 99 A AGC D V2 OUT 32 0
10V F JL474 1.9 R478 R480
AV1_V/YOUT F C490 JL4414 R
AV1_V/YOUT 100 VTR VorV&S V3 IN GND 470 68 3.9
31 Q406
SYNC DET OUT

S1/S2 B OUT

AUDIO R
RS IN D OUT

0.5%
VIDEO L3 IN

VIDEO L2 IN

VIDEO L1 IN

6.3V C491
BOUT 2SD2114KT146 L802
SEP C2 IN
V C&S C3 IN

SEP Y1 IN

SEP Y2 IN
SEO C1 IN
DL3 DRIVE

59/61PIN

47
SYNC DET

TUNER IN
SYNC DET

BOUT R482 0uH

VTR OUT
AV2 OUT

35V
C1 OUT
V1 OUT

Y1 OUT

JL49 5 100 JL497

BS IN

R/COUT L_OUT
COMPONENT
FBCD

FBCD
GND

GND

VCC

VCC

R/COUT
FBC

Y
BG

R439 VIDEO OUT

9 GOUT 1.8M R485
R479
470 0
JL4405
GOUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 22k R484
TO (4/5) GIN 1k 0.7 C482 C485
JL49 4 470p 0
2.3

JL40 5 1.8

4.8

JL40 6 2.3

JL40 8 1.8

JL40 9 0.6

JL41 0 2.3

JL41 3 1.8

JL41 4 1.8

JL41 5 2.7

JL41 6 1.8

2.9
JL41 7 2.2

JL41 9 1.7

JL42 0 2.7

2.2

JL42 2 2.7

JL42 4 4.9

4.9

2.2

GIN
0

50V
R/CIN JL49 6
F
JL40 4

JL40 7

JL41 1

JL41 2

JL41 8

JL42 1

JL42 3

JL42 5

R/CIN
BIN
R438
JL40 2

BIN
0

RGBOUT 2.3
RGBOUT R420 R448 B+
AV2_ROUT P_SAVE JL40 1 0 R425 C457 0 JL49 9 0.7 C484
R421

1.8M R487
1.8M

100k 10 470p
AV2_ROUT 22k
50V R486 50V
AV2_LOUT C493
47 1k
Q407 0
R432

AV2_LOUT C 431 C432 C428 C446 35V

1M

AV1_ROUT R_OUT JL4406 2SD2114KT146 JL49

8
R430

0.1 1 0.1 1
R431

R428
1M

Q401
1M

AV1_ROUT 16V 10V 16V 10V

0

AV1_LOUT DTC124EUA-T106 C498 C499 C443 B B B B C440 C441 C442 R488 R490
0.1 1 0.1 1 C 458 D402 470 100
0.1 0.1 100
AV1_LOUT 25V 25V 10V 16V 10V 25V DTZ-TT11-6.8B
RTOMAIN F B B F 10V XAMUTE2 JL492
F F
RTOMAIN
C456 C500 C444 C445 C496 C434
0.5%

C447
R447

1 0.1 1 1 0.1 0.1 D419

75

50V 25V 0.01 10V

F 25V B
10V 25V 16V 1SS355TE-17
TU_RIN B F B 0 4.2
0.5%

B
R444

TU_RIN 6 3
75

R445 2.7
8 0
NNCD3.9F-T1B

TU_LIN 75 AMUTE1
TU_LIN 0.5%
NNCD3.9F-T1B

2
D422

5
TO (5/5) TU_VIN JL493
D421

TU_VIN
D418 1 4
4.3 Q404
G V+5V
1SS355TE-17 UMD2N-TR
AV1_V/YI N

AV2_V/YOUT

AV1_V/YOUT
AV2_V/YIN

C463 C481 C492

TU_VIN

0.1 0.1 220

Y2I N

2VI N
C2IN

25V 25V 10V

F F

VIDEO/AUDIO
4-9 4-10 AV-114 (3/5)
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-47 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

AV-114 BOARD(4/5) B+
EURO R516
R515 1.2k
560 JL533
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES-
R517 R518 12.0
1.5k JL53 1 10 JL532 12.0 Q502
R569 R566 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
A 1k 22k
SQU -1.9
SWITCH
C551
0 22 FUNC_ON D501
25V UDZS-TE17-5.1B
1.7
Q511 AVLTH JL527
ISA1602AM1TP-1EF B+ R506 0 JL529
BUFFER R568 +5V
12k

5.0
R507 R509 D527 JL53 4

0
R510 1SS355TE-17 JL528
4.7k 27k R574 D502
JL514 2.2M
AVLIN 0 U DZS-TE17-5.1B D526
R562 5 4 D523
10k Q505 DAN217UT106 1SS355TE-17
R508 JL516 2SC4154TP-1EF

VCC
4.9

TC7S66FU(TE85R)
JL53 0

CONT
47k
4.9
C550
22
3 Q504 0
JL515 4.5
AV IN,OUT
SWITC H

IC406
25V 2SC4154TP-1EF R511
2.9 TO (1/5) AV IN,OUT 220k 0 6.3 4 1 9.5
Q510 SWITCH 4.5 C515 C 510

IN/OUT

OUT/IN
2SC4154TP-1EF 0 C517 0.1 0.1 0 0
R564

GND
BUFFER 2.3 R565 Q503 0 220p
15k 5 2
680 2SC4154TP-1EF
GTOMAIN JL517 JL52 5 JL52 6 D524
AV IN,OUT 0 1 2 3
Q501
SWITCH DAN217UT106 6 3
C511 R512 R520 R513 UMH1NTN

4.5

1.1
R558 220p 100k 220 100k
B+ 10k SWITCH
B V+5VI
C547
4.9 22 AVLOUT
25V
Q509 2.9
2SC4154TP-1EF FUNC_IN
5 BUFFER
TO (2/5) BTOMAIN
2.3 BLANK
SAMUTE
IC406 R519
56k

AV LTH SW D530
R561 R560 JL512
680 15k JL508 UDZSTE-1713B
Q506 JL513
GND HN1C03FU-TE85R
MUTE SW 0 6 3 0 R535

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106
C516

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106
3.9k D531 470p
B+ JL505 0.7 0.7

D516
UMZ6.8N-T106

D514

D515

D517
D513
V+12R1 JA501
R534 2 5 C518 42P
C545 C541 JL509 1000p
RTOMAIN D528 100
3.9k 4.7 R536
L851
1SS355TE-17 R542 50V 1 4 R537 L853 L852 0uH
16V 100 470 100 0uH 0uH JL54 9 1.ROUT
AV1_ROUT
JL55 0

1
AV1_RIN 2.RIN
JL55 1

2
AV1_LOUT 3.LOUT

3
AV1_LIN 4.GNDA
R539 R521

4
R543 C542 R538 5.GNDV
C 4.7 470 100 68 R522 JL55 2

5
100 JL51 9 3.9 6.LIN
50V 0.5% C520 1000p L854 0uH JL55 3

6
BOUT 7.BOUT
JL55 4

7
R540 R541 8.FUNCTION
R547 C529

8
R546 100k 100k 9.GNDV
100k 100k 470 JL55 5

9
10.N-LINK

UMZ6.8N-T106
6.3V

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106
JL55 6

10
11.GOUT
JL55 7 LINE 1 / TV

D522

11
12.NC

D518

D521
C519

D519

D520

12
R548 R549 470p 13.GNDV
C530 R523

13
100k 100k C 531 470 68 R524 14.GNDV
JL55 8

14
470 6.3V 0.5% 3.9 15.R/COUT
6.3V JL520 JL55 9

15
GOUT 16.BLANK
R525 68 JL521 R526 3 . 9 R529

16
R/COUT 100k 17.GNDV
0.5% JL522 R528 75 0.5%

17
RGBOUT 18.GNDV
R527 0 JL523 R531 0 JL56 0

18
AV1_V/YOUT 19.V/YOUT
9 JL524 R563 0 JL56 1

19
AV1_V/YIN 20.V/YIN
JL510 C532 R530 JL56 2

20
11.3 470 21.GNDV

1000p

1000p
JL506 75 D504

21
R532 L501 L855

C505

C507
Q507

470p

470p
6.3V

C506

C508
TO (3/5) JL511 0.5% 75 0uH 0uH
JL501 0 HN1C03FU-TE85R UMZ6.8N-T106
0.5%
MUTE SW 0 0 R556
9
3 6 L856
R557 3.9k D503 L858 L857 0uH
11.2 3 . 9 k JL504 0.7 0.7 NNCD3.9F-T1B 0uH 0uH JL53 5
22.ROUT
Q508 5 2 JL53 6

22
C543 JL507 23.RIN
DTA124EUA-T106 JL53 7

23
C544 4.7 4 R550 R551 24.LOUT
SA MUTE 50V R544 1 D506 D507

24
4.7 470 R553 100 D505 25.GNDA
D JL502 50V 100 100 UMZ6.8N-T10 6 UMZ6.8N-T106

25
AV2_ROUT UMZ6.8N-T106 JL53 8
26.GNDV

26
AV2_RIN 27.LIN
L859 0uH JL53 9

27
AV2_LOUT 28.BIN
JL54 0

28
JL503 R545 100 R552 29.FUNCTION

29
AV2_LIN 470 R573 0uH 30.GNDV
JL54 1

30
BIN 31.N-LINK
JL54 2

31
GIN 32.GIN
D529 UDZSTE-1713B JL54 3

32
33.NC
LINE 3 / DECORDER

33
34.GNDV

34
35.GNDV
JL54 4

35
R/CIN 36.R/CIN
JL54 5

36
37.BLANK
C528

37
R504 R505 C503 38.GNDV
470 L862 100p

38
6.3V * JL51 8 * L803 0uH 39.GNDV
0 50V JL54 6

39
AV2_V/YOUT 40.V/YOUT
JL54 7

40
AV2_V/YIN 41.V/YIN
JL54 8

41
R559 42.GNDV

UMZ6.8N-T106

UMZ6.8N-T106
NNCD3.9F-T1B

NNCD3.9F-T1B

NNCD3.9F-T1B

42
0 L502 L860
C552 0uH 0uH L861

D508
R554 R555 R571 R514 R503 R502 R501

D509

D510

D511

D512
100k 100k 75 75 75 75 75 100p 0uH
0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 50V

E
R504 R505
68 0.5% 3.9 AEP,UK
0 75 0.5% AUS

EURO
AV-114 (4/5) 4-11 4-12
 RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
• Refer to page 4-47 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

AV-114 BOARD(5/5) AERIAL

TUNER
IN OUT
-REF.NO.: 10,000 SERIES-
U601 (TUNER TMFE2-4707A)

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT
SIF OUT

AGC OUT

AFT OUT
GND

GND
SDA
SCL

MB
NC
BB

TU
JL603

JL605

JL608

JL609

JL610

JL611

JL612

JL616

JL617
L601 SIGNAL PATH

R638
100
0uH R635
0uH
B+ JL60 1

R636

R637
VIDEO SIGNAL

0uH

0uH
V+5B B
B+ JL602 AUDI O
V +32V
B+ B+ CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
7 V+5TU
L602
TO (2/5) 0uH REC
C602 R609
2200p 0
50V R603 C611 C608 PB
B 0 47 0.47
16V 10V
B
GND
C609 C603 C604
B JL604
100 2200p 100p
10V 50V
B
50V
JL61 8
AGC
R605 Q601
C606 4.5 10k ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
10p R607
1k 3.9 BUFFER
50V
C605 Q602 1.6 R602
10p ISA1602AM1TP-1EF 1k
50V
AGC
AFT
R606 2.2 JL620
L604 L605 10k
0uH 0uH
B+
+5V
B+
L606 C617 C638 C618 C639 L608
L607 0.1 10 0.1 3.3
100uH 0uH 0uH
25V 50V 25V 50V C641
F F 10
50V B+
C613 C614

JL632

JL635

JL637

JL639

JL641

JL643
C640
0.1 0.1 100
25V 25V 10V

2.6

2.5

3.5
F F
C C 642
100
C619
0.1

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34
10V 25V
C620 C643 F
R630 C615 C622 C621 1 100 R623
100p 56p 56p

VREFTOP
C616 330 10V 1k

MONOIN
50V 50V 10V

NC/ASG
50V

AGNDC

CAPLM
AHVSS
0.01 L609 F

SC1R
AVSS
25V 10uH TU_VIN

NC

NC

NC
B C628
4.9 5.0 0.01
AVSUP AHVSUP

33
25V

1
JL61 9 JL62 1 1.5 JL64 6 B JL65 9
AIN1 + NC JL65 6

32
TU_LIN

2
JL62 2 1.5 JL64 7
R631 AIN1 - SCOL Q604

31
4
IC601

3
4.7k C 629 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
C623 JL64 8 3900p
4.9 TESTEN SCOR BUFFER 2.2 8

30
3p 50V

4
TO (1/5) Q606 R624
1.5 50V EURO MSP JL64 9 B 3.3k 1.5
2SC4154TP-1EF CJ 2.3 XI N VREF1

29
5
SIF AMP TO (3/5 )
R632 JL614 JL62 3 2.1 JL650 R625
22 XOUT IC601 TP 3.3k

28
JL66 1

6
0.9 MSP3417G-QG-B8V3
R616 JL62 4 1.4
X601 0 TP DACML

27
JL615

7
18.432MHz C630
JL62 5 0 1.4 JL65 1 560p R626 C627 C626
DCO1 DACMR

26
MSPSTAT 50V

8
1k 0.1 0.1
C624 JL62 6 JL65 2 25V 25V
R634 R633 DCO0 VREF2 F F

25
3p

9
2.2k 100 50V
D CJ JL62 7
ADSEL TP

10

24
JL62 8 4.9 JL65 3 JL657 JL660
STBYQ TP

11

23
TU_RIN
R619 JL654 Q605
10k C631 ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
0.01

RESETQ
C 632 BUFFER
10

DVSUP
25V

DVSS
3900p

SDA
SCL
50V B 2.2

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP
R627
B 3.3k 1.5

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22
R628

JL63 8

JL64 0

JL64 2
JL634

JL636
3.3k

4.9

4.8
JL65 8

JL644

JL645
4.3

4.3
B+
JL631 C633

JL633
C625
560p

R620
1
50V

0
10V
F

C636 JL655
C635
22p 22p
R621 100 50V 50V
SCL
R622 100
SDA

E XRST1

Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted

line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.

TUNER
4-13 4-14 AV-114 (5/5)
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveform.
• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
C148
2p
DT-120 BOARD(1/5) 50V
CK X100
27MHz IC110 IC110
TC7SH04FU(T5RSONYJF)
EMMA2LL C149
INV

-REF.NO.: 40,000 SERIES-

F101 1 IC104 2p
50V NC VCC
3.3

5
0uH KA5SDKAS01TSN C154
CK 1.4 JL1139 XRESET
0.1
A B+ INA 16V

2
C130 1.6 1.6
XTB XT F

8
0.1 1.3 CI_27MHz
16V 3.3 R107 GND OUTY

4
0

R182
F NC STB R105

0
1.6 3.3 33
VC VDD XRESET_FLASH

6
1.3
VSS O0 R183

5
C131 0
0.1
IC104 16V
F
B+
VCLK

27MHz DSC

R726
10k

I2C_SCL_DTBR

I2C_SDA_DTBR

XCI_VCC_5V
IC322
DQ15 TC7SB66FU(TE85R) C639

R151
R153

47k
47k
1000p
DQ14 50V

R155

R154
DQ13 1.2 3.3

47k

47k
B

5
DQ12

R534
C640

R532
DQ11 1.1

0
0
1

R531

2
DQ10 6.3V C638

R643

0
1000p

0
0 X6S

R159
R194

100
50V

56
IC321

4
0 C637
B 1 TC74VCX245FK

R642

R160
C614

100
R651 6.3V

0
0.1 0 3.3 X6S
16V F 3.3 3.3
B IC322

R641

20
R733

1
0
R661 B+ R725 0 5
1k 0.5% 1.6 3.2
10k

19
2
SW Q312 TO (5/5)
JL1157 R660 DTC124EUA-T106 0 1.9
1k

C120

C117
0.1

18
C116

R149
STREAM_7

0.1

47k

3
1
C615 0.5% SWITCH
0.1 0 0.4

17
IC318 R723 STREAM_6

4
16V

C194
150

JL1112

0 JL1111

R172
C128
NJM12904V(TE2)

0.1

10k
F 1.6 0.4

R644

16
STREAM_5

0
B+

5
0 0.8
C129

R147

R146

15
STREAM_4

10k

10k

6
R110

R111

R569

R570

R109

R173

R571

R572
5

100

100
JL580

56

56
1

0
JL1154 1.2 B+ B+ 0 0.4

14
STREAM_3
+

7
6

3
-

R114
0 1.2 C147 0 0.5

33
JL116 47

13
R724 STREAM_2

8
7

2
+
- 16V
3.3 1.2 150 0 0.5

R101

R170
JL1123

JL1124

JL1122

JL1118

JL1119

JL1120

JL1121

JL1101

JL1102

JL1103

JL1104

JL1105

JL1106

JL1107

JL1108

JL1109

JL1110
10k
B+

12
STREAM_1

JL599

JL598

JL597

JL596

JL595
33

9
8

R1057 1 0.7

2.5

0.2

0.2

0.4

0.2

0.2

1.0

2.5

3.1

3.1

3.1

0.8

3.1
R662

10

11
0 R666 JL579 F102 STREAM_0

0
B+ 0 0uH
C620
10
10V
IC101 162 161 160 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109

GND_14

GND_13

VDD2_2

DQ10

DQ11

DQ12

DQ13

DQ14

DQ15

VDD2_1

GND_12

JTRST

JTCK

JTMS

JTDO

TXD1B

RXD1B

NMI

RSTSWB

RSTOUT

PWMOUT

VDD3_4

GND_11

GND_10

CLK27IN

PAVDD

PAGND

VDD1_4

PPORT44

PPORT43

PPORT42

PPORT41

PPORT40

PPORT39

PPORT38

PPORT37

PPORT36

PPORT35

PPORT34

PPORT33

PPORT32

PPORT31

PPORT30

SCL0

SDA0

PPORT29

PPORT28

PPORT27

PPORT26

PPORT25

PPORT24

GND_9

VDD3_3
JTDI
3.1

3.2

3.1

3.2

1.6

3.3

1.4

1.6

1.5

1.2

1.5

3.3

0.6

1.5

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3
C 256M DDR
C618 CI_RESET IC321
C C144 IC101
IC318 10
10V
C
JL1155 C616
2.2
10V
B C193 163
GND_15
0
PPORT23 108
JL104
R577
0
R138 BUFFER
1 10k
100 K4H561638H-UCB3T V REF 0 JL105 R729
16V GND_16 R139 0 SCL_VDEC
164 PPORT22 107 10k
C101 2.5 DQ9 1.1 0 JL114 R576
1 DQ9
66

VDD1 VSS3 165 106 10k SDA_VDEC

1

6.3V PPORT21
X6S 0 0.8 1.0 3.3 JL106 XCOFDM_RESET R728
DQ0 DQ15 DQ8 DQ8 0
65

DQ0 DQ15 166 105

2

C102 PPORT20 R575 CN102 28P

0.1 2.5 DQS1 1.1 0 JL107 10k CI_VS1
DQS1
64

16V VDDQ1 VSSQ5 167 104 1 AT/XDT

3

R193 PPORT19
F
DQ1 0 0.1 R694 DQ14 DQM1 56 1.2 0 JL108 R589
DVREFDVREF R142
63

DQ1 DQ14 33 168 103 0 2 GND

4

R696 PPORT18 10k

33 0 0.1 0 0 JL109
DQ2 DQ13 DQM1 R143
62

DQ2 DQ13 169 102 B+ 3 SDA_VDEC

5

R598 PPORT17 10k

2.5 C105 68 1.2 0 JL110 R144
1000p SDCLKB DCLKBDCLKB
61

VSSQ1 VDDQ5 170 101 10k 4 SCL_VDEC

6

50V SDCLK PPORT16 C591

R145 R622 R621 10p
DQ3 0 0.3 B DQ12 1.3 3.3 JL111 10k INT_CI
R597 DCLK 22k 22k 50V
60

DQ3 DQ12 171 100 5 GND

7

R704 68 PPORT15
33 JL1156 R605 JL1136
DQ4 0.3 0.1 DCKE 2.4 0 JL153 0
DCKE R141
59

DQ4 DQ11 172 99 6 TDXA

8

DQ11 PPORT14 10k

C103 JL1135
1000p 2.5 DADD12 0 0 JL154
DADD12 R148
58

VDDQ2 VSSQ4 173 98 7 RDXA

9

R705 50V R695 PPORT13 10k C592

33 B 0 0 33 R192 0 0 JL155 R606 10p
DQ5 DQ10 DADD11 DADD11 R179 0
57
10

DQ5 DQ10 100 174 PPORT12 97 50V 8 GND

10k
D DQ6 0 0 DQ9 C114
2.4
VDD2_3
1.5
C140
JL1134
56
11

DQ6 DQ9 0.1 175 DVDD_2 96 9 XRESET

R706 C106 0.1 R607
33 2.5
0.1 GND_17 0
55
12

VSSQ2 VDDQ4 16V R699 176 DGND_3 95 C590 10 GND(RFE/LL)

R707 33 10p
DQ7 33 0.8 0 F DQ8 C113 1.5
VDD1_5 50V
54
13

DQ7 DQ8 1 177 DGND_2 94 C142 11 GND

0 1.3 B+ 0.1 JL1133
DADD9 DADD9
53
14

NC1 NC6 178 REF1 93 12 VCLK

C104 2.5 0.4 1.3 R174
0.1 DADD8 DADD8 R167 100
52
15

VDDQ3 VSSQ3 R700 179 RSET1 92 910 R168 R169 13 GND

R698 16V 33 JL1132
DQS0 33 F 0.6 0.6 DQS1 DADD7 R191 0.4 3.3 220 150
DADD7
51
16

LDQS UDQS 100 180 AVDD_4 91 14 VDO7 TO

C192 2.1 B+ JL1131 RD-065
0.1 DADD6 DADD6 F104
50
17

NC2 NCS 16V 181 AGND_4 90 15 VDO6 BAORD (2/7)

C119 0uH R121 R122
2.5 1.2 F DADD5 0.3 0.5 100 100 JL1130 CN4701
1 DADD5
49
18

6.3V VDD2 VREF C191 182 VAPB 89 R721 16 VDO5

X6S 1 1.9 3.3 100 JL1129 THROUGH THE
DADD4 DADD4 C138
48
19

NC VSS2 6.3V 183 AVDD_3 88 17 VDO4

R701 X6S 0.1 FVR-001 FFC
33 0 0 JL1128
DQM0 DQM1 R190 GND_18
47
20

LDM UDM 100 184 AGND_3 87 18 VDO3

DWEB 2.5 1.2
R702
33 SDCLKB 0.7
R123
100
R124
100 JL1127 (SEE PAGE
GND_19
IC106
46
21

/WE /CK 185 VAPR 86 19 VDO2

2.3 1.3
R197
0 2.4 1.5 JL1126 4-32)
DCASB SDCLK C155 VDD2_4 C137
45
22

/CAS CK 0.1 186 DVDD_1 85 1 R722 20 VDO1

2.4 2.5
R199
0.5 EMMA2LL 100 JL1125
0 DADD3
E DRASB DCKE DADD3
44
23

/RAS CKE 187 DGND_1 84 21 VDO0

F105
DCSB 2.3 DADD2 0.4 IC106 1.3 0uH
DADD2
43
24

/CS NC4 188 UPD61111GM-100-UEV-A REF0 83 22 GND

R610 JL1117
0 DADD12 DADD1 R189 0.1 1.3 47
DADD1 R166
42
25

NC3 A12 100 189 RSET0 82 23 ALRCK

910 R608
1.1 0 DADD0 0.1 3.3 47 JL1116
DBA0 DADD11 DADD0 C136
41
26

BA0 A11 190 AVDD_2 81 1 24 ADATA

R609 JL1115
DBA1 1.3 0 DADD9 DADD10 2.1 47
DADD10
40
27

BA1 A9 191 AGND_2 80 25 ABCK

R125 R126
DADD10 2.2 1.1 DADD8 1.9 0.4 100 100
DBA1 DBA1
39
28

A10/AP A8 R188 192 VACVBS 79 26 GND

100 R616 JL1114
DADD0 0 1.1 DADD7 DBA0 0.5 3.3 47
DBA0 C135
38
29

A0 A7 193 AVDD_1 78 0.1 27 SPDIF

DADD1 0 1.2 DADD6 GND_20
37
30

A1 A6 194 AGND_1 77 28 GND

R128 R127
DADD2 2.3 1.3 DADD5 2.4 0.4 100 100 JL1140
C112 VDD2_5
36
31

A2 A5 R187 195 VAY 76

150 0.1 R104
1.7 1.2 DCSB 2.2 0 10k JL1141
DADD3 DADD4 DCSB
35
32

A3 A4 196 TEST 75 JL1142

2.5 DRASB 2.4 3.3 EC10
DRASB JL1143
34
33

VDD3 VSS1 197 GRDYB 74

EC6
C121 DCASB 2.3 1.6 EC6
1 DCASB
198 ALRCK 73
6.3V R580 EC7
DWEB 2.4 0 10k EC7
X6S DWEB
199 72
F DQM0
R595
56 0
200
DQM0
ADO

ATX 71
1.6 SPDIF
EC8
EC8
EC9
DQS0 0.7 1.6 EC9
DQS0
201 ABCK 70
EC10
DQ7 0.2 1.5 C134 EC10
DQ7
202 VDD1_3 69 0.1
0 EA1
DQ6 DQ6 EA1
XCD FDM_RESET R186 203 GND_8 68
1 TO (3/5) XCD FDM_RESET 56 0 EA2
DQ5 DQ5 EA2
204 GND_7 67
2.4 R579 EA3
C111 VDD2 EA3
I2C_SCL_DTBR 1 205 AMCK 66 10k
I2C_SCL_DTBR JL581
3.2 EA4
2 TO (2/5, 3/5) I2C_SDA_DTBR GND_21 EC9 EA4
I2C_SDA_DTBR 206 GCCB0 65
1.5 3.2 EA5
C110 VDD1_6 EC7 EA5
R594 0.1 207 FCSB0 64
56 0.2 3.2 EA6
INT_CI DQ4 DQ4 EC6 EA6
INT_CI 208 FWEB 63
CI_VS1 0 3.2 EA7
DQ3 DQ3 EC8 EA7
CI_VS1 209 FOEB 62
CI_RESET R100 EA8
DQ2 0 0 0 LLA22 EA8
CI_RESET DQ2
210 RADD22 61
XCI VCC_5V 0 EA9
XCI VCC_5V DQ1 0 EA22 EA9
DQ1
XRESET_FLASH R185 211 RADD21 60

G XRESET_FLASH
CI_27MHz
CI_27MHz
DQ0 56

2.4
0
212
DQ0
RADD20 59
0

0
EA21
EA10

EA11
EA10

C109 VDD2_6 EA20 EA11

0.1 213 RADD19 58
0 EA12
GND_22 EA19 EA12
CI_TPS_0 214 RADD18 57
0 EA13
CI_TPS_0 GND_23 EA18 EA13
CI_TPS_1 215 RADD17 56
CI_TPS_1 3.3 0 EA14
C108 VDD3_ EA17 EA14
3 TO (2/5) CI_TPS_2 0.1 216 RADD16 55
EA15
PPORT10

PPORT11

RDATA10

RDATA11

RDATA12

RDATA13

RDATA14

RDATA15

CI_TPS_2

RADD10

RADD11

RADD12

RADD13

RADD14

RADD15
EA15
PPORT0

PPORT1

PPORT2

PPORT3

PPORT4

PPORT5

PPORT6

PPORT7

PPORT8

PPORT9

VDD1_1

VDD3_1

VDD1_2

VDD3_2
RDATA0

RDATA1

RDATA2

RDATA3

RDATA4

RDATA5

RDATA6

RDATA7

RDATA8

RDATA9

C127
RADD0

RADD1

RADD2

RADD3

RADD4

RADD5

RADD6

RADD7

RADD8

RADD9
GND_1

GND_2

GND_3

GND_4

GND_5

GND_6
CI_TPS_3 0.1
CI_TPS_3 EA16
EA16
CI_TPS_4
CI_TPS_4 EA17
CI_TPS_5 EA17 6
CI_TPS_5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EA18 TO (2/5)
CI_TPS_6 EA18
3.3

3.2

1.5

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.3

3.2

1.5

3.3
CI_TPS_6
EA19
CI_TPS_7 EA19
CI_TPS_7 B+ B+
CI_TPS_8 EA20
EA20
CI_TPS_8
CI_TPS_9 EA21

C118
EA21

0.1
C115
16V
CI_TPS_9

47
CI_TPS_10 B+ EA22
EA22
H CI_TPS_10
LLA22
LLA22
C107

C124

C125

C126
0.1

0.1
1

1
ED0
ED0
ED1
ED1
ED2
CI_TPS_10

ED2
CI_TPS_8

CI_TPS_9

CI_TPS_0

CI_TPS_1

CI_TPS_2

CI_TPS_3

CI_TPS_4

CI_TPS_5

CI_TPS_6

CI_TPS_7

F108 F106 F103

EA10

EA11

EA12

EA13

EA14

EA15

EA16
0uH 0uH 0uH
EA1

EA2

EA3

EA4

EA5

EA6

EA7

EA8

EA9

ED3
ED10

ED11

ED12

ED13

ED14

ED15

ED3
ED0

ED1

ED2

ED3

ED4

ED5

ED6

ED7

ED8

ED9

ED4
ED4
ED5
ED0

ED1

ED2

ED3

ED4

ED5

ED6

ED7

22k ED8

ED9

ED10

ED11

ED12

22k ED13

ED14

ED15

SPDIF
ED5
B+ ED6
D+2.5V
R116

ED6
R551
10k

R535

R547

R561
22k

22k

B+ B+ ED7
ED7
D+3.3V
ED8
ED8
B+ B+
A+3.3V ED9
4 TO (4/5) ED9
R538

R540

R542

R544

R546

R550

R554

R556

R558

R560

R564

R566

R568
B+
22k

22k

22k

22k

22k

22k

22k

22k

22k

22k

22k

22k

ED10

22k
ED10
V+1.5V
I ED11
ED11
ED12
GNDD ED12
ED13
ED13
ED14
ED14
ED15
ED15

EMMA2LL
DT-120 (1/5) 4-15 4-16
 RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveform.
• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

(AEP2 MODEL ONLY)

DT-120 BOARD(2/5)
CI CONTROL
-REF.NO.: 40,000 SERIES-
A 1
CN201

MDO 8
MDO10
MDC10
MDC9
MDC8
MDO9

MDI 8
MDI 4
MDI 9
MDI 3
MD3

MDI7
MDI6
MDI5
2
MD4
3
MD5
4
MD6
5
MD7
6
MDC1
R222 7
10k
MA10
8
MDC3

R281
10k
9
MA11
10
EA1 MA9
EA 1

R208

R207

R206
11

47

47

47
EA2 MA8
EA 2 12
EA3 MA13

1/16W
CHIP
EA 3

R221
13

5%
47
EA4 MA14
B EA 4

EA 5
EA5 MDC6
14

15
EA6 F206 MDC7

0.1
C205
EA 6 0uH 16
EA7 B+ TP216
EA 7

EA 8
EA8
IC202 , IC203 , IC204 17

18

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

5.0

0.6

0.6

0.6
EA9

0
EA 9 MDI9
19

109

108

107

106

105

104

103
128

127

126

125

124

123

122

121

120

119

118

117

116

115

114

113

112

111

110
C209 C210 R231
EA10 47 820
EA10
IC205 MDI8 0.1
20

MDOB0

MOSTRTA

MOSTRTB

MOVALA

MOVALB

REG#

WAITA#

WAITB#

RSTA

RSTB

MOCLKA

MOCLKB

MDIA7

MDIB7

MDIA6

MDIB6

MDIA5

MDIB5

MICLKA

VCC_DVB1

MICLKB

MDIA4

MDIB4

MIVALA

MIVALB

MDIA3
EA11 MA12
EA11 21
EA12
32M FLASH R209 R277
EA2A 47 47 MA7
EA12 R254 0 22
MDO 0 1/16W

102 101 100 99

47 CHIP

1
EA13 EA 1 EA1A MDO 1 MDOA0 MDIB3 MDC7 MA6
EA13 IC205 IC202 JL21 4 0 5% 23
MDO 2

2
EA14 S29GL032A90TFIR30H TC74LCX245FK(EL) MDOB1 RDY/IROA# MA5
EA14 MDC11 R219 24
0 0 10k

3
EA15 R239 0 0 EA3A ED15A 0 MDOA1 RDY/IROB# MA4

24

10
25
EA15 47

11
EA 2 EA2A A0 A1 B8 GND R224 JL21 5 0.5 25
R253 47

4
EA16 EC7 47 3.2 0 EA4A ED14A 0 0.6 MD 7 MDOB2 MDIA2 MA3

23
26
EA16

12

9
CE# A2 B7 A8 26
C EC8 0

98
5
EA17 EA18 EA18A 3.2 0 EA5A ED13A 3.3 0.6 MD 6 MDOA2 MDIB2 MA2

22
EA17 27

13
JL21 3

8
VSS2 A3 B6 A7 0.5 27

97
WE#

6
EA18 3.2 0 EA6A ED12A 0 0.6 MD 5 CD2B# MA1

21
28
EA18

14

7
R240 OE# A4 B5 A6 5.0 0.5 R205 28

96
47

7
EA19 ED0A 3.2 0 EA7A ED11A 0 0.6 MD 4 CD2A# VCC 47 MDI2 MA0

20
29

EA19

15

6
DQ0 A5 B4 A5 R223 0 MD06 29
R210

95
47

8
EA20 LLA2 2 LLA22A ED8A 0 0 EA8A ED10A 0 0.6 MD 3 0 GND_DVB1 ADLE MDI1 MD0

19
30

EA20

16

5
EA22 EA22A DQ8 A6 B3 A4 0.5 MDI0 30

94
9
EA21 ED1A 0 0 EA9A ED9A 0 0.6 MD 2 GND_PROC ADOE# MD1

18
31

EA21

17

4
DQ1 A7 B2 A3 31

93
10
EA22 R241 ED9A 0 0 EA19A ED8A 3.3 0.6 MD 1 MOCLK_IN DATDIR R204 MD2
17
32

EA22 47

18

3
EC6 DQ9 A17 B1 A2 0.5 47 MDI10 32

92
11
LLA22 EA21 EA21A ED2A 0 0 EA20A 5.0 0.6 MD 0 NC DATOE# MDC5
16
33

LLA22

19

2
EA20 EA20A DQ2 A18 OE A1 3.3 MDC4 33
B+ R211

91
12
EA19 EA19A ED10A 0 C206 3.3 0 10k EXTINT VCCEN MDC3
15
34

20
R213

1
DQ1RY BY# 0.1 VCC DIR 0.5 34
47 CHIP

90
13
ED3A 0 3.2 EXTCS CD1B#
R250 1/16W 5%
14
35

R242 DQNP# ACC 10k INT_CI 3.3 0.5 35

14

89
47 0 INT CD1A#
EA10 EA10A ED11A R234 47 CHIP MDC0
13
36

EA 9 EA9A DQ11 A21 EC10 1/16W 5% 3.3 0.5 36

15

88
3.3 3.2 MAIT/ACK MDOB3
6 EA 8 EA8A C213 XRESET_FLASH R257 47 CHIP R203 MDO3
12
37

EA 7 EA7A 0.1 VCC RESET 1/16W 5% 3.3 0.5 47 MDC2 37

16

87
ED 0 0 3.3 WR/STR MDOA3
TO (1/5) ED4A R256 47 CHIP MDO7 MDO4
11
38

ED 0 DQ4 WE# 3.3 38

1/16W 5% MDC1

17
D

86
ED 1 R243 0 0 RD/DIR MDOB4
ED12A EA22A R233 47 CHIP
IC201 MDO6 MDO5
10
39

ED 1 47 DQ12 A20 3.3 39

EA 6 EA6A EC9 1/16W 5%

18

85
ED 2 EA 5 EA5A ED5A 0 0 EA21A CS MDOA4 MDO6
40

ED 2
9

EA 4 EA4A DQ5 A19 IC203 EA16A 0 0 40

CI CONTROL

19

84
ED 3 3.2 0 A15 MDOB5
EA 3 EA3A ED13A EA10A TSB MDO7
41

ED 3 IC201
8

DQ13 A8 EA17A 0 41

20

83
ED 4 3.2 0 EA11A 5.0 A16 CIMAX-SP2L MDOA5
ED6A MDC2

10
42

ED 4

11
7

R244 DQ6 A9 R227 LE GND EA18A 0 0.4 42

21

82
ED 5 47 0 0 MA 4 47 0.5 0.6 A17 MDOB6
ED14A EA12A
43

ED 5

12
6

9
EA17 EA17A DQ14 A10 Q4 Q3 EA19A 0 43
A18

22

81 80
ED 6 EA16 EA16A ED7A 0 0 EA13A EA5A 0 0 EA4A MDOA6 MDC4
44

ED 6

13
5

8
EA15 EA15A DQ7 A11 D4 D3 EA20A 0 0 44
A19 CE1B#

23
ED 7 ED15A 0 0 EA14A EA6A 0 0 EA3A MDC5
45

ED 7

14
4

7
DQ15 AA12 D5 D2 R225 EA21A 0 45

79
A20 CE1A#

24
ED 8 R245 0 EA15A MA 5 0.6 0.6 47 MA3 R202 MDI10
46

ED 8

15
47
3

6
EA14 EA14A VSS1 A13 Q5 Q2 MA2 EA22A 0 0 47 46
MDO5

78
A21

25
ED 9 EA13 EA13A 3.2 0 EA16A MA 6 0.6 0.6 MA1 MDOB7
R251 MDO4 MDI0
47

ED 9

16
2

5
EA12 EA12A 10k BYTE# A14 Q6 Q1 MA0 0 47
R236 A22 MDO3

77
26
ED10 EA11 EA11A 0 0 EA17A EA7A 0 0 EA2A 0 MDOA7
MDC0 MDI1
48

ED10

17
1

4
A16 A15 D6 D1 0 48

76
27
ED11 0 0 A23 CE2B#
ED11 EA8A EA1A MDI2

18

3
D7 D0 49
A24

75
28
ED12 EA18A MA 7 0.6 0.6 GND_DVB2
ED12 MDI3

19

2
Q7 Q0 0 50

74
29
ED13 3.3 5.0 R214 A25 DE2A#
E ED13 C207

20
B+ 100

1
0.1 VCC OE I2C_SDA_DTBR 3.3 51

73
30
ED14 R246 SDA OE#
ED14 47 3.3 5.0 52
ED 0 ED0A C212 I2C_SCL_DTBR

72
IORD#

31
ED15 ED 8 ED8A 0.1 SCL MDI4
ED15 R215 JL21 2 53
ED 1 ED1A

71
32
C211 100 SA0 IOWR#
ED 9 ED9A MDI5
47 0 54
16V

70
33
SA1 MISTRTB R201 MDI6
R247 CI_RESET R216 0 5.0 47 55
0 RESET

34
47 F20 2

69
ED 4 ED4A M
ISTRTA MDI7
0uH 1.3 0 56
ED12 ED12A CI_27MHZ

35

68
ED 5 ED5A CLK MDIB0 MDO8
R252 3.3 5.0 57
ED13 ED13A IC204 0

36

67
VCC_CORE MDIA0 MDC8
EC6 TSB 5.0 58
EC6

37

66
R248 GND_CORE MDIB1 MDC9
EC7 47 R228 5.0 3.3 5.0 59
ED 2 ED2A

10
EC7

38
11

47

65
ED10 ED10A LE GND VCCPROC MDIA1
EC8 MA 9 0.6 0.6 R217 F205 60

GND_TSD

GND_TSO
ED 3 ED3A 0

MOSTRT
VCC_TSI
EC8
12

MISTRT
9
Q4 Q3 0uH

MOVAL

MOCLK
ED11 ED11A

MIVAL

MICLK

VCC_T
MDC10

MDO0

MDO1

MDO2

MDO3

MDO4

MDO5

MDO6

MDO7
C201

MDI0

MDI1

MDI2

MDI3

MDI4

MDI5

MDI6

MDI7
EC9 EA10A 0 0 EA9A C204 61
0.1
13

8
EC9 D4 D3 0.1 MDO10
EC10 R249 EA12A 0 0 EA14A 62

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64
14

47
7
EC10 ED 6 ED6A D5 D2 MDO9
R226 63
MA11
F ED14 ED14A 0.6 0.6 47 MA8 F201
15

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3
6

ED 7 ED7A Q5 Q2 0uH MDO0

MA13
ED15 ED15A MA10 0.6 0.6 64
MA14
16

Q6 Q1 MDO1
MA12
EA11A 0 0 65
EA15A
17

I2C_SDA_DTBR D6 D1 F204 MDO2

I2C_SDA_DTBR C203 Q202
2 3.3 0 EA13A 0.1 0uH 66
DTA143EUA-T106
18

I2C_SCL_DTBR Q7 D0 MDC11
TO (1/5,3/5) I2C_SCL_DTBR 0.5 B+ B+ SWITCH 67
19

D7 A1
3.3 5.0 B+ 68
C208
20

0.1 VCC OE 3.3

R229
JL21 7 3.3 10k

XCI_VCC_5V

0.1
C202
R271

F203
22k

0uH

0
CI_VS1
0 CI_TPS_0
CI_TPS_0
CI_TPS_1
2.4

100

100

100
R626

R625

R624

R278

R279

R280
R230 CI_TPS_1

0
5.0 10k CI_TPS_2
CI_TPS_2
Q201 CI_TPS_3
0 CI_TPS_3
DTC124EUA-T106
G CI_TPS_4

JL20 1
JL20 2
JL20 3
JL20 4

JL20 5
JL20 6
JL20 7
JL20 8

JL20 9
JL21 0

JL21 1
SWITCH CI_TPS_4
CI_TPS_5
Q203 CI_TPS_5
TS1_0
TS1_0
2SC4081T106R CI_TPS_6 3
R273 CI_TPS_6
TS1_1 SWITCH 10k CI_TPS_7
TS1_1 R629 CI_TPS_7 TO (1/5)
0 CI_TPS_8
TS1_2 CI_TPS_8
TS1_2 CI_TPS_9
CI_TPS_9
TS1_3 CI_TPS_10
TS1_3 CI_TPS_10
TS1_4 R628
TS1_4 0

7 TS1_5
TS1_5

TO (3/5) IC208
TS1_6 ST890BDR CI_27MHZ
TS1_6 CI_27MHZ
R627 CI_RESET
TS1_7 0 5.0 CI_RESET
TS1_7 IN1 FAULT INT_CI

8
TS1_8
TS1_8 5.0
IN2 OUT2
0 IC208 XRESET_FRASH
INT_CI
XRESET_FRASH

7
R272
TS1_9 10k 5.0 0
ON OUT1 CI5V SW

6
TS1_9
TS1_10 (AEP1, AEP3, C222
1 GND
0
SET

5
H TS1_10

C I_TPS_10
UK,AUS

C I_TPS_0
C I_TPS_1
C I_TPS_2
C I_TPS_3

C I_TPS_4
C I_TPS_5
C I_TPS_6
C I_TPS_7

C I_TPS_9

C I_TPS_8
TS1_10
MODEL)

TS1_0
TS1_1
TS1_2

TS1_3
TS1_4
TS1_5
TS1_6

TS1_7
TS1_9

TS1_8
C221 R270 R269
47 10k 5.6k

B+ B+
D+5V
B+ B+
8 CI+5V
B+ B+
T O ( 4 / 5 ) DT+3.3V

GNDD

CI CONTROL
4-17 4-18 DT-120 (2/5)
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveform.
• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

C393
IC307 IC307 C383 C385
0 . 1 47
25V 16V
2.2
10V
DT-120 BOARD(3/5) MM1689FHBE
SWITCH
F
C391
B C406
0.1
25V
C408
0.1
25V R674 R673
C412
0.1
25V
3.2 F F 0 0 F
DIGITAL TUNER PS2 NC 0.01
C415

8
25V
R304 B 0.1
3.2 C 341 25V
10k PS1 GND 1 F313 L314

7
R355 F
-REF.NO.: 40,000 SERIES- 10V 0 JL301 0uH 0uH
A 3.3
VIN2 VO2
1.8 B

6
B+ 3.3 1.8 JL302
VIN1 VO1

5
R305 R354 L315
C431 0uH
0 2.2 0 C392
C 340 2.2
10V 1
B 10V
10V B
2012 B

C303 C319 C395

100p 100 F316
50V 16V R323 0uH 47 C413
B+ 0 5.0 16V 0.1
VCC GND1 16V

8
B
1.2 2.3 B+
INPUT OUTPUT1

7
DIGITAL AWRAL F 311 1.2 2.3 JL333
0uH C379 INPUT OUTPUT2

6
0 . 1 R317

1.8

1.8

1.7

1.7

3.3

1.8

3.3

3.3
IN OUT 6.8k C394 C396
25V 2.1 C409

0
F 0.1 0 . 22 VAGC GND2 0.1

5
U301 25V 16V 16V 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
F B R325 B
C378 R320 C389 10k
10 2.2k 47 C400 IC311
16V

RF MODULATOR
F319 0.22 UPC3221GV
16V R327
1 2 3 4 5 B 6.8k

AGC Mon.
JL308

BT(+32V)
0 JL332
B

B2(+5V)

B1(+5V)
TS1_7

IF OUT

IF OUT
49 32

ADRS
C399

SDA
IC311

SCL
0.1 JL309 0 JL331

NC
25V 50 31 TS1_6
F JL330
1.8 0
AGC 51 30 R678
TS1_5
F 309 JL329
0uH 0 *
B+ 52 29 TS1_4
0 0 JL328
R688 C375 53 28 TS1_3
0 R668 R683
C367 0.01 0 JL327

6
0 0.7 0
10 25V TS1_2
F310 50V
B+
B 0 R316
54
IC313 27
JL326

T300
0

2SC2412K-T-146-QR
0uH 4.7k
55 26 TS1_1
C364 F 312 R671 R679
0.1 JL306 0uH R318 D304 1M 1.7 OFDM DEM 0 JL325
C 368 2.2k * TS1_0
25V 1SS355TE-17 56 25 7

Q305
47 F JL30 7 R308 L304
IC313

1
16V 0.82uH 1.7 3.3 C421 TO (2/5)
C384
0.1
R322
C369
6.8k
0.7 3.3
57 2 DRX3975D 24 0.1
25V
16V 1000p 58 23 F
B 33k 50V C397
B X300 C402 10p JL310 0
20MHz 50V F321
10p 0uH 59 22
50V R686 JL323
3.3 0 10k JL324
C398 60 21 TS1_10
0.1 R685 R680
25V 3.3 0 10k
C F
3.3
61

62
20

19 R681
C422
0.1
*

R672 JL311 25V JL322

820 2.1 0 * F
63 18 TS1_9
R687 JL312 0 JL321
R331 150 64 17 TS1_8
1.5k
R682
*

*R678, 679 : 100x4 (AEP1, AEP3, UK,AUS MODEL)

R678, 679 : 33x4 (AEP2 MODEL)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 R680, 681, 682 : 100 (AEP1, AEP3, UK,AUS MODEL)
2 I2C_SCL_DTBR R680, 681, 682 : 33 (AEP2 MODEL)

3.3

1.8

3.3

3.3

3.3
JL31 4

JL32 0
JL315

JL316

JL317

JL318

JL319
JL31 3
TO (1/5,2/5) I2C_SDA_DTBR
B+ B+
R341 R342
3.9 k 3.9 k C416 C418
0.1 0.1
25V
B+ 25V
B+ F F
B+ C417
DT+3.3V
R333 0.1
D V+3.3SW
B+ 100 25V
F
1
F317 XCOFDM_RESET
0uH JL30 5 TO (1/5)

F318 JL304
0uH

R336
0
R337
B+ 0
V+32V
B+ F397
VA+5V 0uH
B+ F398
V+3.3A 0uH
B+
V+3.3D C361
R310 R309 22p C356

E IC312
MM1685ANRE IC312 D303
1SS355TE-17
R312
100
2.2k 2.2k
C373
2.2
10V
50V 22p
50V
F305
5V SW B 0uH B+
B+ 5.7 5.0
V+5.8E VIN VOU T
5
1

JL335 C366
GND C404 JL303
2

2.2 5.0 5.0 47 C358

JL33 4 VIN VOUT 16V 0.1
5

4.9 1.3 10V

DT_TUON CONT NOISE B 25V
4
3

9 F
C382 C381 GND
2

C388 R321
4.7k 47 47 B+
TO (4/5) 1 16V 16V 4.5 5.0
10V C401 ON FLAGB
3
4

B IC312 470p C380

50V 0.1 F306
5V SW 25V 0uH
R319 F IC309
47k FPF2007
JL336 C372 R311 C370 D302
680 100p

AN5V_SW
IC309 0.1
25V
F
50V
C359
0.1
25V
F
C354
1
10V
B
C353
10
16V
SM15T6V8A

5.0 R313 5V SW C414

DET_ANT 4.7k 0.1
5.0 25V
Q306 F
2SA1576A-T106-QR R326 R314
4.7k 4.7k
0
F 4.5
R351
10k
5.0
2SC4081T106R

R358
0 22k 0
Q308

R353 Q306-310
22k FLAG CONT.
R359 R315 0 Q307
10k 10k 2SC4081T106R
0

C313 C320
4.7 4.7
6.3V 6.3V
1.9 B B

R363 R352
10k 10k R689 R690 R692 R343 R345 R347
0 0 0 0 0 0
GNDD
Q310 Q309
DTC143EUA-T106 DTC143EUA-T106
GNDT
R691 R693 R344 R346
0 0 0 0

G R350
0

R349 R348
0 E 0

KN301

DIGITAL TUNER
DT-120 (3/5) 4-19 4-20
 RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveform.
• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CN103 24P

R623 1 GND
DT-120 BOARD(4/5) 0 JL430
2 P_CONT
B+ JL431
POWER C524
3 V+5.8E
0.1
4 GND
-REF.NO.: 40,000 SERIES- B+
A 5 V+5.8E

CN202 12P
IC304 C621
B+ JL432
6

7
GND

EV+12.1V
5V REG C522
JL401 0.022 0.1
P_CONT 1 IC304 50V 16V 8 GND
B F
JL402 B+ C595 MM1685ANRE B+
SW+3.3V 2 220 R306 9 V+32V
JL403 4V 0 JL418 JL433
5.7 5.0
P_CONT2

5
GND 3 VIN VOUT R530 10
B+ C594
0 JL434
DET_ANT

2
SW+3.3V 4 0.1 GND R529 11
C599 4.6 1.3 0 JL435
100 TO
ANT5V_SW

4
TO GND 5 CONT NOISE R528 12
JL404 16V JL436 AV-114

JL408

JL409
0
SWITCHING C309 C332 C339 DT_TUON BOARD
V+5.8E 6 1 2.2 R527 13
REGULATOR B+ C326 47 (2/5)
B 470p B 16V 0
CN202 V+5.8E 7 C598 14 GND CN302
0.1
JL437
THROUGH THE GND 8 C601 15 FAN-
100 THROUGH THE
PV-145 HARNESS JL405 B+ 16V
FVA-002 FFC
EV+12.1V 9 C593 JL424 16 GND
0.1 IC306 JL439
(SEE PAGE 4-44) GND 10 S-1170B50UC-OUJT JL425 17 Y_IN (SEE PAGE 4-8)
B SW+1.5V 11
JL406 C597
220
4V 4.6 5.0 JL414 JL419 JL426 18 GND
R703 JL440

5
ON/OFF VOUT
SW+1.5V 12 C596 JL427 0 19 B_IN
0.1 R361
0

2
VSS
5.7 JL428 20 GND
JL441

4
NC VIN
JL429 G_IN

JL410
21
B+ GND
22
JL442
R650
0 23 C/R_IN
C318 C314 C329 C334 C423 C335 C338
100 4.7 47 4.7 0.1 47 1
IC306 24 GND

5V REG
C/R_I N

FAN
CN203 2P JL348
C600 (AEP2 MODEL ONLY) G_IN
0.1
FAN+ 1 B_IN

FAN- 2 Y_IN

C B+
P_CONT2 10
TO (5/5)
V+1.5SW
B+
V+3.3SW
B+
V+3.3A
B+
V+5.8E

GNDD

IC300
2.5V REG R356 B+
0 CI+5V
B+
IC300 D+5V
S-1170B25UC-OTKTFG B+ 8
F300
0uH DT+3.3V
TO (2/5)
3.3 2.5 JL415
GNDD
1

5
2 ON/OFF VOUT JL412
VSS

D 3.3
3

4
NC VIN
JL411

C315
4.7 C324
B 22
6.3V

C433 C302
4.7 100
16V R303
B 0 JL416

C602 F31 4 B+
4.7 0uH C603 D +3.3V
B 22
6.3V B+
V +1.5V
B+ 4
R300 D +2.5V
0 TO (1/5)
JL413 B+
A +3.3V
JL407
GNDD
C301
1 DT_TUON
B
R357 AN5V_SW
0
E JL417 JL421 B+
DT+3.3V

DET_ANT
B+
V+5.8E
B+
V+32V

F30 1
B+
0uH VA+5V
JL422 B+
V +3.3D
9
JL423 B+
V +3.3A
TO (3/5)
F30 2 B+
0uH C342 V+3.3SW
47
16V
JL420
GNDT
C304 C307 C343
1 100 47
B 16V 16V

F GNDD

POWER
4-21 4-22 DT-120 (4/5)
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-4 for waveform.
• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

DT-120 BOARD(5/5)
VIDEO DECODER C1010 C1018
B+

C1004 R1018 7p 7p
50V 50V
A -REF.NO.: 40,000 SERIES- 1 330
5.0
Q1006
2SC4081T106R
2.5 2.0 BUFFER
Y_IN
R1001 R1022 L1002 L1006 R1030 JL1017
47 470 10uH 18uH 10
1.8 0.5%
1.3
Q1002 C1006 C1014 C1022 R1026 R1034 C1026
22p 82p 15p 1.8k 680 1
2SA1576A-T106-QR 50V 50V 50V 0.5%
Y BPF

C1009 C1017

STREAM_0
STREAM_1

STREAM_2

STREAM_3

STREAM_4

STREAM_5

STREAM_6

STREAM_7
C1001 R1017 7p 7p
1 330 50V 50V C1111
Q1001 Q1005 C1109 C1110 0 . 1 C1084
5.0 2SC4081T106R 1000p 0.1 16V 1
2SA1576A-T106-QR BUFFER 50V C1064 R1058 C1066 C1068 C1070 C1072 16V C1074 F 6.3V
C/R BPF 2.3 1.8 B 1 10k 1 1 1 1 F 1 X6S
C/R_IN
R1002 R1021 L1001 L1005 R1029 JL1016 R1059
47 470 10uH 18uH 10 10k C1076
1.6
B 0.5%
C1005
22p
C1013
82p
C1021
15p
R1025
1.8k
1.2
R1033
680
C1025
1
B+
1 R1049
0
50V 50V 50V 0.5%

JL1216
B+

3.3

1.5

3.3

1.5

3.3

1.5

1.1

3.3

0.7

0.4

0.4

0.4

1.5

0.8

0.4
0

0
STREAM_7
C1108 STREAM_7
1000p 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89
C1011 C1019 50V STREAM_6
7p 7p B STREAM_6

DVDD3J

DYSI

DFBI

FCSI

FOCP

FCKQ

DGND12

DVDD1N

FDIO9

FDIO8

FDIO7

FDIO6

DVDD3I

FDIO5

FDIO4

FDIO3

FDIO2

DVDD1M

DGND11

FDIO1

FDIO0

BCKM

RDEO

DVDD3H

FILD

VBLK

VD

HD

DGND10

DVDD1L

BCLK8

ROCK

ROY0

ROY1

DVDD3G

ROY2

ROY3

ROY4

ROY5

DGND9

DVDD1K

ROY6

ROY7

DGND8
C1002 R1019 50V 50V
1 330 STREAM_5
STREAM_5
Q1007
Q1003 5.0 2SC4081T106R STREAM_4
STREAM_4
BUFFER 1.5 3.3
2SA1576A-T106-QR 2 . 9 C1105 DVDD3F
2.3 0.1 133 DVDD10 88
G_IN G BPF STREAM_3
0 0.3 STREAM_3
R1003 R1023 L1003 L1007 R1031 JL1015 ROY8 C1085
10uH 18uH C1106 C1058 C1107 134 DYMI 87 1

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2
47 470 10 10 1 1000p STREAM_2
2.2 0.5% 0 2.0 STREAM_2
1.6 10V 6.3V 50V ROY9
F1003 C X6S B 135 DCGI 86
C1007 C1015 C1023 R1027 R1035 C1027 STREAM_1
22p 82p 15p 1.8k 0 STREAM_1
680 1 ROY10
50V 50V 50V 0.5% EMI 136 DCBI 85

R1040
I O C1112 STREAM_0

10k
0 1000p STREAM_0
G ROY11 50V
137 DCRI 84
B+ JL1010 1.5
B
ROY12
C R1037
JL1001 0.1
138 AVDD1

139 ATS1 ROY13

83

82
VCLK
C1012 C1020 47k
7p 7p JL1002 0.1 1.5 5
R1038 DVDD1J C1086
C1003 R1020 50V 50V F1002 47k 140 ATS2 81 1
1 330 JL1011 B+ TO (1/5)
3.3
Q1008 EMI 141 AVDD3A DGND7 80
Q1004 5.0 2SC4081T106R I O
JL1003 0.1 3.3
2SA1576A-T106-QR 2 . 9 BUFFER G R1039
142 ATS3 ROFDIE 79
R1054
2.3 47k 10k
B_IN B BPF
R1004 R1024 L1004 L1008 R1032 JL1018 FCLK8
10uH 18uH 143 AGND1 78
47 470 10
2.2 0.5% C1057 C1060
1.7 C1042 144 AGND2 FCKM 77
C1008 C1016 C1024 R1028 220 1 1000p C1059
R1036 C1028 4V 1.5 C1113
22p 82p 15p 1.8k 680 1 10 16V
50V 50V 50V 0.5% 145 AGND3 DVDD1I 76 0.01
16V
1.4 3.3 B
C1043 RGRED R1055 C1104
C1033 0.1 146 VCLY 75 47k 0.1
0.01 C1044 16V 1.5 3.2
25V 0.1 147 VCOM1 RSTB 74 XRESET
B 16V
0.8
B+ 148 AVI SLA0 73
R1061
V+5.8E 1.1 3.2 4.7k
C1045 149 VLPF1 SDA 72 SDA_VDEC

0.1
0.1
C1035 16V 0.8
150 ASYI SCL 71
3.2
R1060
4.7k
SCL_VDEC
IC1002
D 16V
C1046 1.9
IC1001 DVDD1H
1.5
C1087
SDRAM
IC302 JL623 B+ JL636
0.1
C1036 16V
0.1
0.9
151 VRB1

152 ACYI VIDEO DECODER AGNDA4

70

69
1
IC1002
HY57V161610FTP-6DR-C
10 3.3V REG JL621 16V
2.4 C1114
C1047 153 VRT1 IOCR 68 1
TO (4/5) 0.1 3.3
IC1001 6.3V C1088 C1096

50
IC302 IC319 VDD1

1
C1037 16V 0.8 3.3 X6S 1 VSS2
MM1563DFBE 0.1 154 ACSI UPD64015AGM-UEU-A AVDDA3 0.1
S-1112B50MC-L7JTFG 16V
67 16V SDRDQ0 0.7 0.8 SDRDQ15

49
DQ0

2
3.3 DQ15
JL639 JL638 C1061 155 AVDD3B AGNDA3 66
4.7 1.9 5.7 5.0 1 SDRDQ1 0.5 1.1 SDRDQ14

48
VIN VOUT DQ1

3
CN DQ14
5

CONT
1

5
4

3.3 C1115
R715 156 AVDD3C IOCB 65 1000p
0 JL634 C1031 C1120

47
VSS 50V VSSQ1

4
SUB GND VSSQ4
2

R719
6

0.01 3.3 0.1

3

JL704 C1048 0 B C1089

5.7 33k 4.7 25V 157 VRT2 AVDDA2 64 1 16V 0.7 1.1
B 0.1 6.3V SDRDQ2 F SDRDQ13

46
ON/OFF DQ2
2

NC JL1004

5
VIN NC DQ13
7

16V 0 X6S C1121

3.3 158 ASCI AGNDA2 63 1.2 1.2 0 . 1 SDRDQ12
SDRDQ3

45
DQ3

6
VO C1032 DQ12
1

C1049 0 16V
R714 JL637 0.01 159 VRB2 OYG 62 3.3 3.3
0 25V 0.1 F1006 C1097 F

44
JL1005 JL1013 VDDQ1

7
B 16V 0 3.3 1 VDDQ4
160 AGI AVDDA1 61 C1100
C1090 O EMI I SDRDQ4 1.1 1.3 1 SDRDQ11

43
DQ4

8
0 1 DQ11
C1050 RSET G
0.1 161 161 60 6.3V SDRDQ5 1.1 1.1 SDRDQ10
C1122

42
C634 C306 C633 C636 C623 C626 X6S DQ5

9
100 C1038 16V 0 DQ10
1 1000p 2 . 2 1 1 1 0.1 162 ACBI REF 59
6.3V 50V 10V 6.3V 16V C1030 16V
IC319

41
10
B B X6S 0.01 0 VSSQ2 VSSQ3
E B+ 25V
B
C1051
0.1 163 VRT3 AGNDA1 58 SDRDQ6 1.1 1.2 SDRDQ9

40
11
JL706 16V JL1006 0 1.5 DQ6 DQ9
5V REG C1103 C1118
V+1.5SW 164 ABI DVDD1G 57 0.1 3 SDRDQ7 1.1 1.2 1000p SDRDQ8
IC320

39
12
0 16V C1094 DQ7 DQ8
JL622 C1052 DGND6 7p 50V
B+ 0.1 165 VRB3 56 X1001 50V C1098 3.3 3.3 B

38
13
V+3.3SW 24.576MHz VDDQ2 VDDQ3
1.5V REG C1053 16V 0
XI
1.6 1
B+ F1001 0.1 166 VCOM3 55 R1053 C1101

37
B+

14
IC320 JL1167 16V 3.3 1.6 1k LDQM NC/RFU 1
MM1561FFBE EMI 167 AVDD3D XO 54 SDRWE 3.2
I O

36
15
R709 3.3 3.3 C1095 XWE UDQM
10k JL703 JL702 G C1062 DVDD3E C1092 7p C1117
2.3 0.2 1 168 AVDD3E 53 1 50V SDRCAS 1000p 50V B 3.1 1.6 SDRCLK

35
16
P_CONT2 XCAS
5

CLK
4

C1063 0 0.9
0.1 169 VCOM4 SDRDQ15 52 SDRRAS 3.1 3.3
16V C1116 SDRCKE

34
17
XRAS
6

CKE
3

0 0.8 1000p 50V B

C1034 C1040 C1041 C1039 170 ACRI SDRDQ0 51
3.3 220 1 1000p 0.1 SDRCS 2.9

33
18
XCS
7

NC
2

4V 16V 0 1.3
1.5 C1054 171 VLPF2 SDRDQ14 50 0.2 0
0.1 SDRA10 SDRA9

32
19
BA A9
1

16V 0 0.6
172 ARI SDRDQ1 49 0.2 0.1
SDRABP SDRA8

31
20
0 1.5 C1093 A10/AP A8
C1029 C1055 DVDD1F 1
0.01 0.1 173 VRB4 48 SDRA0 0.2 0.3 SDRA7

30
21
25V C1056 16V 0 1.3 A0 A7
B 0.1 174 VRT4 SDRDQ13 47 0.2 0.3
16V SDRA1 SDRA6

29
22
R720 C628 C630 C629 0.8 A1 A6
10k 1 1000p 2 . 2 SDRDQ2
F 6.3V 50V 10V 175 AGND4 46 SDRA2 0.2 0.3 SDRA5

28
23
X6S B B A2 A5
176 AGND5 DGND5 45 0.4 0.3
SDRA3 SDRA4

SDRDQ10

SDRDQ11

SDRDQ12

27
24
A3 A4

SDRRAS

SDRDQ7

SDRDQ8

DVDD1D

SDRDQ6

SDRDQ9

SDRDQ5

SDRDQ4

SDRDQ3

DVDD3D
DVDD3A

SDRABP

DVDD3B

DVDD1A

DVDD1B

DVDD3C

DVDD1C

SDRCAS
SDRCKE

SDRCLK

DVDD1E
SDRA10
SCKSET

SDRWE
DGND1

DGND2

DGND3

DGND4
SDRCS
SDRA9

SDRA8

SDRA7

SDRA6

SDRA5

SDRA4

SDRA3

SDRA2

SDRA1

SDRA0
TEST1

TEST2
C1099 3.3

26
25
1 VDD2 VSS1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
3.3

0.2

0.1

0.1

0.3

0.3

3.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.2

1.5

0.2

0.2

2.9

3.3

3.1

1.5

1.7

3.3

1.5

3.1

3.2

1.0

1.2

1.5

1.1

1.2

1.1

1.2

1.5

1.1

1.2

1.2

1.2

3.3
F1007
B+ B+
I EMI O
F1005 JL1009 G JL1014
B+ B+
I EMI O
F1004 JL1008 G
B+ B+
I EMI O
G
GNDD
C1082 C1080 C1079 C1091 C1083 C1081 C1065 C1067 C1069 C1071 C1073 C1075 C1077 C1078 C1119
220 1 1000p 220 1 1000p 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 220
B+ 4V 4V B+ 4V
G V+3.3A

2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8

R1047

R1048

R1050

R1051
R1042 R1043 R1044 R1045 R1052

100

100

100

100
R1046
100 100 100 100 100 100

1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7

JL1223
JL1224
JL1230

JL1232

JL1235
JL1231

JL1233

JL1236
SDRWE
SDRCAS
SDRCLK
SDRRAS

SDRDQ10

SDRDQ11

SDRDQ12

SDRDQ13

SDRDQ14

SDRDQ15
SDRCKE

SDRDQ7
SDRDQ8
SDRDQ6
SDRDQ9

SDRDQ5

SDRDQ4

SDRDQ3

SDRDQ2

SDRDQ1

SDRDQ0
SDRCS
SDRABP

H
SDRA10

SDRA9

SDRA8

SDRA7

SDRA6

SDRA5

SDRA4

SDRA3

SDRA2

SDRA1

SDRA0

VIDEO DECODER
DT-120 (5/5) 4-23 4-24
 RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-45 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ND201
FLUORESCENT TUBE DISPLAY

FR-274 BOARD
FL DRIVER, LINE 2 IN FUNCTION SW
-REF.NO.: 30,000 SERIES-
A

P16

P15

P14

P13

P12

P11

P10
10G

11G

12G

P9

P8

P7

P6

P5

P4

P3

P2

P1
1G

2G

3G

4G

5G

6G

7G

8G

9G
F1

F1

F2

F2
IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 51 52

JL269

JL275

JL284

JL286
JL250

JL260

JL272

JL274

JL276

JL280

JL285
JL238

JL278
JL234

JL235

JL241
JL242

JL245

JL251

JL265

JL270

JL273
JL253
JL236

JL237

JL239

JL252

JL271

JL283
JL244

JL258

JL279
JL263

JL277
JL243

JL246

JL248

JL262

JL268

JL282
JL240

JL249

JL261

JL264

JL281
JL267
JL259

JL266
JL247

SEG1 6

SEG1 5

SEG1 4

SEG1 3

SEG1 2

SEG1 1

SEG1 0

SEG9

SEG8

SEG7

SEG6

SEG5

SEG4

SEG3

SEG2

SEG1
GRD1 0

GRD1 1

GRD1 2
GRD1

GRD2

GRD3

GRD4

GRD5

GRD6

GRD7

GRD8

GRD9
L201 D210
100uH 1SS355TE-17
B+ JL223

GRD1

GRD2

GRD3

GRD4

GRD5

GRD6

GRD7

GRD8

GRD9
B Q201
2SD1898T100R D211
1SS355TE-17
DSC T201
DC-DC CONVERTER Q203

MM3Z6V2ST1
R209 C217

D216
10k TRANSFORMER C215 C216 0.1 2SB1197K-T-146-R
D208 0.1 22 50V 12V SWITCH
C201 1SS355TE-17 50V 50V B 11.8 11.8 B+ B+
100 B
25V C207 2 10
2700p C222
200V D209 0.01

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5

-22.5
1SS355TE-17 R217 C211 16V

4.9
10k 0.1 B
3 1 JL224 11.1 B
D212

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34
SDPB31H3C0100
R223

VD D
4 7

GR3

GR8
VSS
Q202

GR1

GR2

GR4

GR5

GR6

GR7

GR9
2SD1898T100R 2.7k
DSC JL254 GRD10

33
1
5 8 R231 LED1 GR10
R10.2/P0 2.2K JL255 -22.5 GRD11
HDD

32
2
LED2 GR11
R0/P5 JL256 R4.9/P0 -22.5 GRD12
R215
IC201

31
3
6 9 5.6k LED3 GR12
R232 JL257 R0/P5
C 0
-22.5

30
4
R227 LED4 FL DRIVE VEE
27k Q205 R0/P3.9
R233 100k -24.8 SEG16

29
5
DTC124EUA-T106 OSC SG16
R3.5/P0 R235 0 2.8 -22.3 SEG15
LED DRIVE IC201

28
6
DOU T PT6315 SG15
0 Q206 FLD T R250 47 0 -24.2 SEG14

27
DTC143TUA-T106

7
DI N SG14
4.9
LED DRIVE FLC K R251 47 0 -17.8 SEG13

26
8
CLK SG13
FLSTB R252 47 4.9 -24.2 SEG12

25
9
Q204 STB SG12
MUN2213T1 R236 10k 4.9 -24.2 SEG11

10
C213

24
SWITCH K1 SG11
0.1
R237 10k 0 -24.2 SEG10

11

23
K2 SG10
0 -17.8

VSS

SG1

SG2

SG3

SG4

SG5

SG6

SG7

SG8

SG9
VDD
D214
SLI-343YC3F

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22
DVD

4.9

-22.2

-22.3

-22.3

-22.3

SEG6 -16.3

SEG7 -22.3

SEG8 -10.2

SEG9 -10.3

-18.3
D

SEG1

SEG2

SEG3

SEG4

SEG5
C221 C223
0.01 0.1
16V 50V
B B
R225
270
CN201 5P
JL201
TO KEY2 5 CN203 17P
FL-178 JL202 JL20 6
BOARD KEY1 4 17 FLPO N
CN106 JL203 JL20 7
IR 3 16 IR
THROUGH THE JL205 JL20 8
B+
FLR-010 FFC GN D 2 15 V+12RI E
JL204 B+ B+ B+ JL20 9
(SEE PAGE 4-20) V +5F 1
R201 JL21 0
14 V +5F
R222
0 0 13 GND
FLD T JL21 1
12 FLDATA
FLCK JL21 2 TO
11 FLCLK AV-114
JL21 3
E D202
STZ6.8N-T146
FLSTB

JL21 4
10 FLSTB
BOARD(1/5)
CN105
R206 9 GND
0 JL21 5 THROUGH THE
8 HDD2 FAR-007 FFC
JL21 6
7 A_TV
R207
0
JL21 7 (SEE PAGE 4-6)
6 D_TV
R228 R238 R243 JL21 8
D203 10k 10k 10k
STZ6.8N-T146 5 DITV
JL21 9
4 PLTV
JL22 0
3 KEY1
J201 JL22 1
R205 2 KEY2
LINE 2 IN 0 JL22 2
3 4 D204 PROGRAM
3 4 S201 S203 S208 1 KEY3
STZ6.8N-T146
1 2
S VIDEO 1 2 CN202 11P CH+
5 6 2C JL225 OPEN/CLOSE REC_STOP
1 2C R244
SDET2 JL226 R229 R239
2.2k 2.2k 2.2k

F JL227
2

3
SDET2

GN D
S204
S209
CH-
7 INPUT_SELECT
VIDEO
D205 2Y JL228
4 2Y TO
8 STZ6.8N-T146 JL229 AV-114 R230 R240 R245
2.2k 2.2k S210 2.2k
R213 5 GN D BOARD(1/5)
9 0 S213
L(MONO) 2V JL230 CN106
10 6 2V R241
AUDIO FB201 THROUGH TH E
HDD PLAY
0uH 3.3k
FB202 7
11 0uH GN D
FAR-006 FF C R246
R
13
12
2L JL231
JL232
8 2L
S211 3.3k
SIGNAL PATH
9 GN D (SEE PAGE 4-6) R248
D206 2R JL233 3.3k
S207
R242
5.6k
STOP VIDEO SIGNAL
STZ6.8N-T146 10 2R
S212 AUDI O
11 GN D
DVD REC
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
REC
D207
STZ6.8N-T146 PB
G
C204 C206 R218 R220
220p 220p 220k 220k

FL DRIVER, LINE 2 IN, FUNCTION SW

4-25 4-26 FR-274
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-59 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6

FL-178 BOARD
DV,USB,REMOCON,RECEIVER,POWER,SW
A -REF.NO.: 30,000 SERIES-

CN101
6P
JL101
TPB N 6
JL102 FL101
TO 0uH
TPBP 5
RD-065

3
JL103
BOARD(6/7) GND 4
CN5101
GND 3 CN103
THROUGH THE JL104
4P
RV-003 HARNESS TPAP 2 TPB-

2
JL105

1
TPAN 1 TPB+ DV IN
(SEE PAGE

2
TPA-
4-40)

3
TPA+

4
B
IC101

3
FL102 REMOTO CONTROL
0uH RECEIVER

IC101
C102 L104 GP1UM27XK0SF
1 0uH

GND
OUT
VCC
R109
33

4.9

4.9
D- VFB CN105
4P
2 1 C111
Pict Bridge 100
16V (POWER) CN106
USB 5P
JL117
3 4 B type C107 S101
1 KEY2
C CN102
10P
USBDP 1
JL108
R105
33 D+ GND
0.01
JL118
2 KEY1
TO
FR-274
1 JL119 BOARD
JL107 3 IR
GND R113 CN201
2 JL121
JL106 VDR102 VDR104 0 THROUGH THE
4 GND
USBDM 1 JL120
3 L105 B+ FLR-010 FFC
0uH 5 V +5F
TO GND 4 R112
RD-065 JL110 0 (SEE PAGE 4-25)
V+5USB 5 CN104
BOARD(6/7) L102
JL109 B+ 0uH V+5 4P
CN5201 USBVFB

1
6 R108
THROUGH THE JL112 33 D-
USBDM 2 S102

2
7
RV-001 HARNESS C101 1
GND D+ ONE_TOUCH_DUB

3
8 R104
(SEE PAGE USBDP 2
JL111 33 GND USB
A type

4
9
4-40) L103
GND 0uH
10

DV, USB, REMOCON, RECEIVER, POWER, SW

FL-178 4-27 4-28
 RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-55 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

RD-065 BOARD(1/7)
POWER BLOCK
-REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES- C 4511 V +1R0 B+
4.7 V+1R 0
6.3V
B+ TP4502 TP4503 B V +2R5 B+
B+
A C 4507
C 4501
1
C 4535
1000p
V+3A B+
V+2R 5

100 6.3V 50V IC4561 V+3A

16V X6S B S-1112B50MC-L7JTFG V+3D B+
IC4511 C 4562 V+3D 1
B+ TP4504 TP4505 S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG IC4511 1
6.3V
TP4565 B+ V+5HD V+3V B+

5
1
CN4501 13P X6 S VI N VOUT V+3V TO (2/7)
C 4508 C 4502 C 4536 3.3V REG V+5D B+
220 1 1000p C456 3

2
EV+5.8 V 1 NC VI N GND V+5D
4V 6.3V 50V 1
X6S B 6.3V V+1R5_IN B+

4
GND D 2 VSS CONT NB X6S V+1R5_IN
TP4506 TP4507
IC4561

5
SW+1.53V 3 ON/OFF VOUT GND D
C 4509 C 4537 C 4503 R4511
SW+1.53V 4 220 1000p 1 0 5V REG
B+ 4V 50V 6.3V
B+ V+3V
B X6S
TO GND D 5 C 4524 C 4567 IC4562
SWITCHING TP4508 TP4509 4.7 C 4513 TP4608 1 S-1112B33MC-L6STFG
REGURATOR SW+3.33V 6 6.3V 4.7 6.3V P_CONT2
B 6.3V X6S TP6096
CN201 C 4504 B V+3D V+3HD V+1R5_IN B+
0.1

5
1
THROUGH THE SW+3.33V 7 VI N VOUT V+1R5_IN
B+ 16V
B+ V +12A B+
PR-076 HARNESS F
C 4570

2
GND D 8 IC4521 GND
1
V +12A
B+ TP4510 TP4511 S-1170B25UC-OTKTFG 6.3V V+3D B+
(SEE PAGE 4-36)
IC4521

4
V +12V 9 R4521 CONT NB X6S V+3D
R4501

RB501V-40TE-17
B GND 10
0 TP4501 C 4539
1000p C 4505
IC4502
2.5A C 4515
6.8k
NC VI N IC4562 V+5_AI N B+
V+5_AIN 2

4
50V 1 32V 47 2.5V REG B+

D4521
B 6.3V V+5_AO
V+5M 11 6.3V 3.3V REG TO (3/7)
VSS V+5_AO

2
X6S
TP4514 V+5_VI B+
GND M 12 ON/OFF VOUT V+5_VI

5
TP4512 TP4513 TP4571 C 4526 V+5_VO B+
V12M 13 15k
V+5_VO
B+ I C4501 V +2R5
C 4540
1000p
C 4506
0.1
2.5A
32V C 4516
10
R4504
2.7k
R4505
2.7k
R4507
2.7k C 4522 C 4525
IC4571 GND D

50V 16V
16V 1 4.7 1.8V REG
D4571 GNDA
B F 6.3V 6.3V R4574 RB501V-40TE-17 R4575
X6S B B+ 0 0 V+1R8

B+ V+1R5_IN TP4569 B+
R4573
TP4572 TP4609 B+ V +1R0 0 V+3D B+
IC4531 V+3D
MM1701WHBE V +2R5 B+ 3
V+2R 5
C 4532
0.01 TO (4/7)
CONT CN 16V 4 5 GND D

4
R4531 B
IC4531

S-1132B18-U5T1G
0
NC2 GND

3
C4572

VI N
C 4534

ON/OFF
10 1.0V REG 220 C4573
C 4571
C

IC4571
NC3 NC1 10V 4V 4.7

2
4.7
C 6.3V V +1R8 B+
VI N VOUT B V+1R 8

VOUT
VSS
C 4531 C 4533 V+3D B+ 4

NC
1 1 V+3D
6.3V 6.3V
X6S X6S TO (5/7)
3 2 1 GND D

B+ V+5M

B+ V+12M V+3D B+
V+3D
TP4610 B+ V+3A B+ TP4570 B+ V +12A V+3HD B+
IC4541 V+3HD
C 4543
MM1563DFBE 1000p V+5HD B+ 5
R4541 50V R5445 R4581 Q4581 V+5HD
0 B TP4567 0 B+ V+5D 100 EV+5.8V B+ TO (6/7)
2SC4081T106R

4
CONT CN EV+5.8V
RIPPLE
FILTER

3
SUB GND L 4551 GND D
B+ 10uH B+ V+5_AO
C 4585 C 4586

2
VI N NC 0.1 100
16V 16V
C 4541 F

1
R4559 VO R4552
1
D 0 6.3V
X6S
C 4542
2.2
10V
0 B+ V+5_AIN V+3D B+
V+3D
B V+3A B+
R4554 V+3A
0 B+ V+5_VI V+5L B+
IC4541 R4553
V+5M B+
V+5L

V+5M
6
3V REG 0 B+ V+5_VO V+12M B+ TO (7/7)
V+12M
D4552 R4556
RB501V-40TE-17 0
GND D
B+ B+ V+5L
GND M

IC4552 IC4552
S-1170B50UC-OUJTFG
5V REG C 4558 C 4559 C 4553
100 100 1000p
16V 16V 50V
5
1

ON/OFF VOUT
TP4568 B
C 4555
4.7
2

VSS
6.3V
B R4558 C 4556
E
3

22k NC VIN 4.7 C 4557

6.3V 0.01
B 16V
B

Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted

line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.

POWER BLOCK
4-29 4-30 RD-065 (1/7)
RDR-HXD870/HXD970/HXD1070

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-55 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

B+
RD-065 BOARD(2/7) B+
EMMA BLOCK B+
A -REF.NO.: 20,000 SERIES- C1044 C1045
2p 2p AEP,UK
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
L 1831 R1812
220 B+ 1p 1p AUS
IC1301
IC1302

NJM12904V(TE2)

NJM12904V(TE2)
O EM I I C 1812

+
C 1811 C1045 C1044 R1301

-
L 1821 R1802 2.2 1 470 VREF V OUT
G * *

IC1301

IC1302
B+ C1312 R1312
B+
O EM I I
C 1802 C 1801
220 10V
B
6.3V
X6S
R1814 R1813
50V
CK
50V
CK
C 1301
2.2
10V
C 1302
0.1
16V
0.5% C 1315
2.2
10V
B
0.1
16V
F
1k
0.5%
VREF D OUT
SIGNAL PATH
G 2.2 1 B F
L 1811 15uH 33 330

+
10V 6.3V

-
B X6S R1302 VIDEO SIGNAL
C 1814 C 1813
1k
0.5% 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
AUDI O
R1804 R1803 150p 100p Q1811
L 1801 39uH 33 330 50V 50V ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
FSC BPF X 1002
X 1001
C 1804
330p
C 1803
220p
Q1801 24.576MHz 27MHz X101
TP1202
REC
VREF_D 16.9344MHz
50V 16V ISA1602AM1TP-1EF
VREF_D CH R1303 C 1303
HCL BPR R193
A T/XDT 1k 0.1 C 1316 R1314 C 1313 PB

VREF_D
B AT/XDT
0
R114
0.5% 16V
F
10
10V
R1313
1k
0.5%
0 0.1
16V
7 HADRS7
33k
C F
HADRS7
TO (4/7) HADRS6
HADRS6
HADRS5
HADRS5
C 1304

1080P
10

XDVI
C 1805 C 1815 47

TXD0_LL
SPDIFSEL

RXD0_LL
0.047 0.047 6.3V
10V 10V TO
B B (3/7,4/7)
TP1201
8 XRESET
TO
(3/7,4/7,5/7,7/7)

AOD0

AOBCK

AOLRCK

DACCLKO

ADCCLKO
NSCS

AIBCK0

AILRCK0
AIBD0
SPDIFO
SMCKOUT

SMDOUT

SMDIN
RXD1
JTC L

JTDI
EDIN T

JTMS

JTDO
JTMRS T
C 1058 C1027
0.01 C1028
R5856 0.1 0.1 1080P
16V R1013 10k 10V
B 10k 10V 1080P
B B R1030 R1031 XDVI
100 220 AEP,UK XDVI 11
TXD0_LL

*
VIOCLK

*
VIOD7

VIOD6

VIOD5

VIOD4

VIOD3

VIOD2

VIOD1

VIOD0
47 150 AUS SCL_VDEC TO (6/7)

AIOBD
C

AIOBCK

AIOLRCK
R1181
B+ R1001 RXD0_LL

R1029
10k

R1030

R1031
82
10k SDA_VDEC
R1068
47k

CN470 1
28P

K2

AG23

AG22
AF1
G2

K20

K23

AF21
L1
AC20

AB21

L20

L21

L24
H19

H20

G19

H21

M24

AE1

D18

AF22
F21
SP1ERRB/GPIO20 AD20

J19

J21

J22

J24

AD23

AD24
A T/XDT

AB22

AC22

AC24

AB20
AE21
AF23
Y19

AA20

AE20

AE24

AF24

K5
L3

L4

L5

AOBCK C19

AIOMCK0 C20
AOD0 E18

E20

AIBCK0 E19

AIOMCK1 E21
ATX D19

D20

AILRCK0 F19
K4

K3
28 AT/XDT

HCBP

HLCO

FSCO
JTMS

JTDO

FCBP

CLK24OUT

CLK27AOUT

XA2

TXD0B

RXD0B
HLCI
CLKPWM1/VIFLD/GPIO61

JTRST

JTCL

SMDOUT/SS0DOUT

AOLRCK
AIOLRCKSP0ERRB/GPIO30

SMCKOUT/SS0CKIN
CLK24IN

RXD1B/GPIO38

SP0REQB/GPIO33

AIOBCK/SP0CLK/GPIO31
NMI

RSTSWB

EDINT

FSCI

AIOBD/SP0STRT/GPIO32

VIOCLK/SP0EN/GPIO21

AIBD0
SP1EN/SS1EN/GPIO09

VIOD7/SP0DAT7/GPIO29

VIOD6/SP0DAT6/GPIO28

VIOD5/SP0DAT5/GPIO27
DCD0B/SS0SB/GPIO47
JTDI
SP1CLK/SS1CLK/GPIO08

CLKPWM0/GPIO60

VIOD4/SP0DAT4/GPIO26

VIOD3/SP0DAT3/GPIO25

VIOD2/SP0DAT2/GPIO24

VIOD1/SP0DAT1/GPIO23

VIOD0/SP0DAT0/GPIO22
CLK27AIN

XA1

TXD1B/GPIO39

CLK27BIN/GPIO6

SMDIN/SS0DIN
R4709 R4708 27 GND
10k 10k R4732
4.7k
CN1401 14P 26 SDA_VDEC

TRST 14
R1401 TP1401
22 JTMRS T IC4702 C 4702 IC4702 R4707 25 SCL_VDEC
R1414 TP1402 TC7SZ08FU(TE85R) R4713 R4731
22 HADRS7 BUFFER 1 10k 10k 4.7k
EJSNGEN 13 6.3V 24 GND
R1402 TP1403 X6S R4727 TP6045
22 JTDI 10k
TDI 12 VCC INB 23 TX1

1
TP1430 R4728 TP6048
AB23 V19 C 4705 10k
GND 11 SP1STRT/SS1STRT/GPIO10 VIVSB/RTS0B/GPIO36 1000p IN A 22 RX1

2
R1403 TP1429 50V
22 JTDO W19 U19 ADPOW VIOCLK B
TDO 10 SP1REQB/SS1ERRB/GPIO11 VIHSB/CTS0B/GPIO37 OUTY GND 21 GND

3
R1415 TP1406 R4723 R4729 TP6103
22 HADRS6 AH24 F17 AMUTE 0
DINTEN CSYNC/GPIO54 47
9 SP1DAT0/SS1DAT/GPIO12 20 XRESET
R1404 TP1404 C101 7
JTMS
D (FOR CHECK)
TMS 8
22 AG24
SP1DAT1/SS0CLK/GPIO13 VRBB
D24 0.1
10V 19 GND(RFE/XLL)
AC21 C23 B C 1016 C 4701
GND 0.1 1 IC4701
7 SP1DAT2/SS0EN/GPIO14 VCOMB 10V 18 GND
R1405 TP1405 C101 5 B 6.3V R4703 TP6063
22 JTCL AE22 C24 X6S TC74VCX245FK 100
TCK 0.1
6 SP1DAT3/SSOSTRT/GPIO15 VRTB 10V 17 VCLKI
AE23 F24 B C 1035 C 4704 R4701
0.1 TO DT-120

20
GND 5 SP1DAT4/SS0ERRB/GPIO16 VRBR 1000p VCC DIR 16 GND

1
R1406 TP1407 10V 50V 100 BOARD
JTRS T C103 3 B TP6056
22 AD22 G21 0.1 R4721 B CN104

19
RST 4 SP1DAT5/SS0DAT/GPIO17 VCOMR OE A1 15 STREAM_7

2
R1416 TP1408 10V 100
22 HADRS5 AD21 F22 B C 1032 VIOD7 TP6057 THROUGH THE
0.1

18
JTSEL 3 SP1DAT6/GPIO18 VRTR B1 A2 14 STREAM_6

3
R1407 TP1409 10V FVR-001 FFC
EDIN T C102 9 B VIOD6 TP6058
22 AC23 G23 0.1

17
DINT 2 SP1DAT7GPIO19 VRBC B2 A3 13 STREAM_5

4
10V C 1030
TP1414 B+ B VIOD5 TP6059
H22 0.1 (SEE PAGE 4-16)

16
V+3 1 VCOMC B3 A4 12 STREAM_4

5
10V
C 1401 C121 C103 1 B VIOD4 TP6060
R1412 R1411 R1413 0.01 AF15 G22 0.1

15
2200p CBPD VRTC B4 A5 11 STREAM_3

6
10k 10k 47k 16V